Broad-Based Black Economic Empowerment Act (B-BBEE Act)
Act 53 of 2003
Provides the empowerment-compliance context often used in public-sector supplier evaluation.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Issuing Organization
Eskom National Transmission Company of South AfricaLocation
National
Closing Date
31 Jul 2026
Documents available on tender detail page
Tender Type
Request for Bid(Open-Tender)
Delivery Location
2 Maxwell Drive - Sunninghill - Sunninghill - 2157
Organization Type
GOVERNMENT
Published
02 Jul 2026
OCDS Reference
ocds-9t57fa-161022
This tender requires a security upgrade for pembroke substation under national security project 1. Open to professional service providers and consultants. Closing date is 31 july 2026.
Date & Time
Friday, 31 July 2026 - 10:00
Venue
https://teams.microsoft.com/meet/390051265562957?p=8ZVSImq9MB4CLAkMc5
A compulsory site visit meeting will be held on: - date: 14 july 2026 - time: 10h00 (sast) - venue: pembroke substation - GPS coordinates: 32°52'59.5"S 27°31'34.3"E Note: failure to attend the compulsory site visit, will result in your tender being disqualified.
Request for Bid(Open-Tender)
2 Maxwell Drive - Sunninghill - Sunninghill - 2157
02 Jul
2026
Tender Published
Tender was published
31 Jul
2026
Closing Date
Tender closing date
These references help suppliers understand the public-procurement framework around this opportunity. They are generated from the tender category, issuing organisation type and procurement context.
Tender Pack - NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation - E3176NTCSAMWP.zip
The tender is for the 'NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation', involving the design, supply, installation, and commissioning of security infrastructure. The project includes upgrading perimeter fence lighting, operational floodlighting, inner security fences, access gates, and a Non-Lethal Energized Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) to ensure the safety of Eskom assets and compliance with OHS Act and National Key Point standards.
Learn how to submit a winning bid with these related articles
Win consulting, legal, accounting, and engineering service contracts with government. Learn registration requirements and proposal strategies.
Comprehensive guide to Institute of IT Professionals South Africa membership. Certification levels, requirements for ICT professionals, and how IITPSA membership enhances credibility for SITA and government IT tenders.
The rapidly evolving cybersecurity landscape in South Africa has made it imperative for security contractors in Gauteng to stay abreast of the latest technical requirements and certification standards. As the country continues to navigate the complexities of digital transformation, the regulatory environment has become increasingly stringent, with a strong emphasis on compliance and risk management. In this context, understanding the technical requirements and certification standards for cybersecurity tenders is crucial for security suppliers looking to navigate the procurement landscape successfully in 2026.
As a Construction contractor in Gauteng, 2026 is shaping up to be a year of renewed focus on regulatory compliance and transformation. The Construction Industry Development Board (CIDB) grading system remains a critical component of procurement processes, ensuring that contractors are assessed for their financial, technical, and experiential capabilities. Understanding the CIDB Grade 5 requirements is essential for contractors looking to secure tenders and grow their businesses.
💡 Want more tendering tips and strategies?
Explore Our BlogMedian Estimate
R 595 406
Range
Based on 25 comparable awarded tenders. Companies with similar profiles typically bid near the median.
* Estimates are based on historical data and do not guarantee actual award values.
Tenders in this industry often require registration with these bodies.
Recommended Certifications
Having these can improve your winning chances: CA(SA) - Chartered Accountant, PMI-PMP (Project Management Professional), Prince2 Practitioner, Six Sigma Certification
AI Document Analysis Stages
We refine every tender document through these stages so you can brief your team and prepare your bid with confidence. Anything marked as "in progress" will be upgraded automatically — no action required from you.
Important Dates
Source: Tender Pack - NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation - E3176NTCSAMWP.zip (TENDER){"closingDate":"02 July 2026","closingTime":"10h00","briefingSession":"{\"date\":\"14 July 2026\",\"time\":\"10h00\",\"venue\":\"e: 14 July 2026\",\"is_compulsory\":true}"}
Contact Information
Source: Tender Pack - NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation - E3176NTCSAMWP.zip (TENDER){"name":null,"email":null,"phone":null,"department":null,"address":"ions of Tender which may"}
Submission Guidelines
Source: Tender Pack - NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation - E3176NTCSAMWP.zip (TENDER)Returnable Documents: The 5 working days period does not apply to CIDB proof of grading. Refer to the returnable, table the prescribed period for CIDB proof of grading.
Evaluation Criteria
Source: Tender Pack - NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation - E3176NTCSAMWP.zip (TENDER)Tenderers must be registered with CIDB with the required grading. A 'Gate Keeper' requirement mandates a Construction Manager registered as a Professional Construction Manager/Project Manager with SACPCMP or ECSA. Technical evaluation requires a minimum weighted final score of 70%, assessing human resource skills (qualifications in Built Environment/Electrical/Civil Engineering), tools and equipment (Crane Truck, TLB, LDVs), and relevant experience (Task Orders).
Technical Specifications
Source: Tender Pack - NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation - E3176NTCSAMWP.zip (TENDER)Cell C31: SUBTOTAL CARRIED TO FORM OF OFFER (EXCLUDING VAT)
<x:xmpmeta xmlns:x="adobe:ns:meta/"><rdf:RDF xmlns:rdf="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#"><rdf:Description rdf:about="uuid:faf5bdd5-ba3d-11da-ad31-d33d75182f1b" xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"/><rdf:Description rdf:about="uuid:faf5bdd5-ba3d-11da-ad31-d33d75182f1b" xmlns:xmp="http://ns.adobe.com/xap/1.0/"><xmp:CreateDate>2023-07-26T09:53:16.410</xmp:CreateDate></rdf:Description><rdf:Description rdf:about="uuid:faf5bdd5-ba3d-11da-ad31-d33d75182f1b" xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"><dc:creator><rdf:Seq xmlns:rdf="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#"><rdf:li>Diane Else</rdf:li></rdf:Seq>
The Employer, identified in the Acceptance signature block, has solicited offers to enter into a contract for the procurement of:
The conditions of contract are the core clauses and the clauses for main Option
Please read both the NEC3 Engineering and Construction Contract (April 2013) and the relevant parts of its Guidance Notes (ECC3-GN)
For use with the NEC3 Engineering & Construction Contract
Clause 11 in NEC3 Engineering and Construction Contract (ECC3) Option B states:
(insert at award stage or delete if not applicable)
is in the documents which the Contract Data states it is in.
Repairs to damaged galvanising and untreated steelwork
In South Africa the Electric Machinery Regulations which is administered by the Chief Inspector of
Occupational Health and Safety of the Department of Labour, requires that all electric fence installations
(nonlethal), temporary or permanent, comply with the requirements of SANS 10222-3. The aim of this standard
is to prescribe the minimum requirements for the electrical components for Non-lethal Energised Perimeter
Detection System (NLEPDS).
Note: The terms Non-lethal Energised Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) and Non-lethal Electric Fence System (NLEFS)
shall refer to the same system in this document.
2. Supporting clauses
2.1 Scope
This document outlines the requirements of the electrical components to be complied with for a NLEPDS.
2.1.1 Purpose
This technical document specifies functional, operational performance and other technical requirements that
shall be met to satisfy the needs of a high quality NLEPDS for the protection of Eskom installations.
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings Limited, its divisions, subsidiaries and entities wherein
Eskom has a controlling interest.
2.2 Normative/informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
[2] SANS 10222-3, Electrical Security installations – Part 3: Electric fences (non-lethal)
[3] SANS 60335-2-76, Household and similar electrical Energizers – Safety, Part 2-76: Particular
requirements for electric fence energizers
[4] SANS 60335-1, Household and similar electrical appliances – Safety, Part 1: General requirements
[5] SANS 60529, Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
[6] SANS 61000-1-1, Part 1 - General: Application and interpretation of fundamental definitions and
terms
[7] SANS 61000-1-2, Electromagnetic compatibility – Part 1-2: General – Methodology for the
achievement of functional safety of electrical and electronic systems including equipment with regard
to electromagnetic phenomena
[8] 240-55410927, Cyber security standard for operational technology
[9] 240-71555472, Drawing Creation Control of Secondary Plant Drawings
[10] 240-64139144, AC boards and junction boxes for substations
[11] 240-64100247, Standard for earthing of secondary equipment in substations
[12] 240-82736997, Stringing, Cabling Earthing and Erection Specification for Transmission substations
[13] 240-83684419, PTM&C technology development
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848
Perimeter detection system (nlepds)
Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Page:
[14] 240-60725641, Specification for Standard (19 Inch) Equipment Cabinets
[15] SANS 10142-1, The wiring of premises
[16] SANS 1091, National Colour Standard
[17] 240-64636794 Standard for Wiring and Cable Marking in Substations
[18] 240-70413291 Specification for Electrical Terminal Blocks
[19] 240-62773019 Specification For Low Voltage Auxiliary Electrical Components Standard
[20] 240-62629353 Specification for Panel Labelling Standard
[21] 240-64685228 Generic Specification For Protective Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs)
[22] 240-75655504 Corrosion Protection Standard
[23] 0.54-393 Earthing Standards
[24] 0.52/30122 Electric fence systems: 2-way energizer kiosk
[25] 0.52/30123 Electric fence systems: 4-way energizer kiosk
[26] 0.52/30124 Electric fence systems: Energizer controller kiosk
[27] 0.52/30125 Electric fence systems: Energizer guard house GUI kiosk
2.2.2 Informative
[28] 240-86738968, Specification for integrated security alarm system for protection of Eskom Installations
for protection of Eskom installation and its subsidiaries
[29] 240-102220945, Specification for Integrated Access Control System (IACS) for Eskom sites
[30] 240-91190304, Specification for CCTV surveillance with intruder detection
[31] 240-170000096, Physical Security Integration Standard
[32] 240-170000098, Security Public Address Systems for Substations and Telecoms High Sites
2.3 Definitions
2.3.1 General
Definition Description
Sectorizing (sectors) Electric fence installation that consists of one energizer and monitoring system
connected to an electric fence, which is divided into sections for monitoring
purposes (SANS10222 part 3)
Zone A predefined length of an electric fence which is energized / monitored by an
energizer
2.3.2 Disclosure classification
Controlled disclosure: controlled disclosure to external parties (either enforced by law, or discretionary).
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
°C Degrees Celsius
AC Alternating Current
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848
Perimeter detection system (nlepds)
Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Page:
Abbreviation Description
DC Direct Current
EMC Electro-magnetic Compatibility
EMI Electro-magnetic Interference
GUI Graphical user interface
HT cables High Tension cables
HV High Voltage
Hz Hertz
IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame
IEC International Electro-technical Commission
IP Ingress protection
kg Kilogram
kV Kilovolt
m Meter
mm Millimetre
ms Millisecond
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
NB Nota Bene “Latin” take notice
NC Normally closed
NLEPDS Non-Lethal Energized Perimeter Detection System
NO Normally open
OHS Occupational Health and Safety
PC Personal Computer
SABS South African Bureau of Standards
SANS South African National Standards
SCOT Steering Committee of Technology
UV Ultra Violet
2.5 Roles and responsibilities
a) The Security Technologies Care Group shall ensure that the technology developed is adequate for
application across Eskom sites where it will be utilized.
b) Group security shall be responsible for auditing to ensure compliance with the requirements of this
standard.
c) The procurement team shall utilise this document for the enquiry process for the electrical
components of a NLEPDS.
2.6 Process for monitoring
Group Security risk analysis will determine the effectiveness of this standard.
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848
Perimeter detection system (nlepds)
Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Page:
2.7 Related/supporting documents
Not applicable.
3. Requirements for high quality NLEPDS
3.1 Overview of NLEPDS
The NLEPDS has a three-fold function which is firstly to deter any unauthorised intruders from entering a
protected site, secondly to detect and alarm any unauthorised attempt to enter a protected site and lastly to
delay the adversary from illegally entering a protected site.
An electric fence/NLEPDS is an electrified barrier consisting of bare conductors erected against the trespass
of persons or animals. The bare wires carry pulses of electric current generated by an energiser to provide a
non-lethal shock to deter potential intruders. The energiser is a device that delivers a periodic non-lethal
amount of electrical energy to an electric fence connected to it.
Tampering with the fence results in an alarm that is logged by the security electric fence energiser system.
The intrusion alarm condition will occur if the fence wire is either cut or short circuited which will be displayed
on the Guard house GUI kiosk indicating which zone was triggered. The electric fence controller unit will via
the energizer alarm output trigger the security lights covering that particular zone. It can also trigger a siren,
PA systems and alarm notifications to a control room (both local and remote) or directly to the authorised
Eskom personnel via email or SMS.
In practical terms, security electric fences are a type of sensor array that acts as a (or part of a) physical barrier,
a psychological deterrent to potential intruders; and is part of an integrated security intrusion detection and
deterrence system.
The number of energizers deployed depends on the length of the perimeter to be secured. If more than one
energiser is used, a synchronising mechanism is needed to make sure that the energizers all pulse at the
same time. The Guard house GUI unit is used as the graphical user interface of the NLEPDS system used to
indicate the status of the different zones along the perimeter.
The NLEPDS generally comprise of the following components / sub-systems (but not limited to) as indicated
in Figure 1:
a) Electric fence conductors
b) Energizer(s)
c) Electric fence control unit incorporating synchronisation equipment, security light control and
communication interfaces
d) User interface / display unit
3.2 Types of NLEPD systems
There are generally two types of NLEPD systems based on their operating principles. The required system
needed for a particular site will be indicated in the technical schedules.
3.2.1 Multi-zone monitoring system
The perimeter which needs to be protected is broken up into multiple zones and each zone is energized /
monitored by a dedicated energizer. The energizers are deployed along the fence in energizer kiosks and the
electric fence control unit kiosk is located in a central location as indicated in Figure 1.
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848
Perimeter detection system (nlepds)
Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Page:
Figure 1: NLEPDS block diagram – multi-zone configuration
3.2.2 Multi-sector monitoring system (resistive sectorizing)
The perimeter which needs to be protected is defined as one zone and is broken up into multiple sectors along
the vertical plane of the fence. The entire fence is energized / monitored by energizers which use a method of
resistive partitioning to divide the fence into multiple sectors. The energizers are deployed in energizer kiosks
together with the control unit kiosk in a central location as indicated in Figure 2.
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848
Perimeter detection system (nlepds)
Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Page:
Figure 2: NLEPDS block diagram – multi-sector configuration
3.3 General Environmental conditions
a) All the elements of the NLEPDS shall be able to function in all climatic conditions prevailing in South
Africa (hot, cold, dusty & humid). The conditions described below shall be taken as minimum
conditions which the NLEPDS and its associated equipment should be able to withstand without the
performance being out of limits or the life cycle being shortened:
1) Ambient air temperature: -10 °C to +60 °C (control / equipment room installed); or -10 °C to
+70 °C (Installed within enclosures in the substation yard).
2) Altitude: 2 500 m
3) Relative humidity (24 h average): 98%
3.3.1 Electrical operating environment
a) The electrical environments at which the system will be installed are near or under power lines where
inductive coupling with the electrified fences could place high-induced voltages on the fences. All
components of the NLEPDS shall function under these conditions without failure/malfunctioning.
b) The functioning of the NLEPDS components shall be immune to electromagnetic interference due to
devices such as cell phones, portable radios, telephones, communication transmitters, dc relays
operations, switching ac supplies and cable-borne interference.
c) All components of the NLEPDS shall be able to adapt and function without being affected by its
immediate electrical environment where high voltage switching occurs often and as such, be
subjected to high levels of radiated electrical interference due to their physical placement or their
direct connection to electrical plant.
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848
Perimeter detection system (nlepds)
Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Page:
d) All components of the NLEPDS shall not generate any interference, which could hinder their own
performance or the performance of the other equipment in the vicinity.
3.4 Requirements for energizers
3.4.1 General
a) The energizer shall be a Type A energizer as defined in SANS 60335-2-76. This is a battery-operated
energizer suitable for connection to the mains consisting of an impulse generating circuit, a battery
charging circuit and a battery, the impulse generating circuit being connected to the mains or the
battery when the energizer is in operation.
b) The energizer shall meet the applicable requirements of a class II appliance as outlined in SANS
60335-1 with respect to protection against electric shock. This is an appliance in which protection
against electric shock does not rely on basic insulation only but in which additional safety precautions
are provided, such as double insulation or reinforced insulation, there being no provision for
protective earthing or reliance upon installation conditions.
3.4.2 Certification requirements
a) The energizers shall be certified as compliant to SANS 60335-2-76. Certificates stating compliance
and type test reports shall be provided with tender documentation.
3.4.3 Electrical requirements
3.4.3.1 Power supply
a) Ancillary equipment and energizers shall have the capability to be supplied with power through the
substation AC and DC supply routed from the AC & DC distribution boards.
a) The power supply to the energizer shall be provided through the site’s 220V (± 10%), 50Hz (± 2%)
AC or DC. The DC voltage supplies available are 48V, 110V and/or 220V DC depending on the site
type.
b) The AC and DC supply shall be protected by Class 1 and 11 surge protection.
c) There shall be no system malfunctioning on the failure, restoration, under or over voltage of the
power supply to the unit.
d) The existing standby power systems at site shall be used as the primary standby power sources,
provided that the standby time (autonomy) requirements of the site are not adversely affected.
e) In cases where the above is not possible, the standby power systems requirements for security
systems at Eskom sites shall comply with the following:
1) The system design shall comply with the requirements of 240-91190294, DC & Auxiliary
Supplies Philosophy.
2) Security systems are required to ensure that the site is protected at all times, hence the
standby time of these systems shall be in line with the overall required standby time for the
site. The requirements of 240-118870219, Standby Power Systems Topology and Autonomy
for Eskom sites, shall be adhered to.
3) Standard or technically acceptable equipment shall be used. This equipment is available on
Eskom National Contracts (ENCs) or recommended technically acceptable equipment lists.
4) In the absence of ENCs for specific equipment or recommended technically acceptable
equipment, the offered equipment shall comply with the technical standards as indicated in
Table 1 below:
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848
Perimeter detection system (nlepds)
Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Page:
Table 1: Technical Standards for Standby Power Systems equipment
Equipment Technical Standard
Nickel Cadmium Batteries 240-56360086, Stationary Vented Nickel Cadmium Batteries Standard
Vented Lead Acid Batteries 240-56360034, Stationary Vented Lead Acid Batteries Standard
Valve Regulated Lead Acid
240-51999453, Standard Specification for Valve-Regulated Lead Acid Cells
Batteries
240-53114248, Thyristor and Switch Mode Chargers, AC/DC to DC/AC
Power Electronics
Converters and Inverter/Uninterruptible Power Supplies Standard
240-64139144, AC Boards and Junction Boxes for Substations
240-76628687, AC/DC Reticulation Equipment for Breaker-and-a-Half
Low Voltage Protective
Substations
Devices, Cubicles and wiring
240-75658628, Distribution Group’s Specific Requirements for AC/DC
Distribution Units
3.4.3.2 Energizer High Voltage Output requirements
The output characteristics of the energizer, when operating at rated voltage with a 500Ω load connected across
the fence terminals shall be as follows:
a) The energy delivered to the 500Ω load shall be above 5J but not exceed 8J.
b) Maximum voltage delivered to the load shall not exceed 10kV.
c) The impulse repetition rate shall not exceed 1Hz.
d) The impulse duration shall not exceed 10ms.
3.4.4 Mechanical requirements
3.4.4.1 Energizer IP rating
a) Energizer(s) shall have an IP rating of IP51 at minimum.
3.4.4.2 Markings used on energizer
a) The general markings on the energizer shall comply with SANS 60335-1 and at minimum shall
include the following markings:
1) rated voltage or rated voltage range in volts;
2) symbol for nature of supply, unless the rated frequency is marked;
3) rated power input in watts or rated current in amperes;
4) name, trade mark or identification mark of the manufacturer or responsible vendor;
5) IP number according to degree of protection against ingress of water, other than IPX0;
6) The energizer shall be marked with the warning: “Before obtaining access to terminals, all
supply circuits must be disconnected”.This warning shall be placed in the vicinity of the
terminal cover.
3.4.5 Functional requirements
3.4.5.1 General
a) A minimum of two energizers shall be used per installation to improve the reliability and availability
of the system.
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848
Perimeter detection system (nlepds)
Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Page:
b) The minimum expected life of the energizer and associated equipment (PC hardware & software,
relay card(s), synchronisation mechanism etc.) shall be 10 years.
c) The energizer shall be self-monitoring and alarm any out-of-bounds condition or system failure to the
master control unit.
d) The NLEPDS shall be triggered by either of the following which could indicate an intrusion:
1) Electric fence conductors been short circuited
2) Electric fence conductors been cut (open circuit)
e) When a NLEPDS is triggered/alarmed the following sequence of events and interoperation of
different security technologies deployed at site shall be possible:
1) Each violation shall be reported to the security control centre remotely and/or locally.
2) The security perimeter lights shall be illuminated at the affected fence zone(s) or sector(s).
3) The security controller shall be able to confirm the arrival of the responders on site following
an alarm/intrusion event.
f) All security alarms and events shall be date-and-time stamped accurately for traceability and
investigation purposes.
3.4.5.2 Synchronising equipment/mechanism
a) A synchronising mechanism shall be used to synchronize multiple energizers in order to be regarded
as one energizer with multiple outputs, all firing at the same time, as one single pulse.
3.4.5.3 Energizer safety
a) The Energizer shall be constructed so that in normal use, they function safely so as to cause no
danger to persons or surroundings, even in the event of carelessness that may occur in normal use.
b) There shall be a safety mechanism (such as a watchdog) to ensure that the energizer(s) output
voltage and energy levels are within the legal non-lethal levels. When the maximum level is
exceeded, then the output shall be shut down and an alarm generated.
c) The energizers shall shut down if there is a synchronisation failure.
3.4.5.4 Electric fence zones / sectors
a) The non-lethal energised fence shall comprise of various zones or sectors (depending on the NLEPD
system).
b) The controller shall be used to configure the electric fence into zones or sectors.
c) It shall be configurable to accommodate at least the number zones or sectors along an electric
fence’s perimeter specified in the technical schedules.
d) It shall be possible to allocate and generate alarms for intrusions to each individual zone or sector.
e) The alarms shall be routed to individual relays for triggering other security systems.
3.5 Requirements for the NLEPDS equipment kiosks
3.5.1 General
a) Electrical equipment including the energizers, power supply circuitry, isolation switches, relays and
relay cards (where required), surge protectors and lighting switches shall be housed in Eskom
approved kiosk.
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848
Perimeter detection system (nlepds)
Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Page:
b) The electric fence installations shall consist of three types of kiosks (refer to drawings 0.52/30122,
0.52/30123, 0.52/30124 & 0.52/30125):
1) Energiser kiosks which can support either two or four energizers
2) Electric fence control kiosk
3) User interface / display (GUI) kiosk
3.5.2 Requirements for the energizer kiosks
a) Two types of energizer kiosks are specified, the first which caters for two energizers and a kiosk which
caters for four energizers.
b) The energizer kiosks can be applied in a number of ways to cater for various substation configurations
and requirements. For a multi-sector application the kiosks will typically be installed in the same room
as the master control unit kiosk. For a multi-zone application only the nearest energizer may be
installed in the room and the rest of the kiosks will be installed outside along the electric fence.
3.5.3 Requirements for the Graphical User interface / Display unit kiosk
a) The intension is that this kiosk will typically be installed in the guard house away from the Control
and Energiser kiosks.
b) The display unit shall be able to display the configured zones or sectors of the fence including all
fence alarms.
c) Alarmed zone(s) or sector(s) of the fence shall be clearly depicted (shape and size) on the display
unit.
d) The User interface shall be used to view, acknowledge and reset zone or sector alarms.
e) A panic button / switch shall be provided to send an alarm via the electric fence control unit and
SCADA to remote control facilities. The panic button shall also trigger a siren outside the guard house
/ control room.
f) A security light override switch shall also be installed to switch on all security lights when required.
g) Strict configuration rights management shall be applied such that only authorised users can make
configuration changes to the system.
3.5.4 Requirements for the control unit kiosk
a) The intension is that this kiosk will typically be installed in a room adjacent to the guard house with
controlled access. For a multi-sector application the energizer kiosks may typically also be installed
here and for a multi-zone application only the nearest energizer may be installed here.
b) The control unit kiosk will house the master control unit, a keypad or touch screen to apply and change
configuration settings, a synchronisation unit (where required), a light relay card / relays, an alarm
relay card / relays, contactors for the security lights, panic siren contactors and an IDF frame for routing
the alarms to SCADA.
3.5.4.1 Master Control unit
a) Strict configuration rights management shall be applied such that only authorised users can make
configuration changes to the system.
b) Alarm conditions shall be resettable and acknowledgeable from the graphical user interface.
c) Alarms received from the energisers and GUI (where applicable) will be routed to the alarm relay
card, panic siren and security light relay card.
d) The system shall have an option of sending security alerts and confirmations through email and SMS.
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848
Perimeter detection system (nlepds)
Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Page:
e) All security alarms and events shall be date-and-time stamped accurately for traceability and
investigation purposes.
3.5.4.2 Alarm relay card
a) The alarm relay card will receive alarms from the master control unit and GUI and route them through
to the SCADA interface in the substation.
b) The relay card shall cater for at least eight alarms. Typical alarm requirements are shown in Table 2
below:
Table 2: Energizer indications and alarms
Type Duration Description Condition
Status Continuous System-on (for each energizer) System on
Status Continuous Energizer armed (for each energizer ) System is armed
Alarm Continuous Fence intrusion alarm (for each Alarm condition detected
zone/sector)
Alarm Continuous Battery low (for each energizer) Battery voltage less than
minimum operating voltage
Alarm Continuous Mains supply fail AC power fail
Alarm Continuous Synchronisation problems Energizers not pulsing
simultaneously
Alarm Continuous Equipment failure Energizer energy at zero
joules
Alarm Continuous Watchdog Energizer Joules and
voltage above legal levels
c) If analogue alarms are used, then all status and alarm indication relays shall use change-over
contacts, so that either NO or NC contacts can be wired to the IDF as and when required.
d) The alarm relay card outputs shall be capable of triggering the following security systems at
from plan drawing you have 10m from outer security fence to safety fence. here you have 10m from outer security fence to
This project was initiated to ensure adequate upgrade of the security systems and infrastructure
at Pembroke substation to comply with OHS Act, National Key Point and Eskom latest policies
and standards. Existing access control building, perimeter lighting, fences and access gates will
be refurbished to achieve the required quality of security systems and infrastructure. This
document covers the construction work that will be done at Pembroke Substation.
2. References
[1] 240-55922824 Substation layout design guidelines
[2] Occupational health and safety act (OHS Act)
[3] (32-1205) Eskom maintenance management policy
[4] (TST41-794) Substation and facility maintenance
[5] (32-727) Eskom safety, health, environment and quality policy
[6] (32-846) Operating regulations for high voltage systems
[7] (SANS 1200) General civil
[8] SABS 10229-1:2010 Transport of Dangerous Goods
[9] SABS 10231: 2019 transport of Dangerous Goods by Road
[10] National Environmental Management Waste Act
[11] OHSA act (Act )
[12] SANS 10400 – The application of the national Building Regulations
[13] National Building Regulations and Building Standards Act No.
[14] (240-109644476) - Standard for Implementation of Substation Layouts for Transmission
Substations
[15] (240-1001183119) - Standard for Fences in Eskom Transmission Stations
[16] (240-139282493) – Security Lighting for Eskom applications
[17] (240-78980848) – Non-lethal Fence Specification
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDS database, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it
is in line with the Authorized Version on the database.
Pembroke Substation – Unique Identifier: PEM25P19-SE-E82
Revision: 1 National Security Project 1 Security Build 2A
Page:
This scope of work is to be read in conjunction with drawings listed in section 4 of this document.
All construction is to be carried out in accordance with Eskom Safety, Health, Environment &
Quality Policy and all necessary safety procedures must be strictly adhered to.
The Civil scope of work includes but not limited to:
a) Access control building refurbishment
b) Perimeter fence lighting upgrade
c) Upgrade of the existing non-lethal electric fence to a 24-strand galvanised wire with
concrete plinth on either side for the prevention of vegetation grown/interference.
d) Evaluation and review of the existing drainage and mitigate any deficiencies that are
affecting the effectiveness of the barrier fences.
3.1 Identified substation
a) Pembroke substation, this scope of work only applies to this project.
3.2 Detailed scope of work
Access control building-Fibre Comms
a) Construction of flexible cable sleeves with draw boxes for the gate and Fibre comms from
the access control building to the control building.
b) Sleeves from the ACB manhole to the gate
Perimeter fence lighting upgrade
Refer to drawings PEM25P19-SE-E43 sht.1-2
a) New installation of 115 lighting poles, at 15m intervals.
b) Installation of 115, 60W LED luminaires on top of the poles.
c) Installation of two Security lighting distribution boards (SLDB) at positions shown on
drawing.
d) Install Supply cables from ACDB in control building to SLDB 1 & 2
e) Install cables from SLDB to luminaires.
f) Install control cables from SLDB’s to access control building.
g) Install 10mm DIA copper rod around the complete substation, 3 Km in total.
h) Terminate, test and commission.
Operational Floodlighting
Refer to drawings PEM13P01-SE-E44 sht.1-3
a) Complete refurbishment of the Floodlighting installation
b) Supply and install new supply cables to existing masts
c) Supply and install new Distribution Board fully equipped according to sheet 2 and 3
d) Supply and install DB’s and JB’s for each mast
e) Supply and install new 244W led Luminaires
f) Supply and install cables inside masts and cables from JB to luminaires
g) Terminate, test and commission.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDS database, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it
is in line with the Authorized Version on the database.
Pembroke Substation – Unique Identifier: PEM25P19-SE-E82
Revision: 1 National Security Project 1 Security Build 2A
Page:
Inner fence upgrade
a) The project will be responsible for upgrading the existing inner security fence.
b) The contractor will be responsible for all fencing works, including excavation for fence
posts, anti-tunnelling, installation of fence panels, gates, overhangs, etc.
c) Replace inner fence as specified on drawings 0.54/5633 sheets 1-3.
Installation of access gates
a) The access gates must be removed completely and spoiled,
b) A totally new access gate must be installed according to drawings 0.54/10230 sheets 1-
6,
c) Complete with gate motors, gates and sleeves as shown on the drawing and,
d) The contractor should also install a fibre optic sleeve pipe with draw boxes in accordance
to drawing 0.53-2129
Non Lethal Fence
a) The non-lethal fence complete with the protection slab must be removed and spoiled,
b) A totally new non-lethal fence must be installed in accordance with Eskom’s specification
of 240- 78980848,
c) The details according to the specification is drawing 0.54-8282.
d) Existing stone verge shall remain.
4. Drawings list
Item description drawing number
1 Access control building refurbishment PEM25P19-SE-E47 sht. 1 - 5
2 Security fence general upgrade PEM25P19-SE-E11
3 Security lighting layout PEM25P19-SE-E43 sht.1-2
4 Access control building electrical PEM25P19-SE-E43 sht. 3
installation and schematic diagram
5 Operational floodlighting cable route and PEM13P01-SE-E44 sht. 1-3
mast location layout. And schematic
layout
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDS database, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it
is in line with the Authorized Version on the database.
Pembroke Substation – Unique Identifier: PEM25P19-SE-E82
Revision: 1 National Security Project 1 Security Build 2A
Page:
5. Authorisation
This document has been seen and accepted by:
Name Designation
Sibonelo Sibiya Snr Advisor Architecture
Andile Maneli Middle Manager – Civil
6. Revisions
Date Rev. Compiler Remarks
27 August 2025 1 Nhlakanipho Gwala Second Issue
7. Developmental team
The following people were involved in the development of this document:
8. Acknowledgements
None
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDS database, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it
is in line with the Authorized Version on the database.
Due to the constant changes in the risk profiles of Eskom assets and installations, the review of
physical security measures is necessary to ensure that current threats are appropriately mitigated,
through the implementation of suitable site specific protection measures, systems and procedures.
This document provides an overview of Eskom’s requirements for the design, supply, installation
and commissioning of a Non-Lethal Energized Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS).
Note: The terms Non-lethal Electrified Fence and Non-Lethal Energized Perimeter Detection System
(NLEPDS) are used interchangeably in this document and shall refer to the same system.
2. Supporting Clauses
2.1 Scope
The document serves as a technical guideline for the enquiry for a Non-Lethal Energized Perimeter
Detection System (NLEPDS) Project and stipulates technical scope and deliverables for the project.
Note: Annex B shall be populated to capture site specific project details.
Applicability
This document shall apply to Transmission sites.
Effective date
The authorisation date.
2.2 Normative/Informative References
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the
following paragraphs.
Normative
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems
[2] 240-78980848 Specification for Non-Lethal Energized Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS)
for protection of Eskom installations and its subsidiaries
[3] 240-60725641, Specification for Standard (19 Inch) Equipment Cabinets
[4] 240-83684419 PTM&C Technology Development
[5] 0.52/30122 Manufacturing detail for two way Energizer Kiosk
[6] 0.52/30123 Manufacturing detail for four way Energizer Kiosk
[7] 0.52/30124 Manufacturing detail electric fence controller kiosk
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Scope of Work for Non-Lethal Energized Unique Identifier: 240-170000192
Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) Revision: 3
Page:
[8] 0.52/30125 Manufacturing detail electric fence guard house kiosk
[9] 240-171000171 Commissioning guideline for secondary plant physical security systems
Informative
Not Application
2.3 Definitions
Definition Description
Tender A tender refers to an open or closed competitive request for quotations /
prices against a clearly defined scope / specification.
Disclosure Classification
Controlled disclosure: controlled disclosure to external parties (either enforced by law, or
discretionary).
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
NLEPDS Non-Lethal Energized Perimeter Detection System
2.5 Roles and Responsibilities
As per PTM&C technology development standard (240-83684419)
2.6 Process for Monitoring
Not applicable
2.7 Related/Supporting Documents
Reference drawings
[1] 0.54/8282 Non-lethal fence plan, sections and details
[2] 0.54/7470 Access Area Gates layout
2.8 Technical returnables
The tenderer shall submit the following deliverables for technical evaluation:
a) PSIRA registration certificate (mandatory).
b) A completed technical Schedule A/B indicating compliance to NLEPDS requirements
(mandatory) from Eskom standard (240-78980848).
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Scope of Work for Non-Lethal Energized Unique Identifier: 240-170000192
Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) Revision: 3
Page:
c) Supporting information including deviation schedules in response to AB Schedule for NLEPDS
from Eskom standard (240-78980848) to be evaluated on technical basis.
d) The tenderer’s past experience in delivering projects of a similar nature and scale (provide
references).
e) A company overview detailing the company background, available local expertise and
international technical support capabilities.
f) CVs of company personnel
g) OEM signed confirmation letter/s confirming that warrantees to the end user shall be honoured
by the OEM.
h) Functional design specification and system design report (refer to Annex A).
i) Detailed design specification (refer to Annex A).
3. Project scope
3.1 General scope
The contractor shall design, manufacture, supply, develop user documentation, perform testing at
works, deliver, install, and commission the Non-Lethal Energized Perimeter Detection System
(NLEPDS) according to the associated technical specifications. The proposed design and costing
shall be based on the associated site as outlined in sections below. Generic site layouts in Annex C
shall be used for typical site zoning.
Note: This PTM&C scope excludes the civils and mechanical scope including casting of antitunnelling and vegetation slab, fence earthing and installation of fence posts. The civils and
mechanical scope is covered by others.
3.2 Pre-installation development scope
The appointed contractor(s) shall be responsible for the following pre-installation development scope
of work:
a) System development including manufacturing of conductors. This includes any additional
development work required to fully comply with the technical requirements.
b) Compiling site specific detailed designs including the following:
i. All equipment required to comply with the specification and its configuration;
ii. Cable layout and routing drawings;
iii. Interfacing to the SCADA system for security alarms to the security monitoring centre.
iv. Interface drawings to the site security lighting.
c) Ensure that the design complies with all relevant standards in order for a Certification of
Compliance (COC) to be issued.
d) Model system testing scheme for required functionality including energy, voltage tests and
energizers synchronisation tests at the tenderer’s workshop/premises.
e) Factory testing of the complete system (FAT).
f) Development of product training material and delivery of system related courses.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Scope of Work for Non-Lethal Energized Unique Identifier: 240-170000192
Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) Revision: 3
Page:
g) Produce site acceptance testing procedure for Eskom’s acceptance.
h) Produce a functional design specification (refer 240-83684419 and Appendix A of this
document).
i) Produce a detailed design specification (refer to 240-83684419 and Appendix A of this
document).
3.3 Equipment for decommissioning and disposal
i. The existing non-lethal electrified fence and associated equipment shall be decommissioned,
removed and stored to a designated scrap area on site (where applicable).
Note: Decommissioning shall be done is close consultation with the responsible Eskom
representative for guidance on decommissioned equipment that will be reserved for spares.
3.4 Equipment for manufacturing, supplying, installing and commissioning
The appointed contractor shall manufacture, supply, install and commission all the equipment in the
following sections:
Entrance area
a) Install an automatic sliding gate as per Eskom drawings (0.54/7470). The gate shall be installed
together with all the associated equipment i.e. electric motors with suitable enclosure and
mechanical disengage mechanism, status detector mechanisms, obstruction detector
mechanisms, conductor wires and anti-theft brackets.
b) Install a 25 Pair communication cable from the guard house to the sliding gate motors.
c) Install infra-red (IR) units to prevent the gate from closing on vehicles. The IR units shall be
installed together with the associated mounting posts with concrete foundations, blanking plates
and cover plates.
d) Install goose necks for mounting of biometric and card readers.
Access control building (ACB) equipment & Kiosks
Note: The equipment installed shall meet the functional requirements as specified in the technical
specification, 240-78980848. The appointed contractor shall provide the specific system design,
configuration and equipment for the requirements of the site.
a) Install the control unit used to configure the electric fence system.
b) Install the graphical user interface/display unit to display the configured zones of the fence
including alarms.
c) Install the alarm relay cards (where applicable) to configure the system alarms as well as
interfacing the Non-Lethal Electrified Fence with other security systems deployed at site. i.e.
i. Security lights;
ii. CCTV cameras (PTZ cameras to zoom to fence alarmed zones);
iii. Security alarm system.
d) Install the energizers including synchronisation mechanism.
e) All the equipment shall be installed in their appropriate kiosks as per the drawings below:
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Scope of Work for Non-Lethal Energized Unique Identifier: 240-170000192
Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) Revision: 3
Page:
i. 0.52/30122 Manufacturing detail for two way Energizer Kiosk
ii. 0.52/30123 Manufacturing detail for four way Energizer Kiosk
iii. 0.52/30124 Manufacturing detail electric fence controller kiosk
iv. 0.52/30125 Manufacturing detail electric fence guard house kiosk
Note: The terms guard house and access control building are used in generic terms and shall refer to any
buildings that are used for similar purposes.
Site Perimeter
a) Install HT cables, fence conductors (2.24 mm galvanised steel) and associated insulators.
b) Install warning and zoning signs around the site perimeter.
c) Install a 25 Pair communication cable from the guard house to the control room to interface the
fence alarms to the SCADA system for routing of alarms to the remote monitoring centre. A
trench has to be dug from the guard house to the closest trench in the HV yard.
Note: For coastal sites Eskom might decide to install aluminium fence conductors, clarity should be
obtained from Eskom representative for the site for preferred fence conductor.
3.5 Testing and commissioning
a) Site Acceptance testing shall be performed to ensure that the entire Non-Lethal Fence is fully
functional and all alarms are commissioned to the remote monitoring centre (zero control).
b) Issue the Certificate of Compliance (CoC) for the site.
i. Every user or lessor of an electric fence, as the case may be, shall have an original valid
electric fence system certificate of compliance. Meaning that the original CoC shall be handed
over to Eskom.
ii. The electric fence system certificate of compliance shall be accompanied by a test report.
iii. An electric fence certificate of compliance shall be in accordance with the Electrical
Machinery Regulations, 2011 as contained in the Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1993
(Act No. ).
iv. A map of the electric fence installation, clearly showing various aspects of the installation
shall be attached to the test report.
v. The customer shall receive training in the operation of the Non-Lethal Fence.
vi. Official hand-over to the customer shall take place. The hand-over documentation shall
consist of all marked-up drawings, test certificates / documents and the Certificate of
Compliance.
4. Acceptance
This document has been seen and accepted by:
Name Designation
Mario Petersen Middle Manager (acting) – PTM&C Planning and Project Support
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Scope of Work for Non-Lethal Energized Unique Identifier: 240-170000192
Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) Revision: 3
Page:
5. Revisions
Date Rev. Compiler Remarks
August 2023 3 R Moshoeshoe Added project details annexure
Included reference to kiosk
September 2021 2 R Moshoeshoe
drawings
July 2020 1 R Moshoeshoe First Issue
6. Development Team
The following people were involved in the development of this document:
7. Acknowledgements
Not applicable
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Scope of Work for Non-Lethal Energized Unique Identifier: 240-170000192
Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) Revision: 3
Page:
Annex A: Functional and Detailed Design specifications requirements
1. Functional design specification (basic design)
The tenderer is required to produce and submit a Functional Design specification and a System
Design Report. The Functional Specification details Eskom's functional requirements in the context
of the product that is offered by the Tenderer. The System Design Report documents the design that
has been developed in order to meet the requirements as specified in the Functional Specification
(240-78980848). At minimum the functional design specification and System design report shall
cover the functional and interconnection details of system components listed below:
a) Electric fence conductors
b) Power supply
c) Control unit
d) Graphical user interface / Display unit
e) Synchronising equipment/mechanism
f) Relay cards (where applicable)
g) Communication infrastructure
h) Energizer(s)
Note: The Functional Specification and the System Design Report can be combined as one
document.
2. Detailed Design Specification
The tenderer is required to produce a Detailed Design Specification for both hardware and software
components of the system and Acceptance Testing Procedures. At minimum the detailed design
specification shall cover details listed in the following index.
a) Overview of functional specification
b) Scope of work
c) High Level Integration
i. Local vs remote monitoring and control capabilities
ii. Software and network config files.
iii. Cause and effect matrices (e.g. if alarm on fence, lights are switched on)
d) System Architecture (to include logical and physical design)
e) Lifespan of System and product software versions (include 10 year life span support)
f) Recommended Maintenance (Procedures, Spares and FMECA- Failure mode effects and
criticality analysis, tools and test equipment, training requirements-engineering and field
operations)
g) System commission and acceptance testing procedure (commissioning results to be
provided prior to system handover.
h) Appendix A – Drawings
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Scope of Work for Non-Lethal Energized Unique Identifier: 240-170000192
Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) Revision: 3
Page:
i) Appendix B – Equipment Specification
j) Appendix C – Datasheets
k) Appendix D- Bill of Materials
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Scope of Work for Non-Lethal Energized Unique Identifier: 240-170000192
Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) Revision: 3
Page:
Annex B: NLEPDS Project details
Lead Engineer: Tel:
Lead Engineer’s Department:
Project name:
Project No/WBS.:
Region /Grid
Substation/ET site:
Offsite Security Control Centre:
Name Designation Signature Date
Project Scope
verified by:
Project Scope
Approved by:
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Scope of Work for Non-Lethal Energized Unique Identifier: 240-170000192
Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) Revision: 3
Page:
Annex C: Typical site layout
The generic site layouts below shall be used for a typical site zoning
Figure C1: Typical Tx Substation site layout (refer to drawing THE22P02-SE-42)
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Scope of Work for Non-Lethal Energized Unique Identifier: 240-170000192
Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) Revision: 3
Page:
Figure C2: Typical layout for ET Site
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
There have been numerous security breaches at Eskom sites resulting in theft of Eskom assets. In order to
prioritise people’s safety and protect Eskom assets and installations, the review and improvement of physical
security measures at these sites is necessary to ensure that current threats are appropriately mitigated,
through the implementation of suitable security measures, systems and procedures. This document provides
an overview of Eskom’s requirements for the design, supply, installation and commissioning of an Integrated
Security System at Eskom Substations and Telecoms sites.
2. Supporting Clauses
2.1 Scope
This document provides an overview of Eskom’s requirements for the design, supply, installation and
commissioning of an Integrated Physical Security System (IPSS) at Eskom substations. The Integrated
Security System may be an integration of the CCTV system, intruder detection system, Access Control System
(ACS), alarm system, public address (PA) system, Intrusion pre-detection system and interfaces to the
Physical Security Information Management (PSIM) system (includes IT infrastructure) depending on site
requirements. The document outlines business objectives to be fulfilled by the Integrated Security Solution and
provides an overview of the envisaged system functionality. The Contractor shall use the accompanying
technical specifications referenced together with details outlined in this document when tendering for the
integrated security system.
Note: There might be projects where the scope of work includes only a subset of the systems mentioned above. In these
instances the scope of work shall clearly indicate the excluded subsystems using the table in Annex C.
2.1.1 Purpose
The document serves as a technical scope for an integrated security system at Eskom substations and
Telecoms sites and stipulates technical requirements and deliverables.
Note: The word Substation is used in generic terms in this document, this shall refer to any Eskom site where the
requirements of this document are implemented.
2.1.2 Applicability
This document is applicable to Eskom Substations and Telecoms sites.
2.2 Normative/Informative References
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the following
paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
[2] 240-102220945 Specification for Integrated Access Control System for Eskom sites
[3] 240-91190304 Specification for CCTV Surveillance with Intruder Detection
[4] 240-86738968 Specification for Integrated Security Alarm System for Protection of Eskom
Installations and its subsidiaries
[5] 240-170000098 Security Public Address Systems for Substations and Telecoms high sites
[6] 240-170000096 Physical security integration standard
[7] 240-170000086 Roles and Accountabilities for Lifecycle Management of Physical Security Systems
in the Transmission Division
[8] 240-170000257 Technical Evaluation Criteria for the Integrated Security System
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
[9] 240-60725641 Specification for Standard (19 inch) Equipment Cabinets
[10] 240-46264031 Fibre-Optic Design Standard – Part 2: Substations
[11] DEM2412993 & 2425114 LAD (Logical Architecture Definition) PAC (Physical Application
Component) for Physical Security Information Management System(PSIM)
[12] Business Requirement Specification DEM_2412993 & 2425114 Tx and ET Security Monitoring
System
[13] 240-170000691 Standard for Intrusion pre-detection systems used at Eskom sites
[14] 240-170000723 Generic Technical Requirements for Physical Security Technologies Contracts
[15] 240-171000171 Commissioning guideline for secondary plant physical security system
2.2.2 Informative
[16] 240-836884419 PTM&C Technology Development
[17] 240-78980848 Specification for Non-Lethal Energized Perimeter Detection System (NLEPDS) for
protection of Eskom installations and its subsidiaries
2.3 Definitions
2.3.1 General
Definition Description
Tender A tender refers to an open or closed competitive request for quotations / prices
against a clearly defined scope / specification.
2.3.2 Disclosure Classification
Controlled disclosure: controlled disclosure to external parties (either enforced by law, or discretionary).
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
AC Alternating Current
AGA Architecture Governance Assessment
CCTV Closed Circuit Television
DC Direct Current
DVR/NVR Digital Video Recorder/Network Video Recorder
FAT Factory Acceptance Test
GUI Graphical User Interface
IACS Integrated Access Control System
IPSS Integrated Physical Security System
LAN Local Area Network
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker
PA system Public Address System
PIR Passive Infrared
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
Abbreviation Description
PSIM Physical Security Information Management
PSIRA Private Security Industry Regulatory Authority
PTZ Pent Tilt Zoom
SAT Site Acceptance Test
SM Single Mode
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply
VMD Video Motion Detection
WAN Wide Area Network
2.5 Roles and Responsibilities
Roles shall be as outlined in 240-170000086
2.6 Process for monitoring
Not Applicable
2.7 Related/Supporting Documents
Not applicable
3. Project scope
3.1 General project scope
The scope includes requirements for an integrated security system comprising of an Access Control System,
CCTV system, Intrusion pre-detection system, alarm system, public address (PA) system and interfaces to the
PSIM system (includes IT Infrastructure).
The contractor shall design, manufacture, supply, develop user documentation, perform testing at works,
deliver, install, and commission the Integrated Security System and associated equipment (hardware/software
etc.) at the Substation/Telecoms site and Zero Control (Simmerpan, Germiston) according to the associated
technical specifications.
The scope of work for the Contractor for the Integrated Security System will include the following:
a) Produce basic and detailed designs for the Integrated Security System. The detailed design must
include detailed designs for the Access Control System, CCTV system, Intruder detection system,
alarm system, the public address system and the PSIM system (includes IT Infrastructure).The
design must also cover integration of these different systems and the NLEPDS (existing) into an
Integrated Security System;
b) Present the proposed designs to PTM&C design review team (DRT) for acceptance;
c) Installation and configuration of substation security LAN Infrastructure;
d) Installation, configuration and commissioning of the CCTV system in totality on site as per Eskom
standard (240-91190304);
e) Installation, configuration and commissioning of the Integrated Access Control System (IACS) in
totality on site as per Eskom standard (240-102220945);
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
f) Installation, configuration and commissioning of intruder detection system in totality on site as per
Eskom standard (240-91190304,240-86738968 & 240-170000096);
g) Installation, configuration and commissioning of alarm system in totality on site as per Eskom
standard (240-86738968);
h) Installation, configuration and commissioning of public address system in totality on site as per
Eskom standard (240-170000098);
i) Installation, configuration and commissioning of intrusion pre-detection system in totality on site as
per Eskom standard (240-170000691);
j) Integration of the Access Control System (ACS), CCTV system, Intruder detection system, alarm
system, public address system into an integrated security system (240-170000096) to interface with
the PSIM system;
k) Provide services as per 240-170000723;
l) Installation, configuration and commissioning of interfaces to the Physical Security Information
Management (PSIM), including firewall configuration and Telecoms circuit commissioning, for data
collection, incidents management, data correlation, controlling functionality (CCTVs, IACS systems,
PA systems, etc.) and provision of real-time dash boards and reports (refer to DEM2412993 &
2425114);
m) Conduct FAT and SAT tests before commissioning the complete integrated system;
n) Compile site as built drawings with electrical and engineering detail;
o) Create a Graphical User Interface (GUI) and behaviour models for the site;
p) Produce a detailed design report for the integrated security system as per the index in Annex B of
this document;
Notes:
1) The generic site layouts in Annex D shall be used for typical site security zoning
3.2 Integrated Access Control System (IACS)
a) The Integrated access control system will be used to manage access rights of Eskom employees,
visitors and contractors in and out of different areas at site.
b) The system will also be used to grant and limit access permissions in and out of areas such as secure
and non-secure areas.
c) The offered system shall comply with requirements of Specification for Integrated Access Control
System (IACS) for Eskom sites (240-102220945).
d) The system should support a tiered architecture which will allow monitoring of the site both locally
and remotely comprising of field devices (biometric & card readers) at site level and system
management servers at the remote security control room (zero control).
3.2.1 IACS devices layout
The envisaged Integrated Access Control devices for the site and their locations are shown in Table 1 below:
Table 1: IACS devices positioning
Area Point Device Status Lock Evacuation Bypass
Contact Device
Main Gate Exterior Perimeter Card Reader Gate Status Electro None Mechanical
(Inbound Fence Contact Mechanical Bypass
traffic) (Gooseneck Lock
Mount)
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
Area Point Device Status Lock Evacuation Bypass
Contact Device
Energized Fence Integrated with Gate Status Electro None Mechanical
Gate exterior gate Contact Mechanical Bypass
automation Lock
Inner Perimeter Card + Gate Status Electro None Mechanical
Fence Biometric Contact Mechanical Bypass
(Gooseneck Reader Lock
Mount)
Outbound Exterior Perimeter Card + Gate Status Electro None Mechanical
Traffic Fence Biometric Contact Mechanical Bypass
(Gooseneck Reader Lock
Mount)
Energized Fence Integrated with Gate Status Electro None Mechanical
Gate interior gate Contact Mechanical Bypass
automation Lock
Inner Perimeter Card Reader Gate Status Electro Emergency Exit Mechanical
Fence Contact Mechanical Button Bypass
(Gooseneck Lock
Mount)
Guard House Entrance Door Card + Door Status Magnetic Lock Emergency Exit Mechanical
Biometric Contact Button Bypass
Reader (In) &
Card Reader
(Out)
Equipment Room Card + Door Status Magnetic Lock Emergency Exit Mechanical
Door (Inside) Biometric Contact Button Bypass
Reader (In) &
Card Reader
(Out)
Control Room Office Door Card Reader Door Status Magnetic Lock Emergency Exit Mechanical
Buildings (In) & Card Contact Button Bypass
( Reader (Out)
Control Room Card + Door Status Magnetic Lock Emergency Exit Mechanical
Entrance Door Biometric Contact Button Bypass
Reader
Control Room Emergency Door Status Magnetic Lock Emergency Exit Mechanical
Back Door exit break-bar Contact Button Bypass
(Emergency Exit)
Control Room Card Reader Door Status Magnetic Lock Emergency Exit Mechanical
Double Door (Inside only) Contact Button Bypass
Battery Room Card + Door Status Magnetic Lock Emergency Exit Mechanical
Biometric (In) Contact Button Bypass
& Card Reader
(Out)
Carrier Room Card + Door Status Magnetic Lock Emergency Exit Mechanical
Biometric (In) Contact Button Bypass
& Card Reader
(Out)
Office Main entrances Card + Door Status Magnetic Lock Emergency Exit Mechanical
buildings & Biometric (In) Contact Button Bypass
store rooms & Card Reader
(Out)
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
Note: Ideally the existing Eskom approved cards should be used for the new access control system. Eskom’s approval shall be
obtained before deciding on the access cards for the system.
3.2.2 IACS high level devices positioning and architecture philosophy
a) The contractor is required to submit a detailed design depicting the proposed architecture and
narratives of how the IACS functional requirements will be achieved. The implemented architecture
for IACS should comply with principles outlined in the technical standards for IACS [2].
b) In addition to ensuring that the installed system operates as required on site, the contractor is also
required to ensure that the system enables remote monitoring and control through the Eskom’s WAN.
3.3 CCTV system
a) A CCTV system shall be installed and the proposed system for the site is intended to provide the
guards/ control room operators with a single point from where they can view and verify alarm events
from the Intrusion detection system and energized fence triggers without having to physically respond
to the alarm event in the case of a false/nuisance alarm and correctly assess and verify positive
alarm events in the event of an attempted or successful intrusion attempt.
b) The offered system shall comply with requirements of Eskom standard for CCTV system (240-
91190304).
c) The CCTV system shall be integrated with video analytics and automatically record any alarm event
by means of the 30 seconds pre-event buffer, the actual event (for however long motion is detected
by the camera) and at least a 30 seconds post event time period. The system shall utilize a video
analytics system as pre-detection to automatically generate alarms and perform event recording.
d) It is proposed that static thermal cameras with video motion detection be installed along the perimeter
of the Substation to provide both surveillance and detection functionality. In addition it is proposed
that PTZ cameras be installed for zooming and recognition functionality.
e) The CCTV system shall be connected to the security LAN to enable event driven video streaming to
the local security room and zero control (Simmerpan, Germiston).
f) A video intercom system must be installed at the main gate entrance and the audio feed and camera
feed from the unit must be integrated into the local NVR to ensure both visual and audio recording
of events. The purpose of this unit is to enable the security control room to interact with unannounced
visitors and non-Eskom staff. The communication will be point-to-point between the gate and the
security control room and will not be integrated with the gate control system.
g) The contractor shall determine the required camera lens types that will ensure that the positioning of
the cameras results in the most optimised and economical installation of the cameras at site. This
includes ensuring that a continuous visibility is created along the perimeter by eliminating blind spots
with one camera having the next camera within its field of view for effective monitoring.
h) All steel poles and structures shall be hot-dipped galvanised.
3.3.1 CCTV System devices layout and positioning
The areas identified where CCTV devices (cameras) are to be installed are listed in Table 2 below. The
cameras are to be positioned as per the site layout.
Table 2: CCTV cameras positioning
Area Site location Device(s)
Perimeter and Main Access Perimeter fence Static thermal Cameras
Gate
PTZ Cameras
Access Gate Static Cameras
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
Area Site location Device(s)
Video Intercom
Guard House Interior Static Cameras
Control Room Building Outside Battery Room entrance Exterior static Cameras
Control Room Door Interior Static Cameras
Control Room Emergency Exit Interior Static Cameras
Control Room Double Door Exterior Static Cameras
Carrier Room Interior Static Cameras
Office buildings & store rooms Main entrances Exterior Static Cameras
3.4 Intruder Pre-detection system
a) Intrusion pre-detection units shall be installed in all areas of the substation including buildings, rooms
and substation perimeter area which need to be protected.
b) The sensors shall be placed so as to effectively detect intrusion into the protected (secured) areas
for the following:
i. Unauthorised movement around/inside a protected area at site
ii. Tunnelling underneath the fences,
iii. Separation of electric fence conductors,
iv. Cutting and climbing over perimeter barrier fences/walls,
v. Vibrations caused by Digging underneath, breaking through and climbing over the barrier fences/walls.
c) The Intrusion pre-detection system installed shall comply with the requirements of the standard for
intrusion pre-detection systems used at Eskom sites (240-170000691).
3.4.1 Intrusion Pre-detection system devices layout and positioning
Table 3: Intruder detection devices positioning
Area Point Device(s)
Guard House Server Room Interior PIRs
Control Room Buildings Outside Office Door Door Contact
Office Interior Interior PIRs
Battery Room Door Door Contact
Battery Room Interior PIRs
Control Room Door Door Contact
Control Room Emergency Exit Door Contact
Control Room Interior PIRs
Building interior Interior PIR
Carrier Room Interior PIR
Office buildings & store rooms Main entrances Door Contact
Substation Perimeter On each perimeter camera Intrusion detection analytics
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
Outer wall/barrier fences Exterior intruder pre-detection
Substation Perimeter system (Contractor to propose a
system)
Note: The use of passive infrared (PIR) units is not recommended for exterior use due to prevalence of nuisance alarms
associated with the units.
3.5 Public Address System
a) The installation of a PA system is required in order to engage potential intruders and issue warnings.
b) The PA system shall be able to be remotely and locally operated when necessary.
c) The system must be operable via the guard house and remotely via the responsible control rooms
to warn would be attackers of the restriction of access to the site.
d) Voice recordings shall be synchronized with the cameras and recorder on the local NVR via a suitable
audio input to ensure synchronization of events.
e) The installed PA system shall comply with the requirements of technical specification for Public
Address Systems (240-170000098).
3.5.1 PA system devices layout and positioning
The speakers shall be mounted on the existing perimeter light masts around the site perimeter where feasible.
3.6 Alarm system
a) The alarm system shall be installed and will form an integral part of the other security systems
installed at site to provide proactive coverage and monitoring of all protected areas i.e. Site
perimeter, entrances, buildings, HV yard and other strategic places within the substation. The alarm
system shall be triggered by the following inputs:
1) Due to Camera video analytics alarm detection on the zone(s).
2) Alarm inputs from electric fence.
3) Alarm inputs from Intrusion pre-detection devices.
4) Alarm inputs from access control points.
b) The installed alarm system shall comply with the requirements of Specification for Integrated Security
Alarm System for Protection of Eskom Installations and its subsidiaries (identifier: 240-86738968)
and alarming requirements of other integrating technologies mentioned above, forming part of the
integrated security system at site.
3.7 System integration
a) The subsystems outlined above are required to be integrated into a unified integrated security system
in line with Eskom’s technical specification for security systems integration (240-170000096).
b) The integrated system shall achieve the cause the effect matrix requirements in site zoning below
and in tabled Annex A.
3.7.1 Site Zoning
The table below shows a typical site zoning:
Table 4: Site Zoning
Site Zone/ Description Area Security measures
security level
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
Zone 1 General area
(Open area) entrances
system
Zone 2 High risk or critical
areas
3.7.1.1 Site Zone 1: General area
a) This is the outside area directly adjacent to the fences are monitored via the perimeter CCTV system.
b) CCTV monitoring shall be conducted at the main vehicle entrance as an overview of the area and to
serve as identification point for visitors.
c) CCTV system to be installed on the perimeter in order to monitor and verify alarms on the perimeter
intruder detection system and energized fence system.
d) PTZ CCTV Cameras to be installed at strategic positions on the site and provide a controllable
interface from where specific activities can be monitored both locally and remotely.
e) A PA system shall be installed to communicate remotely and warn possible attackers as a deterrent.
f) An intruder -pre-detection system is to be installed on the outer barrier to act as the first line of
detection.
g) CCTV video analytics to be utilized as an additional pre-detection system along the site perimeter.
h) An intercom system with an integrated camera shall be installed at the gate as a point of
communication between visitors and the site guards in the guard house at site.
i) Rather than using PIR’s to detect movement in the HV Yards, the CCTV system’s Video Motion
Detection System (VMD) will be utilized to perform the task. The VMD will function as the Intrusion
detection system in this area. PTZ CCTV Cameras should be setup in a manner so as to sweep the
respective fields of view in “patrol” mode and should generate alarms by utilizing Video Motion
Detection.
j) An alarm system to alarm for any intrusions detected.
k) If the site is unmanned (no guards) the following interlocking shall apply: At the site gates entrance
area an electronic Access Control reader consisting of a card and fingerprint/card reader shall be
installed as initial verification of authorized personnel. Upon positive verification all the gates should
simultaneously open allowing the vehicle/person to enter the site. The gates should automatically
close simultaneously 10 seconds after opening. If an object is detected preventing the gates from
closing, an alarm should be triggered. When exiting the site, at the entrance area an electronic
Access Control reader consisting of a card and fingerprint reader should be installed as initial
verification of authorized personnel. Upon positive verification all the gates should simultaneously
open allowing the vehicle/person to exit the site. The gates should automatically close 10 seconds
after opening. If an object is detected preventing the gates from closing, an alarm should be triggered.
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
l) If the site is manned (guards at site) the following interlocking shall apply: An electronic Access
Control reader consisting of a card and fingerprint reader shall be installed as initial verification of
authorized personnel. Upon positive verification the energized fence gate will open after which the
outer barrier gate will open to allow the vehicle inside the sally point. Upon entry into the sally point
the outer barrier gate will close effectively locking the visitor in the sally point. At this time the guard
will be able to interact with the visitor and conduct searching of the person and vehicle. Only after
the guard has completed his duties will the guard exit the sally point at which time the guard has to
tag on the inside of the guard house to verify the completion of his activities (The guard in turn will
be required to tag on the inner perimeter pedestrian gate to enter the sally point, and then tag out of
the sally point and only then tag in the guard house before the system will open, this logic followed
will force the guard to enter the sally point and conduct the searching rather than just tagging a visitor
in through the guardhouse point) when the visitor on his turn can then again tag in the reader in the
sally point (Card reader only). At this time the inner gate will open to allow the visitor into the
restricted area. Exiting of the site will be the reverse operation of the entry sequence.
3.7.1.2 Site Zone 2: High risk or critical areas
a) At the entry points into these areas, biometric and card readers will be utilized as it is restricted areas
and only personnel with Permit-To-Work are allowed inside this area. The biometrics is used to
enforce this rule.
b) All buildings shall use an intrusion detection system which consists of a PIR and Door Contact to
verify the status of the room when it is supposed to be unoccupied and subsequently generate an
alarm if an intrusion is detected. The intrusion system is to be automatically disarmed upon granting
entry to a person through the IAC system and arming upon the exiting of such a person.
c) HV Regulation require that the doors to the battery rooms remain open when occupied, the system
will expect this open status and will generate an alarm if a person is detected inside the area even
if it is an authorized person as the door is supposed to be in the open position.
d) An alarm system to alarm for any intrusions detected.
Note: The generic site layouts in Annex D shall be used to depict site zoning
3.8 Site monitoring
a) There shall be a security manager workstation at site in the security building for local allocation and
revoking of access rights and controlling of security workflows.
b) There shall be a maintenance manager workstation in the security building for controlling of
maintenance workflows.
c) Some or all of the functions listed in item (a) and (b) above may be combined into a single physical
workstation. The workstation software GUI shall be based on the operator log on credentials to be
able to perform functions listed in item (a) and (b) above.
d) The security alarms and CCTV visuals should be routed to remote Security Control Centre (zero
control) through the Eskom WAN.
e) The system shall allow the remote Security Control Centre to be able to remotely control PTZ
cameras at site.
f) The system shall allow the remote Security Control Centre to have audio (via PA system) and data
communication with the site. Including the ability to give audio warnings over the PA system to the
security zone that detected an intrusion.
g) It shall be possible for the Security Control Centre to remotely retrieve any of the stored event data
or video streams in real time.
3.9 Communication
a) The network shall provide redundancy in the event of path failure.
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
b) Single mode optical fibre is preferred as the physical transport medium of choice for on-site
communication. The installation shall conform to Eskom standard, 240-46264031.
c) For indoor connections and outdoor connection distances below 5m, CAT5e/CAT6 UTP copper cable
may be used.
d) The detailed design shall include the security LAN design used to facilitate communications between
security system elements.
e) The IT Infrastructure (LAN, cabling, servers, etc.) design shall be detailed in the IT documentation.
f) The Ethernet communication channel on the Eskom Telecomms WAN (multiplexer) shall be specified
for a minimum 10/100/1000 Base-T with auto negotiation. The interface can be a RJ45 connector
using a CAT5e/CAT 6 cable or a fibre optic cable.
3.10 PSIM requirements
a) The centralized PSIM infrastructure is located at Zero Control in Simmerpan, of which the design
shall be defined in the detailed design stage of the project (refer to LAD and BRS: DEM_2412993 &
2425114). For this enquiry the Tenderers are required to supply, install, configure and commission
interfaces for integration to the PSIM system already installed at Zero Control in Germiston, refer to
Annex E of this document for PSIM interfaces integration requirements and guideline.
3.11 Power supply requirements
a) All system servers shall be housed in 19-inch equipment cabinets as specified in the Eskom standard
240-60725641. This specification covers the earthing requirements in the cabinet as well.
b) Power shall be distributed through the panel, so as to isolate the supply of the subsystems by means
of appropriately sized MCBs. At a minimum, the following will be on separate supply circuits:
1) Perimeter Cameras
2) Indoor cameras
3) PA system devices
4) Site controllers and server based equipment
5) Other security related equipment such as gate motors and electric fence energizers.
c) The system shall have a power failure indication that shall be sent through to the remote security
control room should the supply be interrupted.
d) The existing power systems at site shall be used as the primary power sources, provided that the
standby time (autonomy) requirements of the site are not adversely affected.
e) Tenderers are required to propose a suitable standby power system sized appropriately to handle
the expected system load. Eskom may however decide to utilise the existing standby batteries at
site.
3.12 Cabling and trenching
a) The contractor shall provide detailed as built drawings indicating cable routes, installation locations
of all equipment as part of the detailed design submission.
b) The contractor will be responsible for laying and terminating the cable from the peripheral devices to
the control room.
c) Data and low voltage cable installations shall be separated from the mains power installations by a
minimum of 500mm.
d) Where data and low voltage cabling has to cross power cabling, this shall always be at 90°
e) All wiring shall be concealed inside trunking or conduit. No exposed wiring will be accepted.
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
f) Cable runs next to devices that may cause electro-magnetic interference shall be avoided or suitable
shielding provided.
g) Tension when pulling cables shall not exceed recommended safe values as specified by the cable
manufacturers.
h) Supply and installation of all trunking, conduit, glands etc. form part of the contractor’s scope of work.
i) Cable joints shall be avoided as far as practically possible.
j) An industry acceptable Source, destination cable marking system shall be used to mark all cables.
3.13 Project technical services
a) Tenderer shall provide services outlined in 240-170000723 Generic Technical Requirements for
Physical Security Technologies Contracts.
b) Tenderer to include a 5 year training, support, repair and maintenance as part of the project solution.
3.13.1 Organisation Experience
a) Tenderer must submit company organogram, indicating team composition(s).
b) List of similar projects must be provided.
c) CVs for the company and staff must be submitted with the following experience / competencies:
1) Experience in design and installation of Alarms system.
2) Experience in design and installation CCTV Systems, maintenance & associated
communication network system fault finding.
3) Experience in design and installation of Access Control Systems (IACS).
4) Experience in design and installation of PA Systems.
5) Experience in design and installation of Intrusion pre-detection Systems.
6) Experience in design and installation of an Integrated Security System.
7) Experience in design and installation of the IT Infrastructure and PSIM.
d) Project Lead Engineer that is professionally registered (Pr Eng/Pr Tech) with ECSA (Engineering
Council of South Africa) that will sign off the entire design.
e) Experience in providing training on all the components in the Integrated Security System
3.14 Technical returnables and index
a) The index in Annex F of this document provides a guideline of how the technical returnables should
be indexed by the Tenderers.
b) The supplier shall produce and submit a detailed design report for the integrated security system as
per the index in Annex B of this document.
4. Authorisation
This document has been seen and accepted by:
Name and surname Designation
Mario Peterson Middle Manager (Acting) – PTM&C Project Engineering and Support
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
5. Revisions
Date Rev Compiler Remarks
August 2023 4 R Moshoeshoe Corrected references in scope selection annexure
April 2023 3 R Moshoeshoe Included requirements for PSIM interfaces
June 2022 2 R Moshoeshoe Included requirements for intrusion pre-detection
system
June 2021 1 R Moshoeshoe. First issue
6. Development team
The following people were involved in the development of this document:
7. Acknowledgements
Not applicable
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Revision: 4
Page:
Annex A – Integrated Alarming cause and effect matrix
Unauthorised Access Authorised
Access
Breach physical perimeter Outdoor Camera Outdoor Indoor Sensor Camera Indoor
fence or virtual perimeter Sensor Protected Area Triggers Protected Area
fence by smart cameras/ Triggers Triggers Trigger
beams/etc.
Perimeter flood lights
activated at night only
Substation flood lights
activated at night only
Security floodlights
activated at night only
Control Room lights 24hr
Switch Room lights 24hr
Any other indoor room
DVR/NVR record footage
Alarm signals(text and
video) sent to Security
Control Centre
PTZ tracking sent to
Security Control
PA System recorded
message activated
PA System Security
Control operated if
positive alarm verified
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Revision: 4
Page:
Unauthorised Access Authorised
Access
Breach physical perimeter Outdoor Camera Outdoor Indoor Sensor Camera Indoor
fence or virtual perimeter Sensor Protected Area Triggers Protected Area
fence by smart cameras/ Triggers Triggers Trigger
beams/etc.
Alarm System Zones
triggered
Alarm Zone events sent
to Security Control
Indoor Siren
automatically activated
Strobe light automatically
activated
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
Annex B – Detailed design report index for integrated security system
a) Overview of functional specification
b) Scope of work
c) High Level Integration
1) Local vs remote monitoring and control capabilities
2) Software and network config files.
3) Cause and effect matrices (e.g. if alarm on fence, lights and image sent to control)
d) System Architecture (to include Logical and physical design, networking and bandwidth
requirements, Information flow, Physical security information management, User access profile
management and enrolment process, cyber security controls e.g. firewalls, DMZ, System support
remote access authentication etc.)
e) Lifespan of System and product software versions (include 10 year life span support)
f) Recommended Maintenance (Procedures, Spares and FMECA- Failure mode effects and criticality
analysis, tools and test equipment, training requirements-engineering and field operations)
g) System commission and acceptance testing procedure (commissioning results to be provided prior
to system handover (minimum tests shall be as per 240-171000171).
h) Annex A – Drawings
i) Annex B – Equipment Specification
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Security system
Revision: 4
Page:
j) Annex C – Datasheets
k) PIR Sensors
l) Annex C- Bill of Materials
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Revision: 4
Page:
Annex C – IPSS Project Scope Selection
Lead Engineer: Tel:
Lead Engineer’s
Department:
Project name:
Project No/WBS.:
Region /Grid
Substation/ET site:
Offsite Security Control
Centre:
The table below shall be used to indicate systems that are included in the project scope:
System Generic sections of scope of work (240-170000258) - Applicable sections in the generic System included in the
applicable to all Systems scope of work (240-170000258) Project Scope (yes/No)
Integrated Access Control 3.1, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 3.11, 3,12, 3.13, 3.14 3.2 & Generic sections
System( IACS)
CCTV System 3.3 & Generic sections
Intrusion pre-detection System 3.4 & Generic sections
Public Address System 3.5 & Generic sections
Alarm System 3.6 & Generic sections
Interfaces to PSIM system 3.10
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Revision: 4
Page:
Note:
1. Where a system is not included as part of the project scope, details relating to such a system shall be treated as information only and should be excluded from the project costing.
2. Where the project scope includes the NLEPDS refer to 240-170000192 & 240-134779125.
3. Where there is no requirement to interface to PSIM, it will reflect as not applicable for implementation but the design must still comply to the requirements as per the IT documentation (
[11] and [12]). Instead of Bernina, the LAD and BRS documents shall be read as applicable to the substation referred to in this scope of work.
Name Designation Signature Date
Project Scope verified
by:
Project Scope Approved
by:
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Revision: 4
Page:
Annex D: Typical site layout
The generic site layout below shall be used for a typical site zoning
Figure D1: Typical site layout Tx Substation (refer to drawing THE22P02-SE-42)
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY SYSTEM Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
Revision: 4
Page:
Figure D2: Typical site layout for ET Site
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
System
Revision: 4
Page:
Annex E: PSIM interface integration requirements and guideline
The Physical Security Information Management (PSIM) system and its centralised infrastructure for Eskom
Transmission is installed at the Security Control Centre (Zero Control) at Simmerpan Complex in Germiston.
Any security projects that require security remote monitoring and control shall use this guideline on how to
interface to the existing installed PSIM system to standardise and streamline the monitoring infrastructure
optimally.
2. PSIM capabilities and features
a) The installed PSIM system provides a software-based platform that is scalable and has modular system
architecture that enables multiple vendors to integrate their subsystems (e.g., CCTV, access control,
intrusion pre-detection, public address, alarm system etc) to it.
b) The PSIM system software is a licensed model and allows further future extensions (functional and
capacity-related). The software’s licensing scheme shall be based on the number of
subsystems/clients/servers installed as well as on the functionalities of the PSIM system and the total
number of installed devices.
c) The system uses the Client-Server model to monitor all connected sub-systems and enables bidirectional
communication i.e. receiving and transmitting information and events to and from the connected systems
d) The system manages (Accept/Defer/Fetch/Assign/Complete) the events received from the sub-systems
either individually or in a grouped presentation.
e) The system offers a user interface and operating concept in modern Windows style.
f) In the network mode, devices can be connected to any workstation within the system. The linkage with
PSIM is established via pure software interface modules. The workstations can work independently, i.e.
in case of an interruption of the server connection, the events registered by local systems are still
displayed.
g) The system has capability to link-up to bus systems such as EIB/KNX, LON, Interbus
h) The system allows the connection of phone and intercom systems via proprietary interfaces as well as
standard protocols such as CSTA, TAPI and SIP
i) Customized control panels for various device linkages are available.
3. Subsystem interfacing requirements
The proposed sub-systems shall at minimum have the following capabilities in order to interface to the installed
Psim:
a) All systems and devices connected to the PSIM System shall communicate their status and alarms and
be able to receive control instructions/sequences using IP networking.
b) Project data shall supply graphical and textual information with instructions and measures as well as
scheduled commands. In addition, personalized operating rights shall be assigned to each data point.
With help of the information provided in the graphics and texts the event handling shall then be
completed through taking actions and entering comments interactively.
c) All sent or received telegrams shall be logged for each device/sub system interface.
d) In addition to the regular workstations (full clients), a web access for display of events and control of
connected subsystems shall be possible cross-platform.
e) The web access shall be realized browser-independently based on HTML and JavaScript and without
any manual installation (e.g. of plug-ins).
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
System
Revision: 4
Page:
f) The system’s software needs to communicate bi-directionally.
Important to note for adding of subsystems: The PSIM System has been designed to enable a centrally
controlled interaction between security, building and information management systems, however it shall not
replace any installed single system. (The integration extent always depends on the capability of the SDK
(Software Development Kit) supplied by the device manufacturer.
4. Interface development process
a) The figure below shows the process that shall be followed by the Suppliers and PSIM OEM for
provision/development of interface to link site level systems to the PSIM at Zero Control. Suppliers shall
include the associated cost of all the works included in this process in their costing.
Figure 3: PSIM interface provision/development process
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
System
Revision: 4
Page:
b) The table below shall be populated to provide details for the subsystems and associated devices to start
the evaluation process depicted above.
Subsystem Vendor Model Panel/Device Qty.
CCTV system
Alarm system
Intrusion pre-detection
system
Access Control system
Public address system
Site Integration system
(where applicable)
Other
5. Supported interfaces
Below is a list of interfaces supported by the current PSIM at Zero Control. When the PSIM System integrates
to third party systems, the Suppliers shall include the optional additional modules and licenses if it is found in
the current interface list as well as the possibility for future extensions with further optional modules not on the
list.
a) Generic Interfaces
Serial IN-SST
Serial OUT-SST
Generic OUT-IP
GenIO
b) Standardized Interfaces
BACnetClient KNX
EIB LON Bus (via Gateway)
ESPA 4.4.4 Modbus RTU
ESPA-X Modbus IP
Interbus OPC DA 2.0 Server / Client
IP Check OPC UA
c) Network Management
APC ISX-Manager (via Modbus) Generic SNMP Protocol
HP Open View Service Desk SNMPv3
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
System
Revision: 4
Page:
EMKA barox switches (via SNMP)
d) Key Management
Deister – Key Management System
Gantner – Leisure Key Management
Kemas – Key Management Systems
e) Media Control
Russound CAV 6.6
f) Weather Data
Vaisala – WINDCAP
g) Radiation Detection
GIHMM – Gamma Detector (via ModbusIP)
h) General Alarm system
Abi – mc1500
Bosch – UGM 2005 / 2010 / 2020 / 2040
Esser (Honeywell) – BMZ 8000 via SEI
Esser (Honeywell) – BMZ IQ8 Control via SEI
Securiton – SecuriPro
Siemens – SM80
Siemens – SM88 (SM-PORT, FRK, FRK-B)
i) Fire Alarm Systems
Advanced Electronics – MX 4000 / MX 5000 Hekatron – BMZ 340
Autronica – BS 420 Hertek – PENTA Series
Bosch – UGM 2005 / 2010 / 2020 / 2040 IFAM – FAT
Bosch – FPA 5000 Kentec Electronics Limited – Taktis MCE
Cerberus Algorex – FC700A Notifier (Honeywell) – AM 2000 / AM 4000 / AM
6000 / AM 8000
Cerberus Algorex – CS11 (DMS 7000) Notifier (Honeywell) – ID 2000
CEAG (Cooper), DF6000 Notifier (Honeywell) – NF 3000 / 5000 / ID 3000
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
System
Revision: 4
Page:
Consilium – Consilium Common Platform (CCP) Minimax – FMZ 4100 / 5000 (via MX2 Protocol)
Cooper CF1100 / CF 3000 / DF 6000 Morley – Standard Morley Protocol
Detectomat – detect 3004 und 3016 NSC – Solution F1
Detectomat – DC3500 Panasonic – EBL 128/512 via EBLnet
Eltek Fire & Safety (Honeywell) – FireWin Protec – 6400
ESMI (Schneider Electric) – FX 3NET Sauter – AVEO flex
Esser (Honeywell) – Esser N 3007 / 3008 Schrack – Integral via B3-USI4-Modul
Esser (Honeywell) – Esser 8000 / 8007 / 8008 Schrack – Integral via B5-LAN-Modul
Esser (Honeywell) – Esser 8000 / IQ8 / Flex-ES Schrack – MAXIMA
GE – FP2000 Siemens – Cerberus FS720 (FC722, FC724)
Global Security – JunoNET Panel Telenot – Comfire 3000-4 Plus
Hekatron – Integral via BX-USI4 Telenot – Hifire 4100
Hekatron – Integral via BX-NETX Total Walther (Tyco) – Zettler BMCI
Hekatron – Integral from B5-SCUA (via LAN on Total Walther (Tyco) – Zettler Fast 2000
Board)
Securiton – SecuriFire via B3-USI4-Modul Total Walther (Tyco) – Zettler Expert
Securiton – SecuriFire via B5-LAN-Modul Total Walther (Tyco) – Zettler Profile
Siemens – SigmaSys D-100 / SM80 / SM88 Total Walther (Tyco) – Zettler ZETFAS/LOUT (via
Filnet)
Siemens – FS20 (FC2020, FC2040, FC2060) via Total Walther (Tyco) – Zettler ZETAPLEX-FSK
BACnet (via AED)
Siemens – FS20 (FC2020, FC2040, FC2060) via Total Walther (Tyco) – Zettler ZX / MZX
UNIPOS – FS5200 Wagner – Titanus Rack Sens
Wagner – FPA5000 Wagner – Titanus Super Sens
Wagner – Titanus Micro Sens Wagner – Titanus Top Sens
Wagner – Titanus Pro Sens
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure
SCOPE OF WORK FOR INTEGRATED PHYSICAL SECURITY Unique Identifier: 240-170000258
System
Revision: 4
Page:
j) Intrusion Detection Systems
ABI – MC1500 / MMP1 Esser (Honeywell) – EMA 5007 / all system types
via SEI
Alphatronics – UNii Europlex – 3GS
Aritech – CD Max GE – ATS MasterPanel
Bosch – NZ 300 Honeywell – Galaxy Dimension (via Microtech)
Bosch – UEZ / BZ500 Satel – Integra 256 Plus
Bosch – MAP 5000 Napco Security Technologies – Napco Gemini
Bosch – UGM 2005 / 2010 / 2020 Novar (Honeywell) – EMZ 561 (MB16, MB100,
MB256, MB256plus) via IGIS-LOOP
Effeff – EMZ 561 (–> Novar/Honeywell) Novar (Honeywell) – EMZ 561 (MB16, MB100,
MB256, MB256plus) via IGIS-LAN
Effeff – DEZ 9000 Novar (Honeywell) – EMZ 561 (MB16, MB100,
MB256, MB256plus) via WinMAG (OPC)
Esser (Honeywell) – DEZ 9000 Novar (Honeywell) – MB24, MB48, MB100 via
module 013211.10
Novar (Honeywell) – MB-Secure via ISOM API Siemens – Security detection system SM88
Nox Systems – Nox Siemens SPC
Paradox – Imperial Sonax – Varus
Plettac – GSE 63 Sonax – Z 3000
RISCO Group – ProSYS/LightSYS Telenot – complex 400H
Rokonet (RISCO) – ProSYS Telenot – Hiplex8400h
Securiton – SecuriPro Total Walther (Tyco) – ZETADRESS 300
Siemens – Guarto Total Walther (Tyco) – ZETADRESS 1000/2000
Siemens – Sintony Si400 / Si420 Total Walther (Tyco) – ZETADRESS 5000
Siemens – Transliner Cerberus IK 500 / IC 1000 UTC FS – ATS1000A / ATSx500A
UTC FS – ATS MasterPanel Vanderbilt – SPC (43xx,53xx,63xx) via FlexC
ESKOM copyright protected
When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB.
This document provides an overview of Eskom’s requirements for the design, supply, installation, and
This document provides an overview of Eskom’s requirements for the design, supply, installation, and
This project was initiated to ensure adequate upgrade of the security systems and infrastructure
at Pembroke substation to comply with OHS Act, National Key Point and Eskom latest policies
and standards. Existing access control building, perimeter lighting, fences and access gates will
be refurbished to achieve the required quality of security systems and infrastructure. This
document covers the construction work that will be done at Pembroke Substation.
2. References
[1] 240-55922824 Substation layout design guidelines
[2] Occupational health and safety act (OHS Act)
[3] (32-1205) Eskom maintenance management policy
[4] (TST41-794) Substation and facility maintenance
[5] (32-727) Eskom safety, health, environment and quality policy
[6] (32-846) Operating regulations for high voltage systems
[7] (SANS 1200) General civil
[8] SABS 10229-1:2010 Transport of Dangerous Goods
[9] SABS 10231: 2019 transport of Dangerous Goods by Road
[10] National Environmental Management Waste Act
[11] OHSA act (Act )
[12] SANS 10400 – The application of the national Building Regulations
[13] National Building Regulations and Building Standards Act No.
[14] (240-109644476) - Standard for Implementation of Substation Layouts for Transmission
Substations
[15] (240-1001183119) - Standard for Fences in Eskom Transmission Stations
[16] (240-139282493) – Security Lighting for Eskom applications
[17] (240-78980848) – Non-lethal Fence Specification
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDS database, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it
is in line with the Authorized Version on the database.
Pembroke Substation – Unique Identifier: PEM25P19-SE-E82
Revision: 1 National Security Project 1 Security Build 2A
Page:
This scope of work is to be read in conjunction with drawings listed in section 4 of this document.
All construction is to be carried out in accordance with Eskom Safety, Health, Environment &
Quality Policy and all necessary safety procedures must be strictly adhered to.
The Civil scope of work includes but not limited to:
a) Access control building refurbishment
b) Perimeter fence lighting upgrade
c) Upgrade of the existing non-lethal electric fence to a 24-strand galvanised wire with
concrete plinth on either side for the prevention of vegetation grown/interference.
d) Evaluation and review of the existing drainage and mitigate any deficiencies that are
affecting the effectiveness of the barrier fences.
3.1 Identified substation
a) Pembroke substation, this scope of work only applies to this project.
3.2 Detailed scope of work
Access control building-Fibre Comms
a) Construction of flexible cable sleeves with draw boxes for the gate and Fibre comms from
the access control building to the control building.
b) Sleeves from the ACB manhole to the gate
Perimeter fence lighting upgrade
Refer to drawings PEM25P19-SE-E43 sht.1-2
a) New installation of 115 lighting poles, at 15m intervals.
b) Installation of 115, 60W LED luminaires on top of the poles.
c) Installation of two Security lighting distribution boards (SLDB) at positions shown on
drawing.
d) Install Supply cables from ACDB in control building to SLDB 1 & 2
e) Install cables from SLDB to luminaires.
f) Install control cables from SLDB’s to access control building.
g) Install 10mm DIA copper rod around the complete substation, 3 Km in total.
h) Terminate, test and commission.
Operational Floodlighting
Refer to drawings PEM13P01-SE-E44 sht.1-3
a) Complete refurbishment of the Floodlighting installation
b) Supply and install new supply cables to existing masts
c) Supply and install new Distribution Board fully equipped according to sheet 2 and 3
d) Supply and install DB’s and JB’s for each mast
e) Supply and install new 244W led Luminaires
f) Supply and install cables inside masts and cables from JB to luminaires
g) Terminate, test and commission.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDS database, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it
is in line with the Authorized Version on the database.
Pembroke Substation – Unique Identifier: PEM25P19-SE-E82
Revision: 1 National Security Project 1 Security Build 2A
Page:
Inner fence upgrade
a) The project will be responsible for upgrading the existing inner security fence.
b) The contractor will be responsible for all fencing works, including excavation for fence
posts, anti-tunnelling, installation of fence panels, gates, overhangs, etc.
c) Replace inner fence as specified on drawings 0.54/5633 sheets 1-3.
Installation of access gates
a) The access gates must be removed completely and spoiled,
b) A totally new access gate must be installed according to drawings 0.54/10230 sheets 1-
6,
c) Complete with gate motors, gates and sleeves as shown on the drawing and,
d) The contractor should also install a fibre optic sleeve pipe with draw boxes in accordance
to drawing 0.53-2129
Non Lethal Fence
a) The non-lethal fence complete with the protection slab must be removed and spoiled,
b) A totally new non-lethal fence must be installed in accordance with Eskom’s specification
of 240- 78980848,
c) The details according to the specification is drawing 0.54-8282.
d) Existing stone verge shall remain.
4. Drawings list
Item description drawing number
1 Access control building refurbishment PEM25P19-SE-E47 sht. 1 - 5
2 Security fence general upgrade PEM25P19-SE-E11
3 Security lighting layout PEM25P19-SE-E43 sht.1-2
4 Access control building electrical PEM25P19-SE-E43 sht. 3
installation and schematic diagram
5 Operational floodlighting cable route and PEM13P01-SE-E44 sht. 1-3
mast location layout. And schematic
layout
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDS database, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it
is in line with the Authorized Version on the database.
Pembroke Substation – Unique Identifier: PEM25P19-SE-E82
Revision: 1 National Security Project 1 Security Build 2A
Page:
5. Authorisation
This document has been seen and accepted by:
Name Designation
Sibonelo Sibiya Snr Advisor Architecture
Andile Maneli Middle Manager – Civil
6. Revisions
Date Rev. Compiler Remarks
27 August 2025 1 Nhlakanipho Gwala Second Issue
7. Developmental team
The following people were involved in the development of this document:
8. Acknowledgements
None
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the EDS database, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it
is in line with the Authorized Version on the database.
This document establishes the technical evaluation criteria for the evaluation of the tenders that will
be received in response to the request to tender for the NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke
Substation project. It is a high-level consideration of the key aspects that will give direction to the
technical evaluation process. It is in accordance with the Eskom Procurement and Supply Chain
Management Procedure (32-1034)
2. Supporting Clauses
2.1 Scope
This evaluation criteria document applies to the NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation
project.
2.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to establish a standardized framework for assessing the technical
capabilities and compliance of the tenders for NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation.
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg
No 2021/539129/30.
2.1.3 Effective date
The date from which the document is effective is from the authorisation date.
2.2 Normative/Informative References
2.2.1 Normative
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems
[2] OHS Act, 1993: Construction Regulations, 2014
[3] Eskom Procurement and Supply Chain Management Procedure (32-1034, Rev 5)
2.2.2 Informative
None
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No 2021/539129/30
Tender Technical Evaluation Criteria: NSP 1 Security Unique Identifier: TPDSOU-343
Upgrade for Pembroke Substation Revision: 0
Page:
2.3 Definitions
2.3.1 Controlled Disclosure: Controlled Disclosure to external parties (either enforced by law, or
discretionary).
2.3.2 Tender: A written competitive offer, quotation, proposal made by the supplier in a prescribed
or stipulated form in response to an invitation to tender/competitive enquire for provision of
assets/goods or services and or the disposal thereof.
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
CV Curriculum Vitae
N/A Not Applicable
OHSA Occupational Health and Safety Act
HC Heavy Current
LV Low Voltage
2.5 Roles and Responsibilities
Technical evaluators
The technical evaluators will evaluate tenders using this technical evaluation criteria as specified in
the enquiry to determine if a tenderer meets the overall threshold.
The technical evaluators must prepare the score sheets for evaluation prior to commencing the
evaluation. The score sheet should contain all criteria for technical evaluation, together with the point
allocation for each criterion and sub-criterion. The score sheet must be based on an approved
evaluation methodology. The minimum threshold for functionality must be indicated. The amendment
of functional criteria, weights, applicable scoring methodologies and/or the minimum threshold for
functionality that were specified in the Enquiry is not permitted.
Each evaluator must independently evaluate and score tenders against each functionality criterion
or sub-criterion criteria and sub-criteria based on the agreed evaluation methodology.
Evaluators must provide written reasons on the evaluation sheet for a tender for the points awarded
to the tender.
Scores given by the evaluators must be averaged and the average score is assigned to a tender.
Significant variances in the scores provided by the several evaluators should be questioned, clarified
and documented by the CFT.
2.6 Process for Monitoring
N/a
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No 2021/539129/30
Tender Technical Evaluation Criteria: NSP 1 Security Unique Identifier: TPDSOU-343
Upgrade for Pembroke Substation Revision: 0
Page:
2.7 Related/Supporting Documents
N/a
3. Tender Technical Evaluation Criteria
3.1 Scope of Work
The following is a high-level applicable scope of work. Refer to a detailed scope of work document:
3.2 Technical Evaluation Threshold
The minimum weighted final score (Threshold) required for a tender to be considered from a
technical perspective is 70%. The tenderers will be evaluated using the criteria listed in section 3.3.
Each criterion is allocated a weight. An overall scoring will be given for each tenderer. The overall
score is a sum of the individual scores allocated for each criterion.
3.3 Qualitative technical Evaluation Criteria
Compliant tenders will be evaluated against a set of weighted qualitative evaluation criteria. The
evaluation criterion has been broken down into sections, and a percentage weighting has been
allocated to each section. Percentage weighting summary figures is indicated in the table below:
Table 1: Mandatory Requirements/ Gate Keepers
Mandatory Requirement/ Gate Keeper Yes No
Construction Manager Professional
Registration: Registered as Professional
Construction Manager/ Professional
Construction Project Manager with
SACPCMP or any registration with ECSA.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No 2021/539129/30
Tender Technical Evaluation Criteria: NSP 1 Security Unique Identifier: TPDSOU-343
Upgrade for Pembroke Substation Revision: 0
Page:
Table 2: Qualitative Evaluation Criteria
1. Human Resource Skills & Training
Weight Score Source of evidence
1.1 Company Organogram 2% Organogram certified
by owner/ member/
director
1.2 Construction Manager
Diploma in Built Environment certificates
Professional Construction Manager/ To be accompanied 10%
Professional Construction Project by an affidavit done
Manager with SACPCMP or any by the certificate
ECSA Registration holder to confirm
his/her employment.
of related experience)
1.3 Construction Supervisor: Electrical Works
Diploma in Electrical Engineering
(Hc)
of related experience)
Originally certified
upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for
Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP
Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template
Document 559-235050781 Rev 3
Identifier
Invitation to Tender
Effective Date July 2024
Review Date July 2027
Invitation to Tender
National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd (hereinafter “NTCSA”) invites you to submit
a tender for the National Security Project
National Security Project 1 - security upgrade for Pembroke Substation
National Security Project 1 - security upgrade for Pembroke Substation
Dineo Maepangwane B
supply the goods or
execute the works
I, the undersigned [insert full name of signatory]…………………………………………, in my capacity as [insert capacity, i.e., member, director, partner, etc.] …………………………………………... of the supplier [insert registered full legal name of the supplying entity AND their company registration number] ………………....................................................., certify under oath that, to the best of my knowledge, the information furnished herein is true and correct. I accept that NTCSA reserves its right to act against the supplier named above or me personally in terms hereof, should this declaration prove to be false.
eTendering system is a web-based system that allows suppliers bidding for various tenders advertised
on Tender Bulletin system to “upload” their tender documents. Currently the tenderers or suppliers
submit tender documents at various Eskom tender offices. eTendering system replaces the manual or
physical submission of tender documents at various Eskom tender offices. eTendering system in a
nutshell is an electronic box where tender documents can be “dropped” or “uploaded”. Suppliers will
be required to register their details before they can be granted access to the eTendering system. An
OTP (one time pin) will be sent to both their cell phone and email address.
Quick and direct access is also available by using the following links:
of the public, to view and access NTCSA published tenders. eTendering hyperlink will be found
on this site. Members of the public may follow prompt instructions once they have clicked on
the eTendering link (https://eTendering.eskom.co.za). This link will allow them to upload the
required tender documentation.
members of the public, to view information about published tenders and submit their tender
documents.
eTendering system.
2 Problems
A channel of communication has been created in case users of the system experiences a problem
with the system. In a case users come across some difficulties in using Tender bulletin, eTendering
and OpenText systems they need to contact the buyer responsible for the published tender.
3 What’s New
A new functionality to “add closed tenders”. Closed tenders refers to the tenders which are not listed
on Tenderbulletin as normal tenders, but are tenders sent directly to the relevant and potential
suppliers who meet the selection and evaluation criteria to offer what the buyer needs. These suppliers
will be sent a link via email to bid privately.
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
4 Getting Started
To gain access to eTendering portal
1. Open your web browser
2. Type TenderBulletin (eskom.co.za) or https://eTendering.eskom.co.za
3. eTendering system login page will be displayed:
Fig 1
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
Registration Form Steps to follow
Plus prefix e.g +27
capture picture to validate that you
are not a robot.
click on register button
the registerer to verify the email sent to
the provided email address.
click on “Resend Verification Email”
button
on link provided on
the email.
etendering site with a login screen
displayed, now complete the login
with your verified email address and
password
*
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
Fig1.1
Fig2a.
Fig2b.
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
Fig3.
4. Once the email is verified, login using your registered email address and password then the
OTP page will be displayed
5. OTP sent to the registered cellphone number and email address
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
6. Insert the otp number then click “Verify OTP” button, to resend OTP click on “Resend OTP”
button
7. Landing page once OTP is verified
8. Select the preferred “Ref No”
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
9. A page with the preferred Tender information is displayed before tender documentation can
be submitted.
10. Click on “Create New Submission” button to submit required Tender documents
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
11. Landing page once clicked on “Create New Submission” button. Take note of the
mentioned disclaimers.
12. To submit tender documents, click on “Add file” button
13. Upload required tender documents by:
1. Giving the file a name
2. Select the listed file type e.g.: Technical, commercial, finance and etc
3. Choose the file you need to upload
4. Then click on “Upload” button, Fig5.
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
Fig4.
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
Fig5.
14. Once clicked on “Upload” button, this page will be displayed with the submitted document(s).
Continue to submit all the required documents under the correct category ,i.e: Technical
should be selected if technical documentation is uploaded and etc. Verify all required
documents are uploaded before making ‘Final Submission’ by clicking on ‘Finalize
Submission’ button.
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
15. Click on “Finalize Submission” button. A file size cannot exceed 50MB and a total size of
all uploaded files should not exceed 900MB.
16. Once “Finalize Submission” button is clicked the pop-up message confirming the submission
will pop-up
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
17. Click on “Finalise and Close Submission” button to finalize the submission of documents.
If not all documents were submitted or still wish to add or submit more documents, click on
“No, continue adding files” button.
18. Once the submission is finalised the page with all submitted documents will display with the
submission and closed time and date timestamp at the bottom.
19. To view submitted tenders, click on “My Submissions” menu option. All your individually
submitted tenders will be displayed.
If you want to view or verify the submitted documents, click on “View Submission” button
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
20. Once the submission process is complete an email with be sent to the submitter with all
submitted documents on email,Fig6.This is the final step for the submitter or tenderer.
It is vital to save the email with the submission ID for future enquiry if need be.
From:Eskom E-Tender Document Submission 28 <[email protected]>
Date:Tue,23Aug2022,3:42pm
Subject: Response To Submitter
Eskom E-Tender Document Submission 28
Hi Monalisa
You have finalized a new submission with submission id:14 on tender #MPKUS10086PS
closing date : 2022-11-30 10:00:00.
Have started the submission from 2022-08-23 14:28:33 and finalized at 2022-08-23
15:42:28
Tender Description:
Award for Provision of Office Cleaning and Janitorial Services at Kusile Power Station
Project
Files Submitted:
ID Original Name Title Size Type
38 Test7.pdf testingCom 33141 Commercial
40 Test1.pdf testingTech 33502 Technical
41 Test15.pdf testingFin 33141 Finance
Thanks,
Eskom E-Tender Document Submission 28 Automated Mail
© 2022 Eskom E-Tender Document Submission 28. All rights reserved.
NB: This Email and its contents are subject to the Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd EMAIL
LEGAL NOTICE which can be viewed at
http://www.eskom.co.za/Pages/Email_Legal_Spam_Disclaimer.aspx
Fig6.
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
5 Edit Registration
To edit already registered information such as Name, Organization, CSD and cell phone number
select “Edit Registration” on the drop down, Fig1. New window with information that needs to be
updated pop ups,Fig2. Click on “Update” button to update registration details.
Fig1.
Fig2.
6 Log off Button
To logout, click “Log out” on the dropdown next to your name
Fig1.
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
7 Password reset
To reset a forgotten password, click “Forgot your password” Fig1. and a new screen will
pop up to enter an alternative email where the new password will be sent Fig2.Confirmation
message will be sent to the user, Fig3.
Fig1.
Fig2.
Fig3.
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
An email confirming password reset will be sent to the email provided.
Click on the link or “Reset Password” button to reset the password.
Fig4.
A new window will pop up to reset and confirm the new password, Fig5.Enter new
password and confirm then click on “Reset Password” button.
Fig5.
OTP window will pop up, type in the OTP sent to either the cell phone or email address.
Fig6.
© 2023 Eskom of 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Eskom eTendering System
User Manual
OTP successfully goes through and lands on the below screen, password is successfully
reset.
Fig7.
8 General
This system is compatible to most web browsers however we recommend Ms Edge.
The end.
© 2023 Eskom of 19
upgrade
Duration of the Project 12 Months
Name of Buyer Dineo Maepa
Section 1: Objective Criteria
The inclusion of objective criteria in an enquiry is not mandatory but a condition for contract award, and if
included, this must align with the requirements of the PPPFA [clause 2(1)(f)] and be clearly stated in the enquiry
together with the consequenc
This project was initiated to ensure adequate upgrade of the security systems and infrastructure at
Pembroke substation to comply with OHS Act, National Key Point and Eskom latest policies and
standards. Existing access control building, perimeter lighting, fences and access gates will be
refurbished to achieve the required quality of security systems and infrastructure
At Pembroke Substation the extension of the current Electric fence is required to ensure the safety
of Eskom assets. All the Electric fence alarms will be monitored on site and at Zero control at Simmer
pan.
The Civil scope of work includes but not limited to:
on either side for the prevention of vegetation grown/interference.
alarm detection.
day/night switch and sensors. Lighting to illuminate the prescribed area as set out in Standard
240-139282493.
the continuity of the electrified fence. Replace Inner gate to convert from swing gate to sliding
gate.
2. Supporting Clauses
2.1 Scope of the EMPr
NB: This EMPr document only caters for the scope of work contained in it. Any activities outside the
given scope of work will need to be addressed through the correct process (i.e., method statements).
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Security Project
Revision: 3
Page:
2.1.1 Purpose
This EMPr has been compiled to address the potential environmental impact that might occur during
the project. This document serves as the environmental specification to Eskom personnel and
Contractors with regards to addressing the environmental issues identified prior to and during the
construction phase. It is the responsibility of the Project Manager (PM), Contractors and the
Environmental Practitioners to ensure compliance with all the environmental specifications in this
document, Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Suppliers as well as the relevant
compliance obligations.
This EMPr should also ensure the sustainable management of the environment whilst replacement
works are undertaken. This EMPr must be viewed as a contract document to which all Eskom
personnel and contractors involved should adhere to.
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply to NTCSA Projects Delivery and Contractors appointed to work on the
National Security Project.
2.1.3 Effective date
N/a
2.2 Normative/Informative References
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the
following paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems
[2] ISO 14001 Environmental Management System
[3] 240-47172520 (TRMSCAAC Rev.6) - The Standard for the Construction of Overhead
Powerlines
[4] 240-180100134 Environmental Requirements for Contractors and /or Suppliers
These documents are indispensable for the application of this document, i.e., documents to be used
together with this document.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Security Project
Revision: 3
Page:
2.2.2 Informative
[5] National Environmental Management Act, 1998 (NEMA) (Act No ), and all
amendments and supplementary listings and/or regulations.
[6] Environment Conservation Act, 1989 (ECA) (No ) and amendments.
[7] National Environmental Management: Waste Act, 2008 (NEMWA, Act ).
[8] National Environmental Management: Biodiversity Act, 2004 (NEM:BA) (Act No. )
and amendments.
[9] National Forest Act, 1998 (NFA) (No ).
[10] National Veld and Forest Fire Act, 1998 (Act No. ).
[11] Conservation of Agricultural Resources Act, 1983 (CARA) (Act No. ) and
amendments.
[12] National Heritage Resources Act, 1999 (Act ).
[13] National Water Act, 1998 (Act ).
[14] The Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1993 (Act No. ).
[15] The National Fencing Act, 1963 (Act No ) as amended by Act .
[16] The National Environmental Management: Protected Areas Act, 2003 (Act No. ) and
it’s Regulations.
[17] The National Environmental Management: Air Quality Act, 2004 (Act ).
[18] South African National Standard (SANS) 10228 – The identification and classification of
dangerous goods.
2.3 Definitions
Definition Explanation
Construction work The erection, maintenance, alteration, renovation, repair, demolition or
dismantling of or addition to a building or any similar structure
The installation, erection, dismantling or maintenance of a fixed plant where
such work includes the risk of a person falling
The construction, maintenance, demolition or dismantling of any bridge, dam,
canal, road, railway, runway, sewer or water reticulation system or any similar
civil engineering structure
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Security Project
Revision: 3
Page:
Definition Explanation
Contractor The Contractor has overall responsibility for ensuring that all work, activities,
and actions linked to the delivery of the contract, are in line with the
Environmental Management Programme and that Method Statements are
implemented as described
Works The works to be executed in terms of the Contract
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
CEO Contractor Environmental Officer
EMPr Environmental Management Programme
HCS Hazardous Chemical Substance
IAPs Interested an Affected Parties
NEMA National Environmental Management Act,1998 (Act No. )
2.5 Roles and Responsibilities
Function roles and responsibilities
Eskom To ensure that the EMPr for the project is compiled and approved.
Environmental To ensure that all conditions stipulated in the EMPr are met.
Practitioner To conduct audit, monitor or provide assurance before, during and post
construction
Eskom Project Ensure that implementation of EMPr is executed as planned.
Manager/ Site Ensure that conditions in this EMPr are fulfilled before the contractor occupies the
Manager site.
Contractor Ensures that all Sub-contractors (if any) working under the Principal Contractor
Environmental abide by the requirements of the EMPr.
Officer (CEO) Be on site throughout the duration of the project and be dedicated to the project.
Ensure all staff are aware of the environmental requirements, conditions, and
constraints with respect to all their activities on site.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Security Project
Revision: 3
Page:
Implementing the environmental conditions, guidelines and requirements as
stipulated within the EMPr and Method Statements
Attend and provide performance status at the project progress and Environmental
site meetings.
Facilitate and undertake corrective actions where non-compliances are registered
within the stipulated timeframes.
Assist the Eskom environmental practitioner in maintaining all the site
documentation.
Prepare site inspection reports and corrective action reports for submission to
Eskom.
Keep a "Site Daily Diary of activities happening on site” to Monitor and ensure that
the receiving environment is suitably safeguarded against the identified potential
impacts, and to ensure that the environmental management requirements are
adequately implemented and adhered to during the execution of the project.
Contractor To provide all necessary supervision during the execution of the project. He/ She
Project Manager/ should be available on site all the time.
Site Manager To appoint a competent Environmental Officer.
To ensure that implementation is conducted in an environmentally acceptable
manner.
To fulfil all obligations as per the agreed contract.
To inform and educate all employees about the environmental risks associated
with the different activities that should be avoided during the construction process
and lessen significant impacts to the environment.
2.6 Process for Monitoring
All documents shall be kept on site and be available for monitoring purposes. Site inspections by an
Environmental Audit Team may require access to this documentation for auditing purposes. The
documentation shall be signed by all parties to ensure that such documents are legal. Regular
monitoring of site works by the CEO is imperative to ensure that all problems encountered are solved
punctually and amicably. When the CEO is not available, the Site Supervisor shall keep abreast of
all works to ensure no problems arise.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Security Project
Revision: 3
Page:
The following documentation shall be kept on site:
2.7 Related/Supporting Documents
This EMPr shall be read in conjunction with the project technical documents/ specifications that
provide the details of the project scope and/or requirements.
(NLEPDS) Electrical Components (excludes civil components)
mentioned in this report.
3. Document Content
3.1 Geographical Site Location and Environmental Conditions
Due to the constant changes in the risk profiles of Eskom assets and installations, the review of
physical security measures is necessary to ensure that current threats are appropriately mitigated,
through the implementation of suitable site-specific protection measures, systems and procedures.
Pembroke substation is situated in the Eastern Cape Province under the jurisdiction of Buffalo City
Metropolitan Municipality. The adjacent land to the project is primarily owned by private landowners
(notably in the eastern and western parts of the study area) and Traditional Authorities. The
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Security Project
Revision: 3
Page:
substation is located north of Ilitha, and it is accessed from the R102 to the east or the N2 from the
immediate north.
Figure 1:Latest Pembroke substation layout on the threat risk assessment.
3.2 Public Involvement/Participation Process
The potential environmental impacts associated with the proposed project are required to be
considered in compliance with the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Regulations of 2014 (As
amended) published in Government Notice R982 to R985 on, in terms of Chapter 5 of the National
Environmental Management Act, 1998 (Act ) (as amended). The above scope of work
was assessed against the Listing Notices of the EIA Regulations 2014 and the following is noted:
permits/agreements e.g., water use licenses or heritage permits.
All the required replacement works will be done directly on the existing substation footprint; therefore,
the project would not trigger the EIA listed activities.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Security Project
Revision: 3
Page:
3.3 Project Specific Scope of Work and Design
Access control building refurbishment
access control building to the control building.
latest Eskom standard requirements.
switches.
Perimeter fence lighting upgrade
drawing.
Inner fence upgrade
anti-tunnelling, installation of fence panels, gates, overhangs, etc.
Installation of access gates
drawing 0.53-2129.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Security Project
Revision: 3
Page:
Non-Lethal fence
240- 78980848,
4. Acceptance
This document has been seen and accepted by:
Name Designation
Mawabo Sinyolo Project Manager
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
Table 1: Project Specific Environmental Controls
This section specifies standard mitigation measures to be followed by the parties responsible for environmental management during
the construction of the project.
Note: An activity may have multiple aspects that might need to be looked at.
No. Activity Aspect Impact Management Mitigation Measure Measurable Frequency Responsible
Objective Targets of Action Party
1. Project Tender Non-compliance to Contingencies for The EMPr must be included as part of the Contract records During tender Project
Contract and Issuing/ legal requirements minimising negative tender documentation thereby making it signed stage Manager/ Buyer/
programme Enquiry and non- impacts anticipated part of the enquiry document to make the Environmental
conformance to to occur during the recommendations and constraints, as set Practitioner
Declaration on other requirements construction/ out in this document, enforceable under
Environmental and conditions set refurbishment the general conditions of contract.
Requirements out in the EMPr. phase.
Pro-forma.
The contractor shall acknowledge or
Ensure complete Declaration on Environmental
Project Manager environmental Requirements Pro-forma before
awareness and commencement of the works.
formalise
environmental A copy of this EMPr must be always During responsibilities and available at the works site. The Contractor construction/ CEO implementation. shall ensure that all the personnel on site, refurbishment
sub-contractors and their teams,
suppliers, etc. are familiar with and
understand the specifications contained in
this EMPr.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
2. Method Compilation of Non-compliance Contingencies All activities which require method Approved Before Contractor
Statements Project to legal for minimising statements may only commence once Method commencement
documents requirements and negative the method statements have been Statements and of activities
non-conformance impacts approved by the PM and Eskom relevant
to other anticipated to Environmental Practitioner. documents. As and when
requirements and occur during Where applicable, the contractor shall required
conditions set out the provide job-specific training on an ad hoc
in the EMPr. construction/ basis when workers are engaged in
refurbishment activities, which require Method
phase. Statements.
It must be ensured that Eskom Policies, Contractor
Guidelines and Standards are consulted Training records
to ensure that Method Statements meet
requirements as set out in those
documents.
3. Site demarcation Allocation/ Legal Contingencies The Substation team (i.e., Activities to take Before Contractor
and development demarcation of contravention, and for minimising Environmental Department or Property place within the commencement
site damage to the negative Management Team) shall be consulted demarcated of construction/
environment impacts before site demarcations and area. refurbishment
anticipated to development, including the camp site. activities on site
occur during All conditions contained in this EMPr
the must be adhered to and considered As and when
construction/ when site demarcation and development required
refurbishment takes place.
phase. No activities will be allowed outside the
demarcated area.
4. Environmental Conducting Lack of Environmental All staff should receive environmental Environmental On CEO
Awareness Environmental understanding by training and awareness/ training. impact because commencement
Training Awareness workforce of the awareness of of construction/ of construction/
Training responsibilities in construction/ refurbishment refurbishment All new staff coming onto site shall
terms of this EMPr refurbishment activities is activities. receive environmental
staff contribute minimised awareness/training.
to minimisation through the
Legal Refresher environmental As and when of the development of contravention, awareness/training shall be available as required occurrence of effective
damage to the and when required.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
environment and environmental All staff shall be made aware of the environmental
private property impact to the conditions and controls linked to the awareness
work area. EMPr. training material
All staff are made aware of their and execution of
individual roles and responsibilities in environmental
awareness achieving compliance with the EMPr.
training for all The Contractor shall erect and maintain
staff. information posters at key locations on
site.
Environmental awareness/training
should include as a minimum the
following:
environmental impacts, actual or
potential, related to their work activities.
implemented when carrying out specific
activities.
response procedures.
working near or within sensitive areas.
procedures.
procedures.
awareness undertaken as part of the
EMPr must be available.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
open and/or unattended fires
to have received environmental
awareness training must be available
presented in appropriate languages that
all staff can understand
5. Site Construction of Damage to the Ensure that A site establishment method statement shall be Impact to the When the Contractor
Establishment a site camp environment by environmental provided by the contractor prior to any onsite activity environment project
unnecessary issues are that includes the layout of the construction camp in during site commences
clearing the taken into the form of a plan showing the location of key establishment is
surface/ ground. consideration infrastructure and services (where applicable), minimised and
in the planning including but not limited to offices, vehicle parking the development
and areas, stores, the workshop, stockpile and lay down footprint are Land pollution/
construction of areas, hazardous materials storage areas (including kept to contamination.
site fuels), the batching plant (if one is located at the demarcated
establishment. construction camp), designated access routes, development
Chemical pollution equipment cleaning areas, ablution facilities, waste area.
caused by vehicle and wastewater management;
oils, grease or Location of construction camps must be carefully
solvents considered and approved by the Substation/ Grid
Team and Tx. Projects Delivery to ensure that the
site does not impact on sensitive areas.
Sites should be located where possible on previously
disturbed areas.
The construction camp shall be fenced where
necessary.
6 Environmental Response to all Land, water Emergency Compile an Emergency Response Plan prior to the All emergency On Contractor/
emergencies types of pollution/ procedures commencement of the proposed project. situations are commencem CEO
environmental contamination. are in place to The Emergency Plan must deal among other things managed in ent
emergencies. enable a rapid with accidents harsh weather conditions, disasters, accordance with
and effective
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
Chemical pollution response to all wildlife interactions, potential spillages and fires in the emergency As and when
caused by vehicle types of line with relevant legislation. procedures. required
oils, grease or environmental All staff shall be made aware of emergency
solvents emergencies. procedures as part of environmental awareness Rapid and
training. effective
The relevant local authority shall be made aware of a response to all
fire as soon as it starts. types of
In the event of emergency necessary mitigation environmental
measures to contain the spill or leak shall be emergencies.
implemented.
7. Hazardous Storage, Chemical, land Prevention of The contractor must provide method statements for No pollution of Daily Site
Chemical handling, use and water pollution of the the “handling & storage of hazardous chemical the environment. Supervisor/
Substances (incl. and disposal of pollution/ environment. substances”, “fire”, and “emergency spills CEO/ SHE
oil) hazardous contamination. procedures”. Represent No litigation due
substances Minimise The substances must be confined to specific and to transgression ative
Damage to the chances of secured areas within the contractor’s site, and in a of pollution
environment. transgression way that does not pose a danger of pollution even control Acts.
of the acts during times of high rainfall. These areas must be
controlling imperviously bunded with adequate containment (at No complaints
pollution. least 1.5 times the volume of the fuel) for potential from Interested spills or leaks.
& Affected
Drip trays (minimum of 10cm deep) must be placed Parties (I &
under all vehicles, including plant and equipment that APs).
stand for more than 24 hours. Vehicles suspected of
leaking must not be left unattended, drip trays must
be utilised. Method
statements The surface area of the drip trays will be dependent
on the vehicle and must be large enough to catch any
hydrocarbons that may leak from the vehicle/plant
while stationery.
All spilled hazardous substances must be contained
in impermeable containers for removal to a licensed
hazardous waste management facility/ site, (this
includes contaminated soils, and drenched spill kit
material).
Safety Data Sheets (SDS) must be prepared for all
hazardous substances on site and supplied by the
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
supplier where relevant. SDS’s must be updated as
required.
Containers must be clearly marked to indicate
contents, quantities and safety requirements.
Materials such as fuel, oil, paint, herbicide and
insecticides must be sealed and stored in bunded
areas or under lock and key, as appropriate, in well-
ventilated areas.
All employees working with HCS must be trained in
the safe use of the substance and according to the
safety data sheet.
No smoking must be allowed within the vicinity of the
hazardous storage areas.
Adequate fire-fighting equipment must be made
available at all hazardous storage area.
An appropriate number of spill kits must be available
and must be in all areas where activities are being
undertaken.
8. Eating Area Management of Incorrect handling Control The Contractor shall, in conjunction with the Eskom No visual sign of Daily Contractor
eating areas and management potential influx Environmental Practitioner or PM designate vermin and flies.
of waste. of vermin and restricted eating areas for eating during normal
flies. working hours. No complaints
Littering of waste. Neat Adequate closed refuse bins must be provided and from I & AP’s.
workplace and cleaned daily.
hygienic Litter (even if originating outside the camp) and
environment. concrete bags etc. must be picked up daily and put
into suitably closed bins.
9. Waste Handling and Inappropriate To avoid, All measures regarding waste management shall be Solid waste Daily Contractor
Management management of storing, handling manage and undertaken using an integrated waste management management is
waste and unsafe disposal mitigate approach. undertaken in
of at a potential Sufficient, covered waste collection bins (scavenger accordance with
unrecognised/ impacts to the and weatherproof) shall be provided. relevant national
unregistered waste environment and provincial A suitably positioned and clearly demarcated waste
facility. caused by the legislation and collection site shall be identified and provided.
incorrect local by-laws.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
storage, The waste collection site shall be maintained in a
handling and clean and orderly fashion.
disposal of Waste shall be segregated into separate bins and
general and clearly marked for each waste type.
hazardous
Staff shall be trained in waste segregation.
solid waste.
Recycling of waste types shall be maximised.
Bins shall be emptied regularly.
General waste shall be disposed of at recognised
and registered waste disposal sites/ recycling
company.
Hazardous waste shall be disposed of at a registered
waste disposal site.
Certificates of disposal for general, hazardous, and
recycled waste shall be maintained.
Under no circumstances shall any waste be disposed
of, burned, or buried on site.
10 Sanitation Management of Risk of diseases An abundant Mobile chemical toilets shall be made available No pollution or Daily Contractor
. ablution facilities and contamination/ supply of onsite if no other ablution facilities are available. disease arises
pollution to the suitably Ablution facilities and or mobile toilets shall be always on-site because
environment. located clean used and no indiscriminate use of the veld for the of sanitation
and well- purposes of ablutions shall be permitted under any facilities or lack
maintained circumstances. thereof.
toilet facilities Ablution facilities shall be located within 100 m of any
are available workplace and shall be numerous enough to
to all staff to accommodate the workforce (minimum requirement
minimise the of 1:15 workers on site).
risk of disease
Where mobile chemical toilets are required, the and impact to
following shall be ensured: the
environment. a) Toilets are located no closer than 100 m to any
watercourse or water body.
b) Toilets are secured to the ground to prevent
them from toppling due to wind or any other cause.
c) No spillage occurs when the toilets are cleaned
or emptied, and the contents are managed in
accordance with the EMPr.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
d) Toilets have an external closing mechanism
and are closed and secured from the outside when
not in use to prevent toilet paper from being blown
out.
e) Toilets are emptied before long weekends and
workers holidays and shall be locked after working
hours.
f) Toilets are serviced regularly, and a copy of the
waste disposal certificates shall be maintained.
11 Dust Management of Generation of dust To reduce dust Take all reasonable measures to minimise the Minimal Daily Contractor
. Management dust emission emissions. emissions generation of dust because of construction. occurrence of
during Removal of vegetation shall be avoided until such dust due the
construction time as soil stripping is required and similarly adherence of
activities. exposed surfaces shall be re-vegetated or stabilised EMPr
as soon as is practically possible. requirements.
Excavation, handling and transport of erodible
materials shall be avoided under high wind conditions
or when a visible dust plume is present.
During high wind conditions, the responsible person
will evaluate the situation and make
recommendations as to whether dust-damping
measures are adequate, or whether working will
cease altogether until the wind speed drops to an
acceptable level.
Where possible, soil stockpiles shall be in sheltered
areas where they are not exposed to the erosive
effects of the wind. Where erosion of stockpiles
becomes a problem, erosion control measures shall
be implemented at the discretion of the responsible
person.
12 Noise Management of Unnecessary high To prevent All construction vehicles must be in a good working Noise Daily Contractor
. Management noise levels noise levels unnecessary order to reduce possible noise pollution. management is
noise to the Noise reduction is essential, and Contractors shall undertaken in
environment endeavour to limit unnecessary noise, especially loud accordance with
by ensuring talking, shouting or whistling, radios, sirens or SANS 10103
that noise from hooters, motor revving, etc. The use of silent and
construction compressors is a specific requirement.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
activity is Noisy activities shall take place only during normal requirements of
mitigated working hours. the EMPr.
The surrounding Eskom management and
landowners must be informed in writing within 24
hours prior to any planned activities that will be No complaints
unusually noisy or any other activities that could from
reasonably have an impact on the adjacent sites. surrounding
These activities could include, but are not limited to, landowners.
blasting, piling, use of pneumatic jackhammers and
compressors.
13 Water Stormwater and Pollution and To avoid, Appropriate pollution control facilities necessary to Wastewater Daily
. Management wastewater contamination of the manage and prevent discharge of water containing polluting management is
management watercourse mitigate matter or visible suspended materials into undertaken in
environment and or potential watercourses or water bodies shall be designed and accordance with
estuary impacts to the implemented. relevant national
environment All watercourses must be protected from direct or and provincial
caused by indirect spills of pollutants such as solid waste, legislation and
wastewater sewage, cement, oils, fuels, chemicals, aggregate local by-laws.
discharge tailings, wash and contaminated water or organic
during material resulting from the Contractor’s activities.
construction. In the event of a spill, prompt action must be taken to
clear the polluted or affected areas.
There must not be any impact on the long-term
morphological dynamics of watercourses or
estuaries.
When working in or near any watercourse or estuary,
the following environmental controls and
consideration must be taken:
a) Water levels during the period of construction.
No altering of the bed, banks, course or
characteristics of a watercourse
b) During the execution of the works, appropriate
measures to prevent pollution and contamination of
the riparian environment must be implemented e.g.,
including ensuring that construction equipment is well
maintained.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
c) Where earthwork is being undertaken in close
proximity to any watercourse, slopes must be
stabilised using suitable materials, i.e., sandbags or
geotextile fabric, to prevent sand and rock from
entering the channel; and
d) Appropriate rehabilitation and re-vegetation
measures for the watercourse banks must be
implemented timeously. In this regard, the banks
should be appropriately and incrementally stabilised
as soon as development allows.
14 Dismantling of Storing and Damage to the Impact to the All old equipment removed during the project must be All assets and When Contractor
. old equipment handling of old environment environment to stored in such a way as to prevent pollution of the scrap material to dismantling
equipment be minimised environment. be disposed of takes place
during the Oil containing equipment must be stored to prevent accordingly. Chemical Pollution/
dismantling, leaking or be stored on drip trays. contamination (i.e.,
storage, and release of oil) All scrap steel must be stacked neatly, and any
disposal of old disused and broken insulators must be stored in
equipment containers.
Improper disposal commissioning
of the equipment . Oil to be drained /decanted shall be contained in such
a way that it does not leak to the ground.
Once material has been scrapped and the contract
has been placed for removal, the disposal Contractor
must ensure that any equipment containing pollution
causing substances is dismantled and transported in
such a way as to prevent spillage and pollution of the
environment.
The Contractor must also be equipped to contain and
clean up any pollution causing spills.
Disposal of unusable material must be at a registered
waste disposal site and a certificate of safe disposal
must be obtained.
Asset disposal team shall be contacted to see if there
are any material that may not need to be disposed
immediately.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
15 Workshop, Management of Damage to the The control Where possible and practical all maintenance of Soil, surface Daily Contractor
. equipment workshop and environment operation, vehicles and equipment must take place in the water and
maintenance storage area maintenance workshop area. groundwater
and storage (If and storage of During servicing of vehicles or equipment, especially contamination Chemical Pollution/
applicable) equipment where emergency repairs are affected outside the are prevented contamination
prevents soil, workshop area, a suitable drip tray must be used to as due to
surface water prevent spills onto the soil. adherence of
and EMPr Leaking equipment must be repaired immediately or
groundwater requirements. be removed from site to facilitate repair.
contamination.
Workshop areas must be monitored for oil and fuel
spills and such spills.
Appropriately sized spill kit kept on site relevant to the
scale of the activity taking place shall be available.
The responsible operator of equipment must have
the required training to make use of the spill kit in
emergency situations.
The workshop area shall have a bunded concrete
slab that is sloped to facilitate runoff into a collection
sump or suitable oil / water separator where
maintenance work on vehicles and equipment can be
performed.
16 Heritage Heritage Destruction of the Limit the In terms of the National Heritage Act, 1999 (Act No. No destruction Daily Contractor
. Resources Resources heritage resources destruction of ), construction personnel must be alert and of or damage to
Management Management the country’s must inform the local authorities should they come known
(If applicable) heritage across any findings of heritage resources within 24 archaeological
resources. hours if the area has been removed. sites.
Should any archaeological artefacts be exposed
The during construction activities, work on the area where
preservation the artefacts were found shall cease immediately and
and the South African Heritage Resources Agency shall
appropriate be notified within 24 hours.
management Under no circumstances shall archaeological
of new artefacts be removed, destroyed, or interfered.
archaeological Any archaeological sites exposed during
finds should construction activities must not be disturbed prior to
these be authorisation by the South African Heritage
discovered
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
during Resources Agency or the appropriate provincial
construction. heritage resource agency.
than 60 years shall be removed or demolished
without the appropriate license from SAHRA.
Identify, demarcate and prevent impact to all
known sensitive heritage features on site.
17 Access Roads Management and Damage to the Minimise loss
. maintenance of environment of topsoil and Substation and/ or servitude must be utilised as far access roads
access roads through the enhancement as possible. after completion
unplanned and of erosion.
unrestricted refurbishment
movement of works. Minimise and fines issued, the affected areas must be
vehicles on site fauna and flora immediately rehabilitated.
displacement No driving off from the marked roads is permitted No loss of
by destruction and designated parking areas must be identified topsoil due to
of natural and demarcated with applicable signage. runoff water on
habitats. access roads. Maximum use of both existing servitudes and
existing roads must be made to minimize further
disturbance through the development of new roads.
18 Fauna/Animal Fauna/Animal Disturbance to Minimise Focus on animals such as snakes and other reptiles No measurable Daily Contractor
. Management Management fauna disturbance to that often generate fear by telling the labour force or visible signs
animals. how to move safely away and to whom they report of habitat
the sighting of such animals. destruction.
Minimise The labour force should also be informed where
interruption of snakes most often hide so that they can be vigilant
breeding when lifting stones etc.
patterns of Employees must be trained on how to deal with
birds. fauna species as intentional killing will not be
tolerated as well as not to disturb wildlife within the
working area precinct. Minimise
destruction of
habitat,
19 Flora/ Maintenance and Damage to Minimal Protected or endangered species may occur on or The footprint As and when Contractor
Vegetation management of protected or disturbance to near the development site. Special care should be has not required.
vegetation endangered species vegetation taken not to damage such species. exceeded the
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
Management where such The contractor must rehabilitate the construction agreed
(if applicable) vegetation camp and any other disturbed areas once boundaries. On
does not construction/ refurbishment activities have completion
interfere with terminated. Compacted areas will be ripped and All damaged of the project
construction/ mulched to ensure recovery of the natural areas construction
refurbishment vegetation cover. successfully activities.
in terms of Once construction/ refurbishment is complete, rehabilitated.
approvals from rehabilitation of un-built areas must be undertaken
the relevant to restore the aesthetic & ecological value of the
authority. area.
Active re-vegetation must take place with
indigenous vegetation and as prescribed by the
client and/or property owner.
20 Fire Management of Spread of To minimise
. Management fires uncontrolled/ the risk of fire could be regarded as insignificant. measures are the
unattended fires during
construction. unattended fires. accordance with refurbishmen
the National t phase
Veld and Forest circumstances.
Fire Act, 101 of
Emergency (FPA) and emergency services must be
Preparedness communicated in environmental awareness training
and Response and displayed at a central location on site.
Plan.
21 Installation of Storage, Improper Impact to the Management of dust shall be conducted in Impact to the Daily Contractor
. Equipment installation, and installation, handling environment to be accordance with Dust management section. environment is
handling of and storage minimised during Management of equipment used for installation minimised
equipment the installation of shall be conducted in accordance Workshop through
equipment. equipment maintenance and storage section. adherence to
EMPr Management hazardous substances and any
requirements. associated spills shall be conducted in accordance
with Hazardous substances section.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
22 Rehabilitation Rehabilitation of Failure to Areas disturbed All areas disturbed by construction/ refurbishment Landscaping On Contractor
. the construction rehabilitate during activities shall be subject to landscaping and and completion
site disturbed areas. construction/ rehabilitation. rehabilitation of
refurbishment are Where new access roads have crossed are construction/
returned to a state undertaken in refurbishmen Improper/ cultivated farmlands, that lands must be
that approximates accordance t inadequate rehabilitated by ripping.
the state which with the
rehabilitation. Indigenous species must be used for with species they were before approved
and/grasses to where it compliments or During disruption. rehabilitation
Incorrect use of approximates the original condition. plan/ rehabilitation phase
rehabilitation Where required, re-vegetation including hydro- specification.
techniques. seeding can be enhanced using a vegetation seed
mixture as described below. A mixture of seed can
Areas be used provided the mixture is carefully selected
disturbed to ensure the following:
during the
a) Annual and perennial plants are chosen; development
b) Pioneer species are included; phase are
c) Species chosen must be indigenous to the area returned to a
with the seeds used coming from the area; state that
d) Root systems must have a binding effect on the approximates
soil; the original
condition. e) The final product must not cause an ecological
imbalance in the area.
23 Prevention of Health and Spread of diseases Prevent litigation The Contractor shall take all the necessary No complaints Daily Eskom and
Disease wellness of the due to infestation precautions against the spreading of disease, from Contractor
workforce of livestock/ especially under livestock/ game. Stakeholders/ As and when
game. The workforce shall also be sensitised to the IAP. required
effects of sexually transmitted diseases, especially
Hiv aids.
The Contractor must ensure that information
posters on AIDS are displayed in the Contractor
Camp area.
Information and education relating to sexually
transmitted diseases to be made available to both
construction workers and local community, where
applicable.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Management Programme for National Security Project Unique Identifier: 240-131566734
Revision: 3
Page:
Medical support must be made available. Provide
access to Voluntary HIV Testing and Counselling
Services.
24 Social Servitudes Access to the Ensure that By conducting risk assessments prior to the start No Legal Duration of Project
interaction through crop fields substation may be identified access of projects relates to access. Contravention the project Manager /
/ farm areas affected should road has minimal To obtain written consent from property owner, s / lawsuits / Contractor
there be any dust generation. stipulating any specific requirements from the claims
incidents like dust property owner.
generation, All farm gates Avoid interaction with landowners’ activities.
disturbances of shall be kept and No fires to be made anywhere. use of existing livestock. closed as they are access road.
found.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Eskom is committed to creating and sustaining a Zero Harm culture and standard of safety, health,
the environment, and quality (SHEQ). Zero Harm means ensuring that the Eskom operational
activities do not inflict harm on Eskom’s assets, its employees, contractors, and members of the
public affected by its operations, and the environment in terms of compliance obligations. All
procurement has some level of impact on the environment that needs to be minimised to ensure
sustainable procurement practices. Most environmental impacts occur before goods, works or
services are procured, for example, resource extraction, design development, manufacturing,
transportation and storage, etc. Environment is an integral part of Eskom sustainable procurement
strategy.
This standard sets the minimum criteria for assessing supplier environmental conformity, based on
standards, procedures, policies, and compliance obligations with which Transmission suppliers need
to comply. It specifies a pre-determined set of environmental criteria to evaluate and monitor
potential and contracted Transmission suppliers. The objective is to ensure a common
understanding and consistent implementation of environmental requirements for procurement of
assets, goods, and services.
2. Supporting Clauses
2.1 Scope
The standard outlines the key responsibilities of Procurement Practitioner, Contractor/Supplier,
Clients, Environmental Practitioner and Contract or Project managers (contract custodians). It also
provides the minimum environmental requirements to be addressed during:
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134
Suppliers
Revision: 1
Page:
a) Design phase.
b) Tender enquiry, evaluation, and contract award.
c) Supplier registration on the Transmission vendor data base.
d) Site access /site mobilization.
e) Monitoring of performance during the contract execution period.
f) Contract completion, close out, and post-contract review and
g) Instances and criteria where works or services under a contract can be stopped, suspended or
termination of contracts.
2.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this standard is to ensure that Suppliers, Contractors, and Sub-Contractors
contracted to Transmission have established an Environmental Management System for goods,
works, or services they provide.
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Transmission including Suppliers, Service providers,
Contractors, and Sub-Contractors.
2.1.3 Effective date
This standard shall be effective from the date of the signature.
2.2 Normative/Informative References
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the
following paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] 32-1034 Eskom Procurement and Supply Chain Management Procedure.
[2] 32-196 Eskom Disciplinary Code Standard.
[3] Project Specific Environmental Management Programmes/Environmental Management Plan.
[4] Project Specific Permits and Licenses (Construction stage).
[5] 240-43921804 Environmental Tender Evaluation Template.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134
Suppliers
Revision: 1
Page:
[6] 240-151560800 Environmental Evaluation-Commencement of work.
[7] 240-180100148 Pre-construction Access Agreement Form.
[8] 240-110600836 Contractor Environmental Requirements Proforma.
2.2.2 Informative
[9] National Environmental Management Act No
[10] ISO 14001: Environmental Management Systems
[11] National Environmental Management: Waste Act (Act )
[12] Environmental Impact Assessment Regulation (2014)
[13] National Water Act (Act )
[14] National Environmental Management: Air Quality Act (Act )
[15] National Environmental Management: Biodiversity Act (Act )
[16] National Environmental Management: Protected Areas Act (Act )
[17] National Heritage Resources Act (Act )
[18] National Veld and Forest Fire Act (Act )
[19] 240-82410629 Environmental Management Strategy
[20] 240-81146134 Implementing SHEQ as Objective Criteria Position Paper
2.3 Definitions
Definition Explanation
Environmental Any change to the environment, whether adverse or beneficial, wholly, or
Impact partially resulting from an organisation’s environmental aspects.
Environmental Authorisation obtained from a competent authority responsible for
Authorisation authorising listed activities in terms of the National Environmental
Management Act No .
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134
Suppliers
Revision: 1
Page:
Environmental It is a programme/plan of action for achieving organisational objectives
Management relating to the mitigation of environmental impacts of its activities, products,
Programme and services.
Environmental A programme for achieving organisational objectives and targets relating to
Management Plan mitigation of the environmental impacts of an organisation’s activities,
products, and services.
Project Means an activity or a group of activities that has a defined start and end
date, a defined scope, and as defined sum of money allocated to complete
the activities.
Project Life Cycle The project life cycle is a step-by-step framework of best practices used to
manage a project from its beginning to its end. It provides Project Managers
a structured way to create, execute, and finish a project.
Environmental file Means a permanent record containing information about the Environmental
management system during construction and all information relating to the
post-construction phase after the handover to the client, so that the client
can maintain the works in a healthy and safe way.
Method Statement Means a written document detailing the key environmental activities to
reduce the hazards identified in any risk assessment. In the case of internal
work, it includes procedures, safe work procedures, and work standards.
Environmental The measurable results of an organization's management of its
Performance environmental aspects.
Organisation A company, corporation, firm, enterprise, authority or institution, or part or
combination thereof, whether incorporated or not, public or private, that has
its own functions and administration.
Note: For organisations with more than one operating unit, a single
operating unit may be defined
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134
Suppliers
Revision: 1
Page:
Environmental authorisation obtained from a competent authority responsible for
Authorisation authorising listed activities in terms of the National Environmental
Management Act, 1998 (Act No.) Environmental Impact
Assessment Regulations (2014).
Contractor/Supplier Organisation or person that provides a product or service.
Organisation Example: Producers, distributor, retailer or vendor of a product, or provider
of a service or information.
Note 1: A supplier can be internal or external to the organisation.
Note 2: In a contractual situation, a supplier is sometimes called
“contractor”.
Document Controlled disclosure to external parties (either enforced by law or
Controlled discretionary).
Disclosure
Environmental Is a system which integrates policy, procedures, and processes for training
Management of personnel, monitoring, summarizing, and reporting of specialized
System environmental performance information to internal and external
stakeholders of an organisation.
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
EA Environmental Authorisation
ECO Environmental Control Officer
EMPr Environmental Management Programme
EMP Environmental Management Plan
EMS Environmental Management System
ISO International Organisation for Standardization
SDS Safety Data Sheet
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134
Suppliers
Revision: 1
Page:
Abbreviation Explanation
TDP Transmission Projects Delivery
SHE Safety Health and Environmental
SHEQ Safety Health Environment and Quality
P&SCM Procurement and Supply Chain Management
SHERQS Safety Health Environment Risk Quality & Security
2.5 Roles and Responsibilities
Procurement Practitioner shall:
Environmental Practitioners for the preparation of the relevant environmental requirements
for the enquiry.
the appropriate environmental practitioners prior to the release of tender documents.
input into the relevant meetings or forums, processes, and reports that lead to the awarding
of the contract (e.g., supplier evaluation, squad check meetings, contracting strategies,
negotiations, clarification meetings, tender evaluations and evaluation report compilations,
contract award, briefing meetings).
Environmental Practitioner to ensure that all applicable rules and requirements are
referenced in this form for Tenderers to acknowledge and comply with and ensure that its
completed and included in their tender.
Business Unit Manager shall be responsible for:
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134
Suppliers
Revision: 1
Page:
The Environmental Practitioner shall:
lead to the awarding of the contract.
requirements together with members of the cross functional team for each tender/enquiry
and shall ensure that these requirements are handed over to commercial representative
for inclusion in the tender/enquiry.
work and environmental risk assessment conducted for the contract.
are submitted with the tender returnables.
execution and post-contract review and assessment and must also ensure that all reports
are provided to contracts management.
interventions taken and provide the report to the contract custodian and submit to
contracts management.
technical evaluation criteria for the contract.
The Contract Custodian (Contract Executor) shall:
environmental aspects and other relevant procedures and documents are developed in
conjunction with the Environmental Practitioner and provided with the tender package.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134
Suppliers
Revision: 1
Page:
environmental obligations during contract execution, environmental intervention or
standoff, post contract review, supplier reconsideration are adequately addressed,
recorded, and submitted to contracts management for record and future references.
impractical to comply with and suggested recommendations shall be submitted in writing
to contract management where it is impractical to implement and /or comply with
environmental requirements as set out in this standard.
results of such assessment are recorded, documented, and kept.
of the Bills of Quantities in the contract.
Supplier /Service Provider:
documentation for evaluation.
Practitioners during the tender clarification meeting to fully comply with the requirements
of this standard. Such support, guidance and advise shall be levelled in writing with the
Eskom Representative whose details are in the tender document. Direct communication
between tenderers and Environmental Practitioners shall not be allowed. .
Transmission environmental requirements always when contracted with Transmission
Business Units.
related to the works, services or goods tendered for.
site requirements, and it is the responsibility of the Supplier to ensure that these
requirements are met before work can commence.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by
third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134
Suppliers
Revision: 1
Page:
2.6 Process for Monitoring
Compliance to this standard will be monitored during tender evaluations, periodic inspections and
audits on the works, goods or services rendered. The procedure / process shall include documenting
information to monitor performance, applicable operational controls (method statements) and
conformity with the Transmission EMPr/EMP and/or the EA.
environmental management procedures, and/or any inspection authority acting on
supplier’s behalf, to make available all information at its disposal certificates for review
by Transmission or its appointed inspection agency.
shall be made available to Transmission business units. These shall not be limited to:
o A procedure for Monitoring, Measurement, Analysis and Evaluation of
Provisions ............................................................................................................................................. 54
Transmission must provide budgets for the implementation of the waste management plan. ................ 54
7. Monitoring and review of the ind wmp ......................................................
The effective management of environmental incidents is required to achieve Eskom’s value of Zero
Harm (the prevention of harm to people and the environment brought about through visible and felt
leadership, including the implementation of effective controls and practices) and Eskom’s Safety,
Health, Environment and Quality (SHEQ) Policy (32-727) principles that environmental incidents
are preventable. This procedure sets out the way in which Eskom approaches environmental
incident management.
The aims and objectives of incident management are as follows:
a) Reduce risk and prevent any recurrence of incidents.
b) Ensure that incidents are managed timeously and effectively.
c) Ensure that incidents are classified and recorded accurately.
d) Ensure prompt and appropriate investigation.
e) Share incident information for continual improvement.
f) Report to external and internal stakeholders, as appropriate.
g) Promote the analysis of trends, and review practices accordingly.
Incident management is not a mechanism for assigning blame or monitoring staff performance but
rather a way of identifying root causes of incidents and addressing opportunities for incident
prevention and improvement in practices to reduce environmental impacts, risks, and achieve our
environmental compliance obligations.
2. Supporting clauses
2.1 Scope
2.1.1 Purpose
This document describes the high-level intention and requirements for the effective management of
environmental incidents that occur while conducting Eskom’s business that result in an unplanned
event that has caused or that could, or does, result in a negative environmental impact. This
procedure excludes emergency situations as specified in Section 30A of the National
Environmental Management Act (NEMA). However, guidance in terms of identifying an emergency
situation and the reporting thereof is provided in Appendix D. In addition to the requirements set
out in this document, all incidents must be assessed and reported according to the requirements of
or environmental approvals/permits/licences and applicable legislation such as the NEMA, the
National Water Act (NWA), and the Public Finance Management Act (PFMA), as this is not
covered as a requirement within the scope of this document.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
2.1.2 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd divisions, subsidiaries, and
entities in which Eskom has a controlling interest or influence.
2.1.3 Effective date
This revision of the document is applicable from 1 April 2022.
2.2 Normative/Informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the
following paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] 32-727: Eskom, Safety, Health, Environment, and Quality Policy
[2] 240-51122806: Process Control Manual (PCM) for Incident Management
[3] 240-81320273: Process Control Manual (PCM) for Perform Incident Investigation
[4] National Water Act
[5] National Environmental Management Act
[6] National Environmental Management: Air Quality Act
[7] Eskom Environmental Reporting Procedure 32-249
[8] Environmental Incident Classification Committee Terms of Reference
2.2.2 Informative
[9] ISO 14001 Environmental Management System Standard – requirements with guidance for
use
[10] 32-123: Eskom Emergency Planning Procedure
[11] 32-256: Emergency Response Procedure – Communications
[12] 240-131863738: Eskom Emergency Response Procedure
[13] 240-52599304: Process Control Manual (PCM) for Environmental Management
[14] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems
[15] National Environmental Management: Biodiversity Act
[16] National Forests Act
[17] National Environmental Management: Waste Act
[18] Heritage Resources Act
The list of legislation is not exhaustive and/or not limited to those listed above.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
2.3 Definitions
2.3.1 Ash spillage: The spillage of ash (residue remaining from the burning of coal) or water-
containing ash, whether it is in its dry form or in the form of a slurry, from any ashing activity
on site that is released into the environment (including land or water, but excluding
atmospheric and fugitive emission), which has caused or could or does result in an
environmental impact.
2.3.2 Breach: The non-compliance with requirements of environmental legislation (including
provincial legislation and district/municipal bylaws), authorisations, permits, and licences.
Note: The total number of breaches reported includes environmental legal contravention
incidents (as defined in this document) and administrative non-compliances (as established
through reviews or audits, etc.).
2.3.3 Classification: A process of determining, through applying a set of criteria, whether the
incident is an environmental legal contravention incident, an environmental legal
contravention incident as a result of a significant failure of business systems (FBS), or an
environmental event.
2.3.4 Corrective actions: Actions identified to correct and/or prevent the reoccurrence of an
incident.
2.3.5 Environment: Surroundings in which an organisation operates, including air, water, land,
natural resources, flora, fauna, humans, and their interrelationships (ISO 14001). Note:
Occupational health and safety incidents are managed through the Occupational Health and
Safety Incident Management Procedure (32-95).
2.3.6 Environmental incident: An unplanned event or occurrence that has caused, that could or
does result in a negative environmental impact.
2.3.6.1 Environmental event: All incidents that are not classified as an environmental legal
contravention incident and/or an environmental legal contravention incident as a result of a
significant failure of business systems (FBS) when the classification criteria are applied.
2.3.6.2 Environmental legal contravention incident: An incident where a provision of
environmental legislation (national, provincial, or local) and/or a condition of an
environmental approval (for example, environmental authorisation, water use licence,
waste licence, licence in terms of the National Forests Act) or any other legal document
issued in terms of environmental legislation is contravened. (An environmental legal
contravention incident is considered a breach in terms of compliance reporting).
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Note: Environmental legislation refers to legislation or legal requirements that has/have, or
potentially has/have, an impact on activities interacting with the physical environment as
defined in NEMA, including, but not limited to, events that result in either air pollution,
sterilising the soil, or destroying rare, endangered, or protected fauna or flora (as set out in
the NEMA: Biodiversity Act or provincial environmental ordinances) or result in making any
water resource unfit for its original purpose, such as domestic, agricultural, or industrial use,
or reduce the water quality to such a state that human intervention is required to restore it to
its original quality.
2.3.6.3 Environmental legal contravention incident as a result of a significant failure of
business systems (FBS): Specific cases of environmental legal contravention incidents
that are considered to be of very high significance in terms of its impact on the
environment and/or Eskom in that they have a material business impact and illustrate a
significant failure of business systems. In the light of the above principles, they are
identified in terms of the criteria below. If any one of the criteria specified in Appendix C or
the principle defined above is relevant to a specific contravention of environmental
legislation, then that environmental legal contravention incident is a potential
“environmental legal contravention incident as a result of FBS” (previously OHD).
2.3.7 Environmental impact: Change to the environment, whether adverse or beneficial, wholly
or partially resulting from an organisation’s environmental aspects (ISO 14001).
2.3.8 Hydrocarbon spill: The release of liquid petroleum hydrocarbon (oil, diesel, jet fuel, etc.)
spillage into the environment (includes soil and water), which has caused, which could or
does result in environmental damage and/or pollution, and/or degradation.
2.3.9 Incident: An unplanned happening or occurrence – (a): an occurrence of an action or
situation that is a separate unit of experience. (b): an accompanying minor occurrence or
condition: (c) an action likely to lead to grave consequences (harm to environment, people,
property, or processes).
2.3.10 NEMA Section 30 incidents: An unexpected, sudden and uncontrolled release of a
hazardous substance, including from a major emission, fire or explosion, that causes, has
caused or may cause significant harm to the environment, human life or property.
2.3.11 NWA Section 20 incident: Includes any incident or accident in which a substance:
a) pollutes, or has the potential to pollute, a water resource; or
b) has, or is likely to have, a detrimental effect on a water resource.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
2.3.12 Repeat Environmental incident: Any environmental incident that occurred within 12
months of the previous environmental incident, occurred within the same OU/BU, is related
to the same legislation and/or licence, has the same causes and the corrective and
preventive actions identified but not implemented or that were implemented, but were not
effective and failed. Note: This definition must be applied in conjunction with the definition of
a FBS and the duty of care principle for repeat environmental legal contravention incidents.
(Appendix a provides a guidance).
2.3.13 Wildlife: Refers to birds, game, non-domesticated animals, vegetation, and marine and
freshwater species, with special focus on protected species.
Note 1: This definition is only applicable to the incident management procedure to enable
practitioners to categorise biodiversity incidents into wildlife or vegetation types. Domestic animal
incidents and animal encounters/interactions that do not meet the definition of an environmental
incident such as snake encounters must be dealt with either through the OU/BU Environmental
Management System (EMS) or dealt with as safety or property damage incidents and will not be
covered in this procedure. However, killing a snake, killing a domestic or non-domesticated animal
becomes an environmental incident.
2.3.13.1 Non-domesticated animals: any animal, reptile, or fowl which is not naturally tame or
gentle, but is of a wild nature or disposition, and which, because of its size, vicious nature,
or other characteristics would constitute a danger to human life (encountered at minimum,
when falling into construction foundations, stepping on surveying pegs, stuck in between
the tower steel members).
2.3.13.2 Domestic animals: one that is sufficiently tame to live with a family, such as a dog or cat, or
one that can be used to contribute to a family's support, such as a cow, chicken, or horse. When
something is domesticated, it is converted to domestic use, as in the case of a wild animal that is
tamed.
2.3.13.3 Encounter: An encounter is seen when one is unexpectedly faced with or experience
(something hostile or difficult). which puts a threat to human health – e.g., snake, robbers,
bees, dangerous animals, accident, an incident.
2.3.13.4 Interaction: An interaction is when both/involved parties play a role to have an effect on
each other – be involved directly both negatively or positively.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
AEL atmospheric emission licence
CIR central incident register
Corporate EM Corporate Environmental Management Business Unit
DFFE Department of Forestry, Fisheries and the Environment
EICC Environmental Incident Classification Committee
EMS Environmental Management System
ESC Environmental Steering Committee
Eskom Eskom Holdings SOC Limited
EWT Endangered Wildlife Trust
FBS A legal contravention incident as a result of significant failure of business systems
(previously named OHD)
INO initial notification of occurrence
LC environmental legal contravention incident
NEMA National Environmental Management Act
NEM:BA National Environmental Management: Biodiversity Act
NEM:PAA National Environmental Management: Protected Areas Act
NEM:AQA National Environmental Management: Air Quality Act
NWA National Water Act
OU/BU operating unit/business unit
PCM process control manual
SAP Systems, Applications, and Products in Data Processing
SAP EH&S SAP Environmental Health and Safety (IT system)
SHEQ Safety, Health, Environment and Quality
S Section of applicable legislation
SOC state-owned company
2.5 Roles and responsibilities
Eskom divisions and its subsidiaries shall take all reasonably practicable steps to prevent all
incidents that could or do result in an environmental impact.
The responsible managers (asset owners and environmental licence holders) shall be responsible
for implementing, communicating, and monitoring the implementation of this procedure. The
responsible manager must ensure that consequences of non-compliance to this procedure are
communicated to all staff and that staff understands the environmental duty of care.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
2.6 Process for monitoring
Compliance with the requirements of this procedure shall be audited or monitored according to the
audit/review process. The operating unit/business unit (OU/BU) is responsible for its own
monitoring known as level one assurance reviews and/or self-assessments. All other assurance
providers will monitor compliance with this procedure according to agreed assurance plans.
2.7 Related/Supporting documents
For the following types of incidents, refer to the following documents for additional process
clarification.
Environmental Supporting document
incident type
All incident types Environmental Incident Management Procedure – 240-133087117.
Ash spills Position Paper on Ash Spillages – Document Number ENV16 – L009.
AEL NEMA S30 1. AEL incidents: Initial report in terms of NEMA Section 30 – Document
Number 240-7667761.
2. Atmospheric Emission Licence Practice Note – ENV20-R103 Rev 3.
(Including Emissions Monitoring and Reporting Instruction Note).
NEMA Section 30 1. NEMA Section 30 (Control of Incidents) Report Template – can be
incidents obtained from the DFFE website
https://www.environment.gov.za/documents/forms#legal_authorisations
(search emergency incident report).
2. DFFE guidelines on the administration of incidents (as described in
Section 30 of the National Environmental Management Act )
Supported by the decision note and/or position paper on incident
management requirements – ENV19 – L164.
Wildlife incidents Wildlife Interaction and Management Standard 32-829.
Protected tree 1. Emergency tree cutting: Government Gazette No. 773 Issued by the
cutting Department of Water Affairs – 24 August 2007. Exemptions in terms of
Sections 7(1) and 15(1) of the National Forests Act, 1998 (Act ), as amended.
2. Briefing Report: Guidelines for protected tree cutting applications – dated
12 April 2013.
Hydrocarbon spills Spill Assessment Table – Document Number 240-47176039.
Environmental 1. Environmental Incident Initial Notification Report – 240-161144504
legal contravention
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Environmental Supporting document
incident type
– incidents (LC) 2. EICC Environmental Legal Contravention Incident Closure Certificate –
Document Number 240-76507067.
3. Decision Record for the Eskom Environmental Incident Classification
Committee (EICC): Ownership and accountability of environmental
incidents in areas of shared responsibilities between Eskom and Eskom-
owned entities or contractors dated 11 January 2016.
4. Environmental Incident Classification Committee TOR – 240-67689003.
3. Environmental Incident Management Process
The following steps describe the process of environmental incident management and are
described in detail in the remainder of the document:
1. Incident identification.
2. Initiation and execution of emergency response.
3. Notification and reporting to relevant stakeholders.
4. Incident prioritisation.
5. Classification and recording of incidents.
6. Incident investigation.
7. Management of corrective actions – implementation and monitoring of incident corrective
actions.
8. Incident close-out.
9. Incident communication – occurs throughout the incident management process.
3.1 Incident identification
There are two ways of identifying or recognising an environmental incident, namely, direct and
indirect observation.
Direct observation includes seeing the incident happening or being involved in the incident.
Indirect observation includes learning of the incident through, for example, complaints,
feedback, or information provided by internal stakeholders (for example, Eskom employees
or contractor employees) or external stakeholders (for example, authorities, members of the
public, landowners, NGO’s, etc.). Incidents are also identified indirectly through site
inspections, audits, reviews, monitoring reports, a compliance notice, a directive, a fine
(including a Section 24(g)), and/or prosecution from the authority.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
3.2 Initiation and execution of emergency response
a) Initiation and execution of emergency response include, but is not limited to, the following:
i. Rescue operations.
ii. Ensuring that the scene is safe during and after the incident.
iii. Providing emergency care where necessary and/or applicable.
iv. Initiating environmental emergency controls and responses in terms of the site emergency
preparedness plan/procedure. Implementing reasonable measures to contain the incident
and/or prevent pollution, environmental degradation and/or loss of species from occurring,
continuing or recurring.
3.3 Notification and reporting
All environmental incidents must be reported within 24 hours of the incident occurring or becoming
aware of the incident, internally to all relevant stakeholders and externally to relevant interested
parties as identified in the site EMS. Incident notification may initially include email or telephonic
communication but must be followed in writing within 24 hours by the Environmental Incident Initial
Notification Report or the documented OU/BU notification template. The readily available
information must be used for the initial notification and reporting. A level 1 Environmental Incident
Initial Notification Report Template (240-161144504) has been developed and available for
reporting incidents within Eskom.
An alarm report (also known as a formal Initial Notification Report) in terms of NEMA Section 30
control of incidents (referred to as NEMA S30 incidents from hereon in the document) and an initial
notification in terms of NWA Section 20 control of emergency incidents (referred to as NWS S20 in
the document) must be submitted to the relevant authority within 24 hours or as soon as
reasonably practicable after knowledge of the incident, as specified in Appendix D.
As may be stipulated in the condition of a licence/authorisation and/or legislation (for example,
NEMA S30 and NWA S20), such potential environmental legal contravention – incidents (LCs)
must be reported to the relevant authorities within 24 hours and interested and affected parties.
a) Internal stakeholders
Supervisor and/or responsible manager.
Environmental Department or SHEQ Department.
Emergency Control Department if required.
Respective divisional or subsidiary executive management for potential legal
contravention.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Divisional or subsidiary Environmental Management Department to be notified of
potential legal contravention incidents and/or NEMA S30 incidents or NWA S20
incidents. This includes the Risk and Sustainability Corporate Environmental
Management Department (RS:EM) as required.
All AEL emission exceedance incident notifications and investigation reports must be
copied to the divisional or subsidiary Environmental Department when notifying the
authorities. Reference Document: Initial Report in Terms of NEMA S30 – Document
Number 240-7667761.
b) External stakeholders or interested parties
Relevant government department.
Local and district municipality.
Interested parties as identified in terms of the site EMS, such as neighbouring farmers,
communities, Eskom lenders, strategic partners, etc., if potentially or perceived to
be affected by the incident.
3.4 Capture initial notification
a) Initial reports are reports that are submitted by any individual who is reporting an incident to
the relevant OU/BU Environmental Department. These can be provided using the
Environmental Incident Notification Report (reference number 240-161144504) or the
OU/BU documented method for the internal flash report, including the SAP EH&S Flash
Report.
b) Initial reports outline the known facts of an incident (that is, date, time, place, what
happened, immediate actions taken, photographic evidence, and preliminary findings).
c) Eskom’s environmental practitioner shall, where reasonably practicable, be responsible for
initially assessing the environmental damage arising out of the incident.
d) Wildlife incidents on the Central Incident Register (CIR) System of the wildlife strategic
partner, and provide an incident number as a reference to the relevant individual or OU/BU
reporting the incident.
3.5 Incident prioritisation
3.5.1 Consequence and priority rating
Environmental incidents must be prioritised to determine the potential consequences and actions
required to mitigate the incident timeously. The consequence of an incident must be checked
against Table 3.5.1, and the incident prioritised using the allocated priority ratings within the table.
The wildlife strategic partner will use their incident investigation decision tool to determine and
prioritise wildlife incidents for further detailed investigation or monitoring for recurrence.
NB: Consequence referred to below related to the environmental consequence of the incident, and
thus this is required to be captured on SAP EH&S.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Table 3.5.1 Consequence and priority rating table
Consequence Low/ Minor Moderate Major Critical
categories Minimum
Consequences Little or no Minor Incident could/does Incident could/does Incident has a
ecological ecological result in a moderate result in a major recognised
effect and effect. uncontained or uncontained or national or
no Ecological sustained sustained international
measurable damage environmental environmental environmental
impact on can be release, impacting release, impacting impact.
human remedied the local the regional Widespread or
health. within environment only. environment only. permanent local
three Ecological damage ecological
Ecological damage
months. can be remedied in damage.
can be remedied in
Minor less than six Remediation
less than one year.
hazard to months. Health would take longer
Health hazard to
humans in hazard to humans than one year.
humans in the
the in the immediate Could result in a
immediate vicinity
immediate vicinity, but not major public
resulting in critical or
vicinity. resulting in critical health hazard.
fatal injury/illness.
or fatal Magnitude is
injury/illness. unknown.
Environmental
Low Moderate High Extreme
priority rating
Note: If the incident is considered a potential LC or FBS, as defined in this document, the incident
must automatically be prioritised as high and extreme, respectively, regardless of the actual
consequence.
3.5.2 Action and responsibility requirements
All environmental incidents must be reported within 24 hours of the incident occurring or as soon
as becoming aware of the incident as specified in legislation and/or conditions of applicable
licences/authorisations. The initial notification process must be followed where a flash report or
respective Environmental Incident Notification Reports (OU/BU-specific or 240-161144504) is sent
to internal and external stakeholders and interested parties via email. Documented proof of the
notification must be available on the incident management system. The responsible manager must
ensure that the initial notification is communicated according to the timeframes (24 hours) specified
in this document.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Table 3.5.2 Action and responsibility table
Environmental Low Moderate High Extreme
priority rating
Levels of Middle OU/BU management. Those Inform those
management to manager and OU/BU specified specified under high
be informed environmental environmental under and the senior
practitioner. manager/ moderate plus environmental
practitioner. the divisional manager and
EICC divisional/
representative subsidiary group
and R&S executive.
Embu.
Classification Initial classification and recording of all incidents must be done on SAP EH&S
and recording within 48 hours. Unknown classification must be indicated as an event on the
requirements system until the status has been determined. Any change in classification must
be done immediately when new information is available. Confirm classification
during the investigation process.
Initiate Initiate Initiate investigation
investigation Initiate investigation investigation process within
Investigation process within process within seven process within 24 hours. Complete
requirements seven working working days. 48 hours. investigation within
Investigations days. Complete Complete Complete 45 calendar days.
must be investigation investigation within investigation
completed as within 30 30 calendar days. within 45
specified within calendar days. calendar days.
legislation,
licences and Investigation team shall be determined Investigation team and chairperson
using this table. by OU/BU in consultation with the shall be determined by OU/BU, in
OU/BU environmental practitioner. consultation with the divisional EICC Legislated
representative, where needed, timeframes are
and/or Corporate EMBU.14 calendar days
from the date of
A basic An investigation that A full detailed investigation to the incident.
investigation determines the establish the causes, including root
that determines apparent cause causes and/or organisational
E for investigation of the incident and organisational appropriate preventive and
cause guidance (assessment). issues (evaluation). corrective actions (analysis).
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Notify the Environmental Department Notify the Environmental
and line management in writing Department, line management,
immediately or no later than 24 hours. and/or EICC representative for LCs
in writing immediately or no later
than 24 hours.
Communicate the SAP EH&S Flash Report to the relevant person(s) at the
OU/BU within 48 hours.1
The individual trends
The lessons Case studies with lessons learnt, for moderate incident
learnt must be using the Eskom template, for all lessons learnt must
shared within LCs must be compiled, shared be shared within the
the OU/BU on a within the OU/BU, and OU/BU quarterly. six-monthly
submitted to the respective Incident basis when
divisional or subsidiary headcommunication necessary.
office within three months of the
incident being classified.
Eskom-wide circulation of
lessons learnt will occur as a
consolidated sharing six-monthly.
Case studies for all other
incidents rated high and extreme
must be shared within the OU/BU
and relevant Division within one
month (30 days) after the
investigation.
Environmental Low Moderate High Extreme
priority rating
Note 1 Environmental incidents that occur over weekends, on days off (for example, pay weekend),
and holidays will not be considered late captures during audits and reviews when assessing the
capturing of incidents onto SAP EH&S. These incidents should be captured within 48 hours upon
return to a working day.
3.6 Classification and recording of incidents
All environmental incidents must be prioritised, classified, and recorded in the SAP EH&S system
according to the CARAT principles. The SAP EH&S system is the only acceptable system for
capturing incidents, excluding wildlife incidents that will be recorded on wildlife strategic partner’s
Cir.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
3.6.1 Classification
All environmental incidents must be classified using the definitions provided above and criteria in
the table in Appendix C to determine if the incident is an environmental event, LC, or a LC as a
result of FBS. NEMA S30 incidents and NWA S20 incidents must be classified using the guidance
provided in Appendix D. The outcome of the classification must then be completed on SAP EH&S
as a mandatory requirement.
If the environmental incident is classified by the OU/BU as an LC or an LC as a result of FBS, the
incident must be reported to EICC via the divisional EICC representative in the same month that
the incident occurred, where practicable. EICC will review and confirm the LC and the LC as a
result of FBS. Incidents where the classification is uncertain may be brought to the committee for
deliberation. However, there should have been discussions and proposal of classification within the
respective division or subsidiary before presenting the incident to the committee.
Specific incidents:
This section only highlights those incidents considered complex with a need for clarity in the form
of practice notes and assessment tables etc. However, the list is not exhaustive of all types of
environmental incidents.
The results of the respective assessments completed for specific incidents must be completed, and
documented evidence must be electronically attached to the incident in the SAP EH&S document
management system for all incidents highlighted below.
a. Hydrocarbon spill incidents: In terms of classifying hydrocarbon spill incidents, the
spill classification form must be completed to determine if the occurrence is classified
as an incident for reporting and managing on SAP EH&S. If the assessment outcome is
minor, moderate, or major, then the assessment and all relevant documents must be
electronically attached to the incident in SAP EH&S. The form is registered as a Spill
Assessment Table (Document number 240-47176039).
b. Ash spill incidents: All ash spill incidents must be assessed using the ash spill
assessment form as provided in Appendix A of the Position Paper on Ash Spillages –
Document number ENV16 – L009 in addition to Appendix C of this document and
NEMA S30 (control of incidents) requirements and NWA S20 (control of emergency
incidents) requirements.
c. Emergency tree cutting incidents: These will be classified using Government
Gazette No. 773 issued by the Department of Forestry – 24 August 2007 Exemptions
in terms of Sections 7(1) and 15(1) of the National Forests Act, 1998 (Act ),
as amended.
d. Dust fall-out exceedances: All dust fall-out exceedances must be reported as
incidents on SAP EH&S. A LC in terms of the National Dust Control Regulations
(GNR 827, 1 November 2013) is incurred if there is a contravention of or failure to
comply with a provision of regulation 4(2) and (3), 6(1); (3) and (4) or (7) of the said
regulations.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
e. Wildlife incidents: Incidents will be assessed on species significance in accordance
with the NEM:BA, GNR –Threatened or Protected Species Regulations (as
amended) and the International Union for the Conservation of Nature (IUCN) Red List
categorisation.
f. Erosion incidents: Erosion occurring from Eskom’s business or activities must be
managed through the incident management process. However, existing or historical
erosion not caused by Eskom activities or in the course of Eskom’s business are not
considered incidents and thus should be managed through the site-specific
environmental management system (EMS).
g. Grass fires: All grass fires that occurred within the protected areas (a), (b), and (d) of
the National Environmental Management: Protected Areas Act (NEM:PAA) and/or in
terms of NEMA S30, as a result of Eskom activities must be classified as environmental
incidents and managed in terms of this procedure and prioritised as a high or extreme
incident depending on the extent of the damage.
h. Fires: All fires as a result of Eskom activities that occur outside of a NEM:PAA defined
protected area with known indigenous and/or protected species must be recorded as
an environmental incident. These incidents must be prioritised initially as low or
moderate depending on the extent of the damage and/or significance of species loss
incurred by the incident, although their classification may be increased based on the
outcome of the investigation.
i. Incidents with both OHS and environmental consequence: These incidents will be
managed in line with the requirements of this procedure and 32-95. A joint investigation
must be conducted and the information provided to the OHS and environmental
practitioners for updating on SAP EH&S accordingly. The OU/BU shall determine
internally who captures the incident on SAP EH&S.
j. Complaints: Complaints that trigger the definition of an incident (as defined in this
procedure) and are regarded as environmental incidents and non-conformities and
therefore must be managed in accordance with both the Non-Conformity and
Corrective Action Procedure and the Environmental Incident Management Procedure
requirement.
3.6.1.1 Reclassified incidents
Reclassified environmental incidents must be communicated by means of an updated SAP EH&S
Flash Report to relevant internal interested parties, together with an explanation for the
reclassification. Supporting documentation or proof must be made available for verification and
audit purposes and electronically attached to the incident in SAP EH&S.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
3.6.1.2 Classification dispute and appeal process
Disputes or appeals regarding the classification of environmental incidents must be submitted to
the Eskom environmental manager by the respective divisional/subsidiary environmental manager.
The Eskom environmental manager will review the incident information provided and will decide on
the incident classification. Should the Eskom environmental manager require input into the
decision, the ESC may be consulted. The final incident classification will be communicated to the
respective divisional/subsidiary environmental manager, who is responsible for communicating the
decision to the EICC.
3.6.2 Recording
All incidents must be recorded on SAP EH&S (the incident management tool) or the EWT CIR for
wildlife incidents. The date the incident occurred is the date that must be used as the incident date
unless a different decision is provided for incidents that are identified later and the actual incident
date is unknown. In instances such as these, the date of identification will be used unless specified
differently by the EICC for LCs.
All incidents must also reflect the applicable legislation or permit and the applicable section within
the respective legislation contravened for LCs.
3.6.2.1 Recording of biodiversity incidents
All vegetation-related incidents will be recorded on SAP EH&S. All wildlife incidents (according to
the definition for the purposes of this document) will be recorded by EWT on the CIR. In the event
of an insurance or third-party claim for a wildlife incident, such incident shall be captured on SAP
EH&S to facilitate the insurance or third-party claim process.
3.6.2.2 Recording of emission incidents
All emission exceedances that exceed the periods allowed for start-up, maintenance, upset
conditions, and shut-down as specified in the station-specific AELs must be reported and managed
as incidents, as detailed in the Atmospheric Emission Licence Practice Note.
3.7 Incident investigation
All incidents must be investigated according to the Action Required Table. Where investigations
take longer than the allocated timeframe within the Action Required Table, a written motivation is
required as follows:
The responsible manager must request for an extension with a motivation from the OU/BU
manager for all events at least seven calendar days before the timeframe required in the
Action Required Table.
The OU/BU manager must request an extension for all LCs and LCs as a result of FBS to
the respective divisional/subsidiary environmental manager at least seven calendar days
before the timeframe required in the Action Required Table.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Investigation reports must be treated with controlled disclosure according to the Eskom
documentation processes.
a. All investigations for environmental incidents shall evaluate the actual environmental impact
that occurred and ensure that all licence and permit requirements in terms of investigations
are covered in the investigation.
b. The focus of the investigation for LCs, LCs as a result of FBS, NWA S20 and NEMA S30
should be the reason or root cause, direct cause, and contributory cause for the incident
and the environmental impact. The investigation shall also include which legislation/permit
(including the specific section within legislation) was contravened in addition to the
technical details of the incident.
c. It is recommended that the investigation lead or chairperson is trained as a lead
investigator to ensure thorough investigations and effective corrective action identification.
d. The investigation team/committee and chairperson for a LC shall be appointed by the
OU/BU in consultation with the EICC divisional representative. The investigation team will
require input from the OU/BU SHEQ or environmental manager and the involvement of
relevant internal stakeholders such as engineers, contractor representatives, security, etc.,
where applicable. External stakeholders such as subject matter specialist(s) and
consultants for particular fields may also be required for certain incident investigations as
advised by the EICC representative with the OU/BU manager. The respective EICC
representatives shall be involved in the investigation as deemed necessary.
e. A detailed investigation report should be generated and captured on SAP EH&S and
circulated to the divisional EICC representative.
f. For investigations of LCs as a result of FBS, the respective EICC representatives or
divisional environmental manager must be involved. These investigations shall be
conducted by Assurance and Forensics or another relevant independent group as
determined by the EICC representative.
g. Investigation chairperson and teams for environmental events must be determined by the
OU/BU manager or relevant departmental manager and shall involve the environmental
practitioner(s) of the OU/BU and the relevant supervisor or contractor representative the
incident occurred. Expertise from relevant fields can be requested, depending on the type
of incident that is being investigated.
h. Where incidents occur in areas of an Eskom subsidiary or contractor responsibility, joint
investigations shall be carried out within the stipulated time of 45 calendar days after the
incident occurred, where responsible managers and the environmental team from Eskom
and the Eskom subsidiary or contractor are present. The outcome of this investigation shall
be considered as final and used for classification purposes at EICC. The investigation lead
shall be from the Eskom division or Eskom subsidiary or contractors depending on who is
responsible for the incident or where the incident occurred. Should either party receive an
invitation to investigate an LC, they shall accept and attend the investigation.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
i. Wildlife incidents:
i. The incident investigation shall be initiated either by EWT or the Eskom BU. The
site investigation team shall comprise representatives from EWT and the Eskom
OU/BU and/or relevant Environmental Department and, if applicable, the external
stakeholder (relevant interested and affected parties) that reported the incident.
ii. A detailed investigation report including recommendations/corrective actions shall
be generated by EWT. The Eskom OU/BU must be afforded the opportunity to
consider and to accept the recommendations/corrective actions in terms of technical
acceptance. In the event of a dispute between the stakeholders, the relevant
divisional/subsidiary environmental manager will assist in resolving disputes.
The investigation report must include the following:
a. The details of the incidents (type of incident, what occurred, sequence of events, when and
where the incident occurred).
b. The legislation and/or condition of environmental permit applicable to the incident and what,
if any, legislation contravention has occurred.
c. Incident consequences and impacts.
d. Direct or immediate cause(s).
e. Root causes, considering human, workplace, and natural factors (who, what, and why).
f. Identify system failures (procedure non-conformance, training, plant failure, etc.). This must
also include a holistic view of the systems linked to the incident and possible failures.
g. Corrective and preventive actions to remedy and prevent a reoccurrence of the incident.
h. Lessons learnt and recommendations.
3.8 Management of corrective actions
a) There must be at least one corrective action for each cause identified during the
investigation. All actions must be captured and managed on SAP EH&S.
b) The Investigation Committee must consider the following hierarchy of control when
formulating corrective actions:
i. Engineering control to design/redesign in order to eliminate the risk.
ii. Administrative control, ensuring procedures are updated to prevent incidents from
occurring.
iii. Substitution or elimination by removing the aspect that may result in an environmental
incident and thus actual environmental impact.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
c) Planned start and completion (end) dates for all corrective actions must be clearly defined
and must be SMART:
i. Specific;
ii. Measureable;
iii. Achievable;
iv. Realistic, with clearly allocated responsibilities; and
v. Timeous, with clear deadlines.
d) All actions, once completed, must be verified by the person responsible in order to
determine effective implementation. Documentary evidence of the implemented corrective
action must be available and attached electronically to the incident in SAP EH&S before it is
closed on SAP EH&S.
e) Where a corrective action that has been implemented is deemed ineffective and, therefore,
unsuccessful, the corrective action(s) must be revised. An alternative corrective action must
be identified to address the root cause(s). Documented proof of approval of the action
change must be available, including obtaining approval for action changes for LCs and LCs
as a result of FBS from the EICC representative. The SAP EH&S process is then followed is
to close the ineffective action and capture the revised action together with the proof of
approval of the action change.
f) If a corrective action for an LC incident requires revision and/or the due date will not be met,
the respective OU/BU must follow the internal OU/BU process for approval and, in addition,
submit that request in writing for approval to amend the corrective actions and/or due date
from their respective divisional/subsidiary environmental manager. Due date extension
requests must be submitted to the divisional/subsidiary environmental manager at least two
weeks before the actual initial due date. Once approval is obtained, documented proof must
be available. The original action must be closed on SAP EH&S as ‘not implemented to
requirements’ and a new action captured on SAP EH&S with the approved revised action
date. Where extension requests are not approved, those actions must remain overdue. The
following minimum information is required when submitting an action extension request:
i. Motivated reason for the extension.
ii. Proof of action commencement from when the action was developed and allocated.
iii. Risk assessments and assurance that repeat or similar incidents are being
prevented by treatment plans.
iv. Adequate timelines and sequence of events to highlight reasons for project delays.
v. Engagements with the respective authority for extensions or an update of corrective
action plans previously submitted have been taking place.
vi. The motivation must be supported by both the respective environmental manager
and OU/BU manager.
vii. An environmental impact assessment of the incident that includes monitoring trends
and actions to address the impact as needed.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
g) To ensure the prompt follow-up and close-out of corrective action from an incident
investigation report, periodic status reports must be provided from SAP EH&S to site
management until all recommendations have been acted on and closed out.
h) The EICC meetings may also track the corrective actions for incident LCs and incident LCs
as a result of FBS as part of the monthly meetings.
i) Wildlife incidents: Recommendations/Corrective actions shall be implemented by the Eskom
OU/BU according to the applicable and approved timelines and related divisional key
performance indicators (KPIs) for bird incidents. For other wildlife incidents, the timelines
according to the recommendations/corrective actions shall be adhered to.
j) All investigation reports (including wildlife incidents) should be finalised and signed within 14
calendar days of completing the investigation.
k) The corrective actions for all incidents (excluding wildlife incidents that will be captured by
EWT on the CIR) must be captured on SAP EH&S within seven calendar days from the date
of signing the investigation report.
3.8.1 Documentation management
The OU/BU is responsible for scanning and attaching all relevant documentation (for example, the
Initial Notification Report, SAP EH&S system-generated flash report, proof of corrective action
implementation, investigation report, spill assessments, environmental impact assessment of the
incident, etc.) needed to demonstrate that the incident has been managed according to the incident
management process, as soon as the documents are completed and are available.
3.9 Incident close-out
a) Close-out is the final step in the incident management process. The action of closing out an
incident signifies that all corrective actions have been effectively implemented, case studies
effectively communicated, all relevant documents attached and verified by the responsible
managers.
b) The incident must then be closed out in SAP EH&S as an action.
c) All LCs and LCs as a result of FBS must have a signed closure certificate uploaded
(Document number 240-76507067).
d) Wildlife incidents: Eskom OU/BU and/or environmental manager shall confirm when all
recommendations/corrective actions have been implemented with all the related
documented information as evidence. An incident will be closed on the EWT CIR by
capturing the date the recommendations were implemented, completed, and verified. If the
incident was reported by an external stakeholder (public or landowner), EWT the
stakeholder might be contacted to confirm if mitigation has been implemented.
3.10 Incident communication
Incident communication occurs throughout the incident management process, and documented
evidence of this must be available on SAP EHS. Various levels of communication are identified
and specified in the Action Required Table of this document.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
4. Acceptance
This document has been seen and accepted by the Eskom EICC and Environmental Steering
Committee.
5. Revisions
Date Rev. Compiler Remarks
June 2022 3 I Cloete The term OHD has been replaced
by FBS.
Definition on wildlife has been
clarified
April 2021 2 N Rajdeo Procedure due for revision
November 2017 1 N Rajdeo New document for environmental
incident management that was
previously included in 32-95.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Appendix A: Process flow to determine repeat environmental incidents
This process flow must be applied in conjunction with the definition of an FBS and duty of
care principle.
Questions to be asked:
Did the incident take place within 12 months of the previous environmental legal contravention incident?
Yes No (then not a repeat)
Did environmental legal contravention incident occur within the same BU (for example, Transmission
grid, Distribution cluster, power station, Group Capital project, etc.)?
Yes
No (then not a repeat)
Is the environmental legal contravention incident related to the legislation and/or the same licence,
previously classified as a legal contravention incident?
Yes
No (then not a repeat)
Is the environmental legal contravention incident related to the same root cause?
Yes
No (then not a repeat)
Have the corrective and preventive actions identified to address the previous incident not been
implemented or been implemented however was deemed ineffective and failed?
No (then not a repeat)
Yes (then a repeat)
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Appendix B: Incident management process flow
Incident occurs
Incident Management
Process begins
Direct observation 1. Incident Indirect
Identification observation
Decision to investigate
2. Initiation and execution of
emergency response
Establish Investigation team
Determine facts and applicable legislation 3. Notification and reporting
Determine key factors, root &/ other causes 4. Incident prioritisation
Determine systems to be strengthened 5. Classification & recording
9. Communication
Develop corrective actions 6. Incident Investigation
Document & ratify investigation results 7. Management of corrective
actions
Review initial classification & recording
Communicate findings
Follow up & sign off on completed actions
CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE8. Incident closed out
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Appendix C: Classification criteria for environmental incidents
EICC criteria for classification of environmental incidents as events or legal contravention incidents
Element N/a Yes No
1. Did the incident result in a contravention of any environmental legislation and/or condition
of a licence, authorisation, or permit?
2. Environmental duty of care (Section 28 of NEMA) – Did the incident result in either
sterilising the soil or destroying rare, endangered, or protected fauna or flora?
3. Environmental duty of care and prevention of pollution (Section 28 of NEMA and Section
19 of NWA) – Did the incident result in making any water resource unfit for its original
purpose such as domestic, agricultural, or industrial use or reduce the water quality to such a
state that human intervention is required to restore it to its original quality?
4. Environmental duty of care and prevention of pollution (Section 28 of NEMA and Section
19 of NWA) – Did Eskom fail to take reasonable measures to prevent pollution or
degradation from occurring?
5. Environmental duty of care and prevention of pollution (Section 28 of NEMA and Section
19 of NWA) – Did Eskom fail to prevent pollution or degradation from continuing?
6. Environmental duty of care and prevention of pollution (Section 28 of NEMA and Section
19 of NWA) – Did Eskom fail to implement measures to prevent pollution or degradation from
recurring?
Specify legislation, the applicable section within legislation, and licence condition that were contravened.
Classification
If “Yes” to any of the questions, classify the incident as legal contravention. If “No” to all of the
questions, classify as an event.
If classified as a legal contravention, check against the criteria below to determine whether
the incident is a FBS.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
LC as a result of FBS criteria:
FBS definition: These are specific case(s) of environmental legal contravention incidents that are considered to be of very
high significance in terms of its environmental impact and/or Eskom in that they have a material business impact and
illustrate a significant failure of business systems. Within the above principles, they are identified in terms of the criteria
below. If any one of the criteria specified in Appendix C or the principle defined above is relevant to a specific contravention
of environmental legislation, then that environmental legal contravention incident is a potential “environmental legal
contravention incident as a result of FBS” and/or the criteria below.
Criteria2 Yes No
1. The environmental legal contravention incident results in formal censure from the government.
These are a compliance notice, a directive, a fine (including a NEMA Section 24g application), or
prosecution.
2. The environmental legal contravention incident is not reported through the initial notification to the
applicable department according to this procedure (240-133087117).
3. The environmental legal contravention incident is considered a repeat environmental legal
contravention (using the process flow found in Appendix A of this document). Note: This criterion can
only apply if the previous incident was classified as an environmental legal contravention.
4. The corrective action(s) for the legal contravention incident is not implemented within 30 days after
the due date according to this procedure (240-133087117).
FBS (any shaded area marked)
2 The above criteria are applied in conjunction with the definitions for LCs and FBSs,
taking into account the associated principles.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Appendix D: NEMA Section 30 Control of Incidents and NWA Section 20 Control of
Emergency Incident Classification and Reporting Guidance
This section must be read in conjunction with NEMA s30 (control of incidents) and NWA s20
(control of emergency incidents). The emergency response plan or procedure must be initiated for
all NEMA S30 and NWA S20 incidents.
Classification and reporting guidance
For an incident to be a NEMA S30 incident, the following elements highlighted within the definition
of an incident must be triggered:
NEMA Section 30 NEMA Section 30A
Incident(s) situation(s)
Definition
Definition
An unexpected, sudden, and
A situation that has arisen suddenly uncontrolled release of a hazardous
that poses an imminent and serious substance, including from a major
threat to the environment, human emission, fire, or explosion, that
life, or property, including a causes, has caused, or may cause
‘disaster’ as defined in Section 1 of significant harm to the environment,
the Disaster Management Act, human life, or property.
2002 (Act ), but does not
include an incident referred to in
Section 30 of this Act (NEMA).
Initiate emergency response
Classification
Classify as NEMA s30 if all elements REPORTING
that are highlighted in the definition are Regulation GNR. 310, gazette on
triggered. 10 April 2015
Regulations relating to the
procedure to be followed when
oral requests are made in terms
of Section 30 A. NB: Applications
must be submitted before
REPORTING commencement activity.
Alarm report to (INO 24 hours):
DFFE, provincial HOD,
divisional/subsidiary environmental
manager, municipality (relevant IP, Note: Emission incidents must be
SAPS & Fire dept. where necessary). classified and reported in terms of the
requirements of the AEL, in conjunction
Incident report (14 days) to: DFFE, with NEMA s30 and the AEL Practice
provincial HOD, Corporate:EM Note.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
For an incident to be a NWA s20 incident, the following elements highlighted within the definition of
an incident must be triggered.
NWA s20 Control of
Emergency INCIDENT(S)
Definition
Includes any incident or accident in which a substance
a) pollutes or has potential to pollute, a water resource, or
b) has, or is likely to have a detrimental effect on a water
Initiate emergency response
Classification
Classify as NWA s20 if all elements that are highlighted
in the definition are triggered.
Reporting
INO 24 hours: DWS, divisional/subsidiary environmental
manager), municipality (relevant IP and hazmat company where
necessary).
Corrective Action Plan to: DWS, divisional/subsidiary
Action required for NEMA S30 incidents (Control of Incidents) and NWA S20 incidents
(Control of Emergency Incidents)
1. Determine if the incident is a NEMA S30 or NWA S20 incidents using Appendix D above,
applicable legislation, and consulting the divisional/subsidiary environmental manager.
2. Submit initial notification to the relevant divisional/subsidiary environmental manager, DFFE,
and/or DWS.
3. Notify relevant stakeholders as prescribed in this procedure, and process flow in Appendix D.
Initiate investigation within 24 to 48 hours. Investigations for NEMA S30 incidents must be
completed within 14 calendar days.
4. Submit investigation report to DFFE and divisional/subsidiary environmental manager on the
DFFE template within 14 days of the NEMA S30 incident. For NWA S20 incidents, a follow-up
letter containing investigation results and corrective actions must be completed and submitted
to the DWS as soon as the investigation is concluded. The divisional/subsidiary environmental
manager must be consulted before final reports being communicated to the authorities.
Provide additional information to authorities once investigation is concluded and/or corrective and
preventive actions are implemented.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmental Incident Management Procedure Unique Identifier: 240-133087117
Revision: 3
Page: of 30
Appendix E: Investigation requirements guidance
This section provides guidance on the types of causes (adapted from the SAP Quality Issue
Management System) required for the various levels of investigations according to the priority
rating in Table 3.5.2.
Apparent cause Identified through the facts of an incident and, if corrected, will
reduce the consequence of future similar incidents. Recurrence
is not expected, and the emphasis is mainly to correct this present
incident.
Contributory Contribute to the incident occurring but is not the only cause of the
cause incident. If the cause is corrected, it will not prevent the incident
from occurring. However, it is important enough to be identified and
corrective actions determined to improve the quality of the process
to prevent future incidents from occurring.
Direct cause Direct or immediate reasons why the incident occurred.
Root cause(s) The fundamental issue(s) that can reasonably be identified by
following a root cause analysis process. Root causes may be within
management control or as an external factor. Effective corrective
action(s) for the prevention of reoccurrence can be generated for
those causes within the control of management, so that removing
the cause would have prevented the incident from occurring and, if
eliminated/rectified, would prevent reoccurrence.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Environmetal management declaration
1. I undertake to adhere to the requirements as set out in:
Authorisation
2. I undertake to comply with all applicable environmental legal and other requirements
3. I undertake to comply with Eskom ‘s environmental standards, policies and procedures where
applicable
4. I am fully aware and will comply with the environmental transgressions fine systems
5. I pledge to inform all staff of their role in managing environmental impacts on site
6. I am fully aware that incidents must be reported within 24 hours of occurrence
7. I pledge to always implement environmental best practice on site during the contract
8. I pledge that all non-conformances issued to us will be addressed promptly
9. I am fully aware that where applicable the following documentation / registers to be kept on site
will be submitted to Eskom Project Manager on completion of the project:
10. I commit to always implement environmental best practice on site during the contract
Public
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third
parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
of 2
Document
240-110600836 Rev 2
Identifier CONTRACTOR
ENVIRONMENTAL Effective Date July 2023
Requirements proforma
Review Date July 2025
I------------------------------------------------------------------------ (full name) acknowledge and accept the
responsibility to comply and conform to all the above-mentioned requirements.
Designation (Contractor)
.......................................... Signature Date:
Contact Number .......................................... ...................................
...........................................
Signature of Project Eskom: Project Manager Date:
Manager:
........................................... ........................................ .........................................
Public
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to
ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third
parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30
of 2
C:\WINDOWS\Installer\{90160000-0011-0000-1000-0000000FF1CE}\xlicons.exe
Eskom Holdings SOC Limited has a systematic and hierarchical approach to integrated waste
management, with the goal of zero waste. A proactive prevention approach is followed to ensure
cleaner production, effective and sensible reuse, and recycling, as well as responsible treatment and
disposal of waste generated.
The National Environmental Management Act (NEMA) , the National Waste
Management Strategy (NWMS) of 2020, and the National Environmental Management: Waste Act
(NEMWA) , as amended, and the regulations under these, not excluding other relevant
environmental legislation, municipal by-laws, and international agreements to which South Africa is
a party, provide the mechanism to regulate every aspect of the waste and secondary resources
value chain in South Africa. The regulations are aimed at “controlling” the sector in an effort to
minimise the environmental and human health impacts associated with poor waste management,
while, at the same time, striving to drive waste up the hierarchy away from disposal towards reuse,
recycling, and recovery.
In a circular economy, resources are kept in use for as long as possible, extracting the maximum
value from them while in use and then recovering and regenerating products and materials at the
end of each service life. To enable a transition to a circular economy, it is important to establish the
factors that will trigger and sustain such an economy and the extent to which aspects of the circular
economy are already embedded in the organisation. The opportunity to reduce cost should be a
strong driver and should also be sustained for the business to consider waste minimisation, reuse,
and recycling of waste.
This standard is necessary to provide the minimum management requirements of waste streams
and to ensure legal compliance.
2. Supporting clauses
2.1 Scope
The scope of this document is aligned with the legislated requirements that must be adhered to for
the management of the waste streams that can pose a significant risk to Eskom Holdings SOC
Limited, with the aim that business units shall pursue the goal of zero waste through implementing
proactive measures to eliminate waste, if practicable, or to manage waste in a responsible manner
where it cannot be eliminated.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
2.2 Purpose
The purpose of the standard is to pursue the goal of zero waste through implementing proactive
measures to eliminate waste, if practicable, or to manage waste in a responsible manner where it
cannot be eliminated and ensure alignment with external regulatory and governmental documents.
The Waste Management Standard will give overall direction and governance in Eskom operational
areas on what has to be done to implement an effective waste management system.
The aim is to reduce waste production, practise reuse, recycling, and recovery of waste, and ensure
safe disposal of waste, thereby reducing the environmental risk and contributing to the sustainability
of business operations.
2.3 Applicability
This document shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings SOC Limited and its subsidiaries.
2.4 Effective date
This standard will be effective from the date of authorisation.
2.5 Normative/Informative references
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the
following paragraphs.
2.6 Normative
[1] Environmental Indicator Reporting Standard (32-249)
[2] Safety, Health, Environment, and Quality (SHEQ) Policy (32-727)
[3] Eskom’s Procurement and Supply Chain Management Procedure (32-1034)
[4] Polychlorinated Biphenyl Phase-out Standard (240-8908008)
[5] Requirements for Safe Processing, Handling, Storing, Disposal, and Phase-out of Asbestos (32-
303)
[6] Environmental Incident Management Procedure (240-133087117)
[7] Eskom Greenhouse Gas Emission Reporting Procedure (240-125809509)
[8] Standard for Mineral Insulating Oils (Uninhibited and Inhibited): Purchase, Management,
Maintenance, Testing, and Disposal (240-775661431)
[9] Position Paper on Management of Coal Waste at Power Stations (ENV18-004)
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
[10] Eskom Health Care Risk Waste Management Standard (240-115842952)
2.7 Informative
[1] Environment Conservation Act (ECA)
[2] National Environmental Management Act (NEMA)
[3] Minimum Requirements for the Handling, Classification, and Disposal of Hazardous Waste,
Department of Water Affairs and Forestry (DWAF), version
[4] National Environmental Management: Waste Act (NEMWA)
[5] National Radioactive Waste Disposal Institute Act
[6] National Waste Management Strategy (NWMS) of 2020: GNR 56, 28 January 2021
[7] National Environmental Management: Waste Amendment Act
[8] National Health Act
[9] National Health Act : GN 1229, 24 December 2015
[10] National Waste Information Regulations: GNR 625, 13 August 2012
[11] Waste Classification and Management Regulations: GNR 634, 23 August 2013
[12] List of Waste Management Activities that have, or are likely to have, a Detrimental Effect on the
Environment: GNR 921, 29 November 2013
[13] National Norms and Standards for the Storage of Waste: GNR 926, 29 November 2013
[14] National Norms and Standards for Disposal of Waste to a Landfill: GNR 636, 23 August 2013
[15] National Norms and Standards for the Storage of Waste: GNR 926, 29 November 2013
[16] National Norms and Standards for the Assessment of Waste for Land Disposal: GNR 635, 23
August 2013
[17] National Norms and Standards for the Sorting, Shredding, Grinding, Crushing, Screening,
Chipping, or Baling of General Waste: GNR 1096, 11 October 2017
[18] National Norms and Standards for the Assessment of Waste for Landfill Disposal: GNR 635,
August 2013
[19] Norms and Standards for the Remediation of Contaminated Land and Soil Quality in the
Republic of South Africa, Government Notice May 2014
[20] National Environmental Management: Air Quality Act
[21] National Road Traffic Act
[22] Asbestos Abatement Regulations: GNR 1196, 10 November 2020
[23] Asbestos Regulations: GNR 341, 2008
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
[24] National Greenhouse Gas Emission Reporting Regulations
[25] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems
[26] SANS 0290: 2020 Mineral Oils – Management and Handling of PCBs
[27] SANS Codes for Transportation of Hazardous Waste – 10228 to 10234, 10206, and 10265, at
a minimum
[28] SANS ISO 14001 Environmental Management System: Requirements with Guidance for Use
[29] SANS 10248: 2008 Management of healthcare waste (1 – 3)
[30] Basel Convention on the Transboundary Movement of Hazardous Waste
[31] Implementing the Paris Agreement – Issues at Stake in View of the COP 22 Climate Change
Conference
[32] Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer
[33] Stockholm Convention on the Identification and Removal of Persistent Organic Pollutants
[34] Rotterdam Convention on the Banning of Hazardous Substances
[35] Carbon Tax Act
[36] Waste Tyre Regulations, 2017: GN 1064 in GG 41157, 29 September 2017
The standard is not exhaustive and/or is not limited to the legislation listed above.
2.8 Definitions
2.8.1. Asbestos means the following minerals: (a) amosite, (b) chrysotile, (c) crocidolite, (d) fibrous
anthophyllite, and (e) fibrous tremolite, or any mixture containing any of these minerals.
2.8.2. Asbestos-containing material means asbestos, as well as any material that contains
asbestos, and includes asbestos cement products, asbestos coating, asbestos insulation
board, asbestos insulation, asbestos textured decorative coatings, asbestos-contaminated
soil, and other asbestos-containing materials.
2.8.3. Asbestos disposal site means a site specifically designated for the purpose of asbestos
disposal in terms of the National Environmental Management: Waste Act .
2.8.4. Business waste means waste that emanates from premises that are used wholly or mainly
for commercial, retail, wholesale, entertainment, or government administration purposes.
2.8.5. Building and demolition waste means waste, excluding hazardous waste, produced during
the construction, alteration, repair, or demolition of any structure, and includes rubble, earth,
rock, and wood displaced during that construction, alteration, repair, or demolition.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
2.8.6. Colour coding means the use of colour on a container or bag or the label attached to such
that serves to identify the category of waste that it contains.
2.8.7. Contaminant means any substance present in an environmental medium at concentrations
in excess of natural background concentrations that has the potential to cause harm to
human health or the environment.
2.8.8. COVID-19-type waste includes used tissues, disposable cleaning cloths, gloves, masks, etc.
2.8.9. Disposal means the burying, deposit, discharge, abandonment, dumping, placement, or
release of any waste into, or onto, any land.
2.8.10. Domestic waste means waste, excluding hazardous waste, that emanates from premises
that are used wholly or mainly for residential, educational, health care, sport, or recreational
purposes.
2.8.11. Environment means the surroundings within which humans exist and that are made up of:
(i) the land, water, and atmosphere of the earth;
(ii) micro-organisms and plant and animal life;
(iii) any part or combination of (i) and (ii) and the interrelationships among and between them;
and
(iv) the physical, chemical, aesthetic, and cultural properties and conditions of the foregoing
that influence human health and well-being.
2.8.12. General waste means waste that does not pose an immediate hazard or threat to health or
to the environment and includes:
a) domestic waste;
b) building and demolition waste;
c) business waste;
d) inert waste; or
e) any waste classified as non-hazardous waste in terms of the regulations made under
section 69 of the NEMWA and includes non-hazardous substances, materials, or objects
within business, domestic, inert, building, and demolition wastes.
2.8.13. General waste storage facility means a storage facility that has the capacity to store in
excess of 100 m3 of general waste continuously.
2.8.14. Hazardous waste means any waste that contains organic or inorganic elements or
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
compounds that may, owing to the inherent physical, chemical, or toxicological
characteristics of that waste, have a detrimental impact on health and the environment and
includes hazardous substances, materials, or objects within business waste, residue
deposits, and residue stockpiles.
2.8.15. Hazardous waste storage facility means a storage facility that has the capacity to store in
excess of 80 m3 of hazardous waste continuously.
2.8.16. Health care general waste means the non-hazardous portion of the waste generated at a
health care facility. This is any waste that comprises uncontaminated plastics, paper, flowers,
cardboard, or food residues.
2.8.17. Health care risk waste means the hazardous portion of the waste generated at a health
care facility. This is any waste that poses a hazard to human health or the environment.
2.8.18. PCB-contaminated material means oil or articles with a polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)
concentration greater than 51 mg/kg, but less than 500 mg/kg.
2.8.19. PCB material means oil or articles with a PCB concentration greater than 500 mg/kg.
2.8.20. PCB waste means waste, as defined in the National Environmental Management: Waste Act
, that contains PCB materials or PCB-contaminated materials; and “SANS 290”
means the latest edition of the South African National Standards for mineral insulating oils
management of polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).
2.8.21. Recycling means a process where waste is reclaimed for further use, which process involves
the separation of waste from a waste stream for further use and the processing of that
separated material as a product or raw material.
2.8.22. Remediation means the management of a contaminated site to prevent, minimise, or
mitigate harm to human health or the environment.
2.8.23. Reuse means the utilisation of the whole, a portion of, or a specific part of any substance,
material, or object from the waste stream for a similar or different purpose without changing
the form or properties of such substance, material, or object.
2.8.24. Safety data sheet is a detailed informational document prepared by the manufacturer or
importer of a hazardous chemical. It describes the physical and chemical properties of the
product. It also provides the physical, health, and environmental health hazards, protective
measures, and safety precautions for handling, storing, and transporting the chemical.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
2.8.25. SANS 10234 means the latest edition of the South African National Standard: Globally
Harmonised System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals.
2.8.26. Temporary storage means the once-off storage of waste for a period not exceeding 90 days.
2.8.27. Waste means:
a) any substance, material, or object that is unwanted, rejected, abandoned, discarded, or
disposed of, or that is intended or required to be discarded or disposed of, by the holder of
that substance, material, or object, whether or not such substance, material, or object can be
reused, recycled, or recovered, and includes all wastes as defined in Schedule 3 to the Act
(NEMWA, 2014); or
b) any other substance, material, or object that is not included in Schedule 3 that may be defined
as a waste by the Minister by notice in the Gazette, but any waste or portion of waste, referred
to in paragraphs (a) and (b), ceases to be a waste:
(i). once an application for its reuse, recycling, or recovery has been approved or, after such
approval, once it is, or has been, reused, recycled, or recovered;
(ii). where approval is not required, once a waste is, or has been, reused, recycled, or
recovered; or
(iii). where the Minister has, in terms of section 74 of the NEMWA, exempted any waste or
a portion of waste generated by a particular process from the definition of waste or
where the Minister has, in the prescribed manner, excluded any waste stream or a
portion of a waste stream from the definition of waste.
2.8.28. Waste-disposal facility means any site or premises used for the accumulation of waste with
the purpose of disposing of that waste at that site or on those premises.
2.8.29. Waste facility means a commercial place, infrastructure, or containment of any kind,
including associated structures or infrastructure, where there is sorting, shredding, grinding,
crushing, screening, chipping, or baling of general waste.
2.8.30. Waste transfer facility means a facility that is used to accumulate and temporarily store
waste before it is transported to a recycling, treatment, or waste-disposal facility.
2.8.31. Waste classification means establishing, in terms of SANS 10234:
a) whether a waste is hazardous based on the nature of its physical, health, and environmental
hazardous properties (hazard classes); and
b) the degree or severity of the hazard posed (hazard categories).
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
2.8.32. Waste generator means any person whose actions, production processes, or activities,
including waste management activities, result in generation of waste.
2.8.33. Waste manager means any person who reuses, recycles, recovers, treats, or disposes of
waste.
2.8.34. Waste transporter means any person who conveys or transfers waste between the waste
generator and a waste management facility, or between waste management facilities.
2.8.35. Waste manifest system means a system of control documentation, which accompanies a
load of hazardous waste transported from the point of generation to the waste management
facility.
2.9 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
ACM Asbestos-containing material
ACW Asbestos-containing waste
CCP Coal combustion product
CFL Compact fluorescent lamp
ESC Environmental Steering Committee
FGD Fluidised gas desulphurisation
GG Government Gazette
GHG Greenhouse gas
GN Government notice
HCW Health care waste
HCGW Health care general waste
HCRW Health care risk waste
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ODS Ozone-depleting substance
NEMWA National Environmental Management: Waste Act (NEMWA)
PCB Polychlorinated biphenyl
POP Persistent organic pollutant
SANS South African National Standard
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
Abbreviation Explanation
SAWIS South African Waste Information System
SOC State-owned company
2.10 Roles and responsibilities
Eskom Environmental Corporate Office: Waste Portfolio: waste monitoring results are
consolidated by the Environmental Corporate Office for Sustainable Development reporting.
The line divisions, business units (BUs), and operating units (OUs) are responsible for
implementation of this standard.
Eskom Environmental Corporate The Eskom Environmental Corporate Office: Waste Portfolio is
Office: Waste Portfolio responsible for the development and provision of assurance on
the implementation of this standard. The Environmental
Corporate Office is also responsible for assisting in the review,
interpretation, influencing, and communication of external
governance documents or tools such as legislation, guidelines,
and principles to both internal and external stakeholders. The
Environmental Corporate Office ensures that internal waste
management Level 1 governance documents are aligned with
South African legislation and associated regulations,
international treaties, and agreements.
Divisions Ensure that waste generated within an operational area is
managed in accordance with waste legislation and regulations.
Ensure that the waste register is kept up to date and reviewed
at the required intervals.
Ensure that the personnel and contractors directly under their
supervision are aware of the Eskom Waste Management
Standard.
Department of Forestry, Guide implementation of the waste legislation to ensure
Fisheries, and the Environment compliance.
(DFFE) Waste Directorate Perform waste characterisation to determine the correct landfill
class.
Eskom Commercial Department This department is responsible for all commercial matters and
contract management.
Product Stewardship Compile safety data sheets for hazardous waste.
Be responsible for transportation requirements for the
transportation of waste (locally and transboundary).
Engineering/Technology Identify engineering options to ensure that the activities are
compliant with all the requirements of the waste legislation.
2.11 Process for monitoring
The processes as set out in this standard shall be subjected to first level of assurance
audits/assessments as undertaken by line divisions and business units, second-level assurance
audits conducted by the Environmental Corporate Office: Waste Portfolio, and verification of data
and adherence to standards and work instructions. The third level of assurance will be provided
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
through internal audits according to processes employed by Assurance and Forensic and external
audits as required for assurance purposes.
2.12 Related/Supporting documents
[1] Waste Reporting Template (240-47176064)
[2] PCB Inventory Template (240-51752992)
[3] Hydrocarbon Spill Assessment Table (240-47176039)
3. Document content
Waste management comprises the full range of activities that accompany custodianship and
disposal of waste from the point of generation, through transportation, to the point of final disposal,
as applicable. It embraces all aspects of the waste management hierarchy (waste avoidance,
minimisation/reduction, reuse, recycling, recovery, storage, treatment, transportation, and disposal).
The requirements below contain specific extracts from the NEMWA and other waste legal
requirements as areas to which special attention needs to be given in Eskom divisions, business
units or operating units, and subsidiaries. This does not, however, relieve the reader/implementer of
this document from the legal obligations under the omitted sections and compliance with new
legislation that comes into effect after the publication of this Waste Management Standard.
3.1 Waste management minimum requirements
Waste management in Eskom shall be managed according to this Waste Management Standard
and other applicable documents. Waste management practices of waste streams that can pose a
significant risk shall be at least according to the processes described in the appendices contained in
this standard. Divisions must ensure that their waste is reused, recycled, recovered, treated, or
disposed of within 18 months of generation. Personnel involved in waste management must be
appropriately trained in all aspects of waste management. Only trained persons must be allowed to
handle waste (general and hazardous).
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
3.1.1 Waste generation
a) All employees, including visitors, contractors, and suppliers, doing work on behalf of the
organisation on its premises (all Eskom sites, including offices and workshops) are
considered to be generators of waste in terms of this standard. Therefore, it is the
responsibility of each generator to identify any general or hazardous wastes that it might be
producing and to ensure that the waste is handled in a manner consistent with the
requirements listed in this Waste Management Standard.
b) Waste generators must have processes in place that are designed and operated to prevent
or minimise the quantities of waste generated and hazards associated with the waste
generated.
c) Waste generators must ensure that substitution of raw materials or inputs is done with less
hazardous or toxic materials or with those where processing generates lower waste volumes.
d) Waste generators must institute good housekeeping and operating practices, including
inventory control, to reduce the amount of waste resulting from materials that are out of date,
off-specification, contaminated, damaged, or excess to plant needs.
e) Waste generators must institute procurement measures that recognise opportunities to return
usable materials, such as containers, and that prevent the overordering of materials.
f) Waste generators must ensure minimisation of hazardous waste generation by implementing
stringent waste segregation to prevent the mixing of non-hazardous and hazardous waste to
be managed.
g) If the waste generator triggers the requirement for SANS classification, the user must ensure
that its waste is classified within 180 days of generation. This classification is based on
physical, health, and environmental hazards (SANS 10234, Globally Harmonised System of
Classification and Labelling of Chemicals (GHS)).
3.1.2 Temporary storage of general and hazardous waste, excluding health care risk waste
Temporary waste storage is the storage of waste at Eskom sites while awaiting disposal. This section
covers the minimum requirements for storage of general and hazardous waste, but excludes medical
waste. Health care risk waste (HCRW) shall be managed in accordance with Appendix G of this
standard. The following are the requirements for waste storage:
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
a) A waste storage facility must be registered with the competent authority prior to the
construction taking place if the registration thresholds are triggered.
b) These facilities are required to comply with the norms and standards without a need to
conduct a basic assessment (BA) or to obtain a waste management licence as required by
Government Notice No. November 2013.
c) A waste storage facility must be located in such a manner that it can provide optimum
handling and transportation of waste material.
d) All waste storage facilities must be located in areas accessible by emergency response
personnel and equipment.
e) The waste storage facilities must be constructed and developed under the supervision of a
registered professional engineer and must be in accordance with the approved civil
engineering designs.
f) All the business/operating units must have a documented labelling or colour coding system
to designate different types of waste.
g) Waste must be sorted into various categories at the source, and a documented procedure
must be implemented to prevent any mixing of hazardous and general waste.
h) Every waste handler must comply with sections 16 and 17 of the National Environmental
Management: Waste Act in terms of measures to be taken regarding general duty
of care and waste minimisation, reduction, reuse, recycling, and recovery.
i) Nuisances such as odour, visual impacts, and breeding of vectors must be prevented from
developing.
j) Training must be provided continuously, as determined by the business/operating units, to
all employees working with waste and to all contract workers who might be exposed to the
waste.
k) A waste storage facility must have effective access control to prevent unauthorised entry.
l) Each waste storage facility must be able to provide documentation verifying the number of
waste storage containers or tanks within the facility, the date of collection, the authorised
collector(s), and the proposed final point of treatment, recycling, or disposal.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
m) A general waste storage facility that has the capacity to store in excess of 100 m3 of general
waste must be registered with the authority in accordance with the National Norms and
Standards for the Storage of Waste, Government Notice November 2013.
n) A hazardous waste storage facility that has the capacity to store in excess of 80 m3 of
hazardous waste must be registered with the authority in accordance with the National Norms
and Standards for the Storage of Waste, Government Notice November 2013.
o) A new and existing facility for sorting, shredding, grinding, crushing, screening, or baling of
general waste must be registered with the competent authority in accordance with the
National Norms and Standards for the Sorting, Shredding, Grinding, Crushing, Screening, or
Baling of General Waste, Government Notice October 2017.
p) A waste facility that is already registered in terms of the National Norms and Standards for
the Storage of Waste and that sorts, shreds, grinds, crushes, screens, or bales general waste
must not reregister, but must comply with the National Norms and Standards for the Sorting,
Shredding, Grinding, Crushing, Screening, Chipping, or Baling of General Waste.
3.1.2.1 Waste containers
a) Any container or storage impoundment holding waste must be labelled, or where labelling is
not possible, records must be kept reflecting the following:
The date on which the waste was first placed in the container
The date on which the waste was placed in the container for the last time when the
container was filled, closed, sealed, or covered
The date when waste was added and waste was removed from containers or the storage
impoundment and the quantities of such waste, if relevant
The specific category or categories of waste in the container or storage impoundment
as identified in terms of the National Waste Information System, 2012 (within the National
Waste Information Regulations: GNR 625, 13 August 2012)
The classification of waste in terms of Regulation 4 of the NEW: WA Waste Classification
and Management Regulations, once the process above has been completed.
b) The containers in which waste is stored must be intact and not corroded or in any other way
rendered unfit for the safe storage of waste.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
c) Adequate measures must be in place to prevent accidental spillage or leakage, and in the
case of an incident, adequate mitigation measures must be in place to mitigate and to prevent
reoccurrence of the incident.
d) Skips/Bins must be closed to prevent the waste from being blown away or rain entering and
increasing the volume of waste.
3.1.2.2 Liquid and hazardous waste – specific requirements
a) Liquid and hazardous waste storage areas must have firm, impermeable, and chemical-
resistant floors and a roof or should be a container that is coated to prevent direct sunlight
and rainwater from coming into contact with the waste.
b) A liquid waste storage facility must have an interception trench with a sump for intercepting
and recovering potential spills.
c) The liquid waste storage area must have a secondary containment system (for example, a
bund or drip tray) of sufficient capacity to contain at least 110% of the maximum content of
the storage facility.
d) Access to the hazardous waste storage facility must be limited to employees who have been
trained with respect to the operation of the hazardous waste storage facility.
e) Hazardous waste must be stored in covered containers that should only be opened when
waste is added or emptied.
f) Fluorescent light bulbs must be stored in containers that prevent them from breaking, such
as in their original boxes, boxes from replacement bulbs, or containers supplied by
fluorescent light bulb recyclers.
g) Only persons who have been trained on precautionary measures that need to be taken,
procedures that need to be applied where a particular type of work is being performed,
procedures for dealing with spillages, appropriate use of protective clothing, and the risk to
their health of hazardous substances to which they are likely to be exposed must be allowed
to handle hazardous waste.
3.1.3 Waste collection/transportation
a) No person may import waste or transit waste through South Africa without complying with
legislation or multilateral environmental agreements required for that transboundary
movement of waste.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
b) The transportation of waste shall comply with all requirements as specified in the National
Road Traffic Act , including the associated SANS 10206, 10228, 10229, 10230,
10231, 10232, and 10406 Codes of Practice.
c) Waste contractors transporting hazardous waste will be required to provide Eskom with the
necessary documents as mandated by the Department of Transport under the National Road
Traffic Act , NEMWA, regulations, and applicable by-laws to prove that they are
permitted to handle and transport the waste and will be required to present a certificate of
safe disposal.
d) Any person engaged in the transportation of waste must take all reasonable steps to prevent
any spillage of waste or littering from a vehicle used to transport waste.
e) Vehicles used for the collection and transportation of waste must not be used for any other
purpose while collecting and transporting waste.
f) Waste must be collected and transported in closed vehicles (covered to ensure that there is
no windblown litter generation during transportation).
g) Waste transporters must be registered to do so with the national, provincial, or municipal
governments, where applicable. A valid registration certificate must be provided as evidence.
h) The waste generator (Eskom or any person working on behalf of Eskom) must provide the
transporter with the relevant transportation documentation (as mentioned under normative
references) for the consignment.
i) The load must be properly loaded and secured on site prior to transportation.
j) The transport operator of hazardous waste must have hazchem placards on his/her vehicle
and ensure that they are properly fitted to the vehicle.
k) The responsible person must ensure that, before the vehicle leaves the consignor’s
premises, it is not overloaded or showing any obvious defect that will affect its safety.
l) The waste generator or his/her representative, that is, the transporter, must ensure that
adequate steps are taken to minimise the effect an accident or incident may have on the
public and on the environment.
m) Where waste is transported for the purpose of disposal, a person transporting waste must
ensure that the facility to which waste is transported is authorised to accept such waste. The
generator must have approved of that disposal facility prior to the waste being transported.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
n) The waste generator (Eskom or any person working on behalf of Eskom) must provide the
transporter with accurate information about the nature and properties of the load. Where
contractors are used, the onus lies on the waste generator to ensure that the required
information is correctly filled in on the waste manifest.
o) All waste contractors transporting hazardous waste will be required to provide Eskom with a
waste manifest detailing the type of waste disposed of, the quantities disposed of, and how
and where the waste was disposed of, as well as a certificate of safe disposal.
p) A waste collection record for general waste must be created that identifies the type of waste
disposed of and the waste facility where it is disposed of.
3.1.3.1 Waste manifest
All waste that is transported off site needs to be accompanied by a waste manifest document. This
is a legal document that contains the waste generator’s details, the waste transporter’s details, and
the waste manager’s details. The manifest document will also detail how the waste stream is to be
managed and will contain emergency contact details.
The generators of the waste are responsible for ensuring that all waste leaving the site is
accompanied by a waste manifest document and, in the case of hazardous waste, a safety data
sheet (SDS). Once the waste management facility has reused/recycled/treated/disposed of the
waste, a safe disposal certificate will be issued to the generator of the waste.
The following documents must be retained by the generator of the hazardous waste for a minimum
of five years and may be requested during any audits:
Manifest
Weighbridge ticket from the Eskom weighbridge (if available) and waste management facility
Safe disposal certificate from the waste management facility
Information specified in Item 2 of the Waste Classification and Management Regulations,
Government Notice August 2013, Annexure 2, must be reflected in the waste
manifest document. All waste manifests must contain information supplied by the waste
generator (consignor), information supplied by the waste transporter, and information to be
supplied by the waste manager (consignee).
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
3.1.4 Waste classification
a) In order to determine the prescribed requirements for the landfill disposal of industrial waste,
all potentially hazardous industrial waste must be classified in accordance with the Waste
Classification and Management Regulations, GNR August 2013.
b) In terms of this section, all waste generators must ensure that the waste they generate is
classified in accordance with SANS 10234 (except if the waste is listed in Annexure 1 of this
these regulations). The waste must be classified within 180 days of generation. This section
requires compliance with SANS 10234. Refer to Appendix O for waste classification and
management.
3.1.5 Waste minimisation, recycling, reuse, and recovery
a) All Eskom businesses, including subsidiaries, must take all reasonable measures to ensure
that the generation of waste is avoided and, where such generation cannot be avoided, to
minimise the toxicity and amounts of waste that are generated. Waste must be reduced,
reused, recycled, and recovered. Refer to Appendix N on the waste management hierarchy
and waste minimisation.
b) Waste must be managed in such a manner that it does not endanger health or the
environment or cause a nuisance through noise, odour, or visual impacts.
c) Any business/operating unit that sells a product that may be used by the public and that is
likely to result in the generation of hazardous waste must take reasonable steps to inform the
public of the impact of that waste on health and the environment.
d) Waste produced from solar photovoltaic (PV) products is similar to that of e-waste because
the manufacturing of PV semiconductor materials is similar to, or based on, microelectronics.
PV recycling can be done either at integrated e-waste recycling facilities or lead-acid battery
recycling centres.
3.1.6 Waste disposal
a) Waste shall be disposed of at facilities authorised to accept such waste. This includes
Eskom-owned waste facilities.
b) No burning of waste should occur at the general waste disposal facility or on any residential
and business premises, except at an approved and permitted incinerator.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
c) All general waste must be disposed of at a designated, licensed landfill, waste disposal site,
or allowed transfer station in the local council area or municipality.
d) Pollution of the environment and harm to health must be prevented by not:
disposing of waste or permitting waste to be disposed of on any land, in any body of
water, or at any unlicensed facility;
throwing, dropping, depositing, spilling, or in any other way discarding any litter into or
onto any public place, land, vacant erf, stream, watercourse, street or road, or any place
to which the general public has access, except in a container or a place specifically
provided for such disposal;
disposing of waste in a manner that is likely to cause pollution of the environment or
harm to health and well-being (for example, the burning or burying of waste);
disposing of unclassified waste; and
using unlicensed/unpermitted waste disposal facilities for Eskom waste.
e) Ensure that safe disposal certificates are retained for hazardous wastes that have been
disposed of.
3.1.7 Waste disposal and restrictions
The disposal regulations govern the permissibility and disposal of a particular waste. These
regulations are designed to protect the environment, and thus, there are certain waste streams for
which landfill disposal is prohibited. The prohibition of some waste streams may only be identified
through a characterisation analysis. The paragraphs below detail the list of prohibitions and the
associated timelines.
Precautionary approach for waste disposal
In the event that a waste stream has been generated and identified for landfill disposal without having
undergone characterisation analysis, the waste should be treated as a Type 1 waste to be disposed
of at a Class A landfill facility. However, as stated in section 8 of the minimum requirements of the
Department of Water Affairs and Forestry (DWAF), if there is existing analytical information (from
the analysis of waste) this can be used to make a decision regarding the disposal of the waste,
provided that the analysis was conducted at an accredited laboratory. Please contact the
Environmental Department to ensure that the correct landfill is selected for the disposal of the waste
while waiting for updated analytical information from the accredited laboratory.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
Waste streams are also to be treated as Type 1 wastes for disposal at a Class A landfill if the waste
characterisation analysis was insufficient (for example, where the laboratory was unable to
determine the chemical components in the waste, where only leach analysis was conducted, etc.)
until verification work has been concluded and communicated through the Environmental
Department or Environmental Engineering.
3.1.8 Waste reporting
a) At a minimum, a waste register, including the waste types, waste produced, quantities
disposed of, quantities recycled, disposal destinations, safe disposal certificates, income, and
cost for the handling, transportation, or disposal, must be kept.
b) Records of waste must be maintained for five years and in accordance with applicable
legislation. (Refer to Appendix J.)
c) To ensure that waste management activities in Eskom are undertaken in a controlled manner,
practices and resources shall be in place. Each business/operating unit is required to compile
an industry waste management plan in accordance with the requirements stipulated in
Appendix A.
d) Waste management activities will be reported on in the organisation on a six-monthly and
annual basis. Business/operating units should do waste reporting in accordance with the
Waste Reporting Template (240-47176064).
e) All waste management facilities, as well as hazardous waste generators (generating more
than 20 kg/day), are required to register and must ensure that they are registered to produce
a waste report in accordance with the South African Waste Information System (SAWIS).
f) These waste reports should be shared with the personnel responsible for waste reporting at
the divisional level for ratification and should, furthermore, be shared with the Waste Portfolio
of the Corporate Office for further ratification on a quarterly basis.
Health care risk waste storage
a) HCRW storage areas shall be clearly demarcated for the storage of HCRW and shall be
clearly marked “Health care risk waste storage area”.
b) The storage area shall be large enough to accommodate the quantities of waste likely to be
stored before collection.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
c) The storage area shall have a hard-standing surface and be easy to clean.
d) The floors of the storage facility must be cleaned and disinfected and a register kept.
e) The waste shall not be stored near patients or the food preparation area.
f) Sharps must be contained in rigid, puncture-proof, tamper-proof, and clearly marked
containers.
g) A plastic bag used as a liner in a disposable container or a reusable container shall have a
thickness of not less than 60 μm.
h) A waste generator must store HCRW other than pathological waste, sharps, and
pharmaceutical waste for not more than 90 days from the date of generation.
4. Acceptance
This document has been seen and accepted by:
Name Designation
Andrew Etzinger General Manager: Risk and Sustainability Division
Kerseri Pather General Manager: Sustainability Systems
Fiona Havenga Eskom Environmental Manager
Gabi Mkhatshwa Sustainability Manager: Research, Testing, and Development
Phindile Dlamini Chief Advisor: Transmission Environmental Management
Rudi Kruger Distribution Environmental Manager
Mohil Singh Environmental Manager (Group Capital)
Deidre Herbst Generation Environmental Manager
Deon Jeannes Nuclear Environmental Manager
Dave Lucas Environmental Management Corporate Specialist
Mpetjane Kgole Chief Advisor: Corporate Environmental Management
John Geeringh Senior Consultant Environmental Manager
Zoe Ngamlana Auditing Manager
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
5. Revisions
Date Rev. Compiler Remarks
Zama Mkhize and Waste Review of content and update to new
August 2021 5
Management Forum legislation and other requirements
Review of content and update to new
July 2018 4 Humbulani Ndou
legislation and other requirements
Review of content and update to new
July 2015 3 Beverley Monametsi
legislation and other requirements
Beverley Monametsi and Review of content and update to new
September 2011 2
Waste Task Team legislation and other requirements
Review of content and update to new
April 2009 1 Iris Cloete
Eskom Document Control format
New document in terms of policy
June 2006 0 Waste Management Forum
review process
6. Development team
The following people were involved in the development of this document:
Zama Mkhize – Risk and Sustainability Division
Humbulani Ndou – Generation Division
Riana Bothma – Research, Testing, and Development
Romi Bhimsan – Transmission Division
Mohil Singh – Group Capital Division
Florence Radebe – Group Capital Division
Mulalo Tshipetane – Group Capital Division
Nicoleen Smith – Eskom Rotek Industries
Jana Uys – Generation Division (Koeberg)
Annalie Lombard – Research, Testing, and Development
Anelia Bothma – Eskom Rotek Industries
Thalukanyo Nevhulaudzi – Research, Testing, and Development
Shamaine Thulasaie – Distribution Division
Charmaine Mare – Distribution Division
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
7. Acknowledgements
Thank you to all Environmental Steering Committee (ESC), development team, and EDC staff
members who worked relentlessly to ensure that the document would be adequately compiled and
representative of the Eskom business.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
Appendix A: Industry waste management plans (IndWMPs)
A.1 Industry waste management plans shall be developed and implemented to meet the
requirements for these general duties in respect of waste management:
a) Avoid the generation of waste. Where such generation cannot be avoided, minimise the toxicity
and amounts of waste that are generated.
b) Identify all waste streams that arise from the activities of the business.
c) Reduce, reuse, recycle, and recover waste as a first priority before disposal.
d) Where waste must be disposed of, ensure that the waste is pre-treated and disposed of in an
environmentally sound manner by the waste facility.
e) Manage the waste in such a manner that it does not endanger health or the environment or cause
a nuisance through noise, odour, or visual impacts.
f) Prevent any employee or person from contravening applicable environmental legislation.
g) Take reasonable measures to prevent the waste from being used for unauthorised purposes.
A.2 The industry waste management plans will, at a minimum, contain the following:
a) The amount of waste that is generated
b) Measures to prevent pollution or ecological degradation
c) Targets for waste minimisation through waste reduction, reuse, recycling, and recovery
d) Measures or programmes to minimise the generation of waste and the final disposal of waste
e) Measures or actions to be taken to manage waste
f) The phasing-out plans of the use of specified substances (for example, persistent organic
pollutants, such as PCB, asbestos, and ozone-depleting substances (ODS))
g) Opportunities for the reduction of waste generation through changes to packaging, product
design, or production processes
h) Mechanisms for informing the public about the impact of the waste-generating products or
packaging on the environment
i) The extent of any financial contribution to be made to support consumer-based waste reduction
programmes
j) The period that is required for implementation of the waste management plan
k) Methods for monitoring and reporting
l) The waste class and rating in order to determine the correct disposal method for the waste
m) Any other best practice that may be necessary to give effect to the requirements of the NEMWA
and regulations passed under it
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
Appendix B: Coal combustion products
“Coal combustion products” (CCPs) is the collective term for all residues arising from the combustion
of fossil fuels. This includes products from the boiler itself as well as the air pollution abatement
equipment installed. An array of such products, each with its unique characteristics, has evolved
over the past 40 years, as power utilities adapted their technology to comply with legislation
introduced to ameliorate the impact of coal combustion. Included among these are fly ash, bottom
ash, various types of flue gas desulphurisation, products such as gypsum, ammoniated fly ash, high
carbon fly ash from low NOx burners, Hg capture, fluidised bed combustion residue, etc. Currently,
Eskom CCPs are entirely fly ash, bottom ash, and gypsum. The flue gas desulphurisation technology
to be employed at the new build power stations such as Kusile and Medupi will add gypsum to the
list of CCPs.
B.1 Coal waste (coal discards)
Coal discards should be managed in accordance with the Position Paper on Management of Coal
Waste at Power Stations (ENV18-004).
B.2 Ash
A modern coal-fired power station with a total output of 3 600 MW will consume approximately
50 000 tons of coal every day. Depending on the coal quality, the calorific value (heat content), and
the ash content, stations can produce approximately 17 000 tons of ash per day. Almost 90% of the
ash produced in the generation process is called fly ash or pulverised fuel ash. The reason for this
is that the coal is pulverised into a very fine dust before being fed into the boilers to ensure efficient
combustion. Larger particles of ash, called coarse ash, that make up the rest of the ash produced at
the power station drop down from the furnace and collect at the bottom in the ash hopper of the
boiler.
Approximately 3,1 million tons of ash is sold per year to, among others, the cement industry, where
the ash is used as a cement extender. The ash consists of very fine, spherical particles and has
almost zero carbon content, high pozzolanic activity (or reactivity), and unusually high consistency.
In addition to its use as a cement extender during the manufacturing of cement, fly ash is successfully
used to enhance the quality and economy of concrete. Uses of fly ash include brick making and dam
building. Approximately 250 000 tons of ash from Lethabo Power Station, for instance, was exported
to Lesotho for the Katse Dam project. The fly ash that Eskom does not sell on site is stored in ash
dumps or dams that are controlled via the lining of trenches, monitoring of groundwater, and
rehabilitation of topsoil, but there is a risk of pollution.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
B.3 Gypsum
The potential requirement to adhere to more stringent limits on the gaseous emissions necessitates
the removal of SOx (oxides of sulphur) from flue gases during coal combustion. Subsequently, all
new stations will include flue gas desulphurisation technology. This technology requires the
introduction of a sorbent (usually limestone or dolomite) to reduce the amount of SO2 that is emitted.
Calcium from the limestone reacts with the SO2 to form calcium sulphite or calcium sulphate and
CO2. A by-product of the FGD process is gypsum. Gypsum has a commercial value and could be
sold on the market. Demand for such a product is currently being determined by the supply chain
operations (Commercial Department).
A study has been initiated to investigate the potential opportunities that will result in the use of this
resource. Initial findings indicate that construction and agriculture are the most suitable sectors for
gypsum commercialisation. It can be used for the manufacture of wallboard, plaster, and screeds,
as a set retarder for Portland cement, and for soil stabilisation. However, the use depends on the
nature, composition, and properties of the gypsum.
Eskom will continue to engage with industry to promote the use of CCPs and set internal targets to
encourage additional uses. This will be done in conjunction with the current key role players in the
market and will take Eskom’s strategy around supplier development and localisation into
consideration, with a specific focus on black-women-owned (BWO) companies.
B.4 Legislative requirements
The regulations under the Environment Conservation Act (ECA) as published in GN 1986
in GG August 1990 and as amended by GN 292 in GG February 2003
expressly exempted ash produced by, or resulting from, activities at an undertaking for the
generation of electricity under the provisions of the Electricity Act from being classified
as waste. There was, thus, no obligation for power stations to obtain a permit to dispose of ash or to
operate a disposal site for ash. At the time of construction of the ash dams and dumps of the currently
operational power stations, ash did not meet the legal definition of “waste” and did not require an
ECA section 20(1) permit.
Ash from combustion and gasification processes is identified as a waste stream for beneficial use
and is permitted for brick making, block making, production of cement, landfill capping, backfill in old
mine workings, inorganic fertiliser, soil ameliorant and conditioner, asphalt and other bituminous
mixtures, road construction, foundations, and bulking agent for compositing.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
The Department of Forestry, Fisheries, and the Environment (DFFE) promulgated regulations
regarding the exclusion of a waste stream or a portion of a waste stream from the definition of waste
in GNR 715 in July 2018. The purpose of these regulations is to prescribe the manner in which a
person or a category of persons may apply to the Minister for the exclusion of a waste stream or a
portion of a waste stream for beneficial use from the definition of waste and to exclude permitted
uses of a waste stream or a portion of a waste stream from the definition of waste as well as to
promote diversion of waste from landfill disposal to its beneficial use.
Eskom submitted an application to the DFFE in October 2018 and received approval for the fresh
and weathered ash emanating from 17 Eskom power stations. This is based on the definition of
waste as contained in the National Environmental Management: Waste Act . Eskom fresh
and weathered ash can only be utilised for beneficial uses of cement, geopolymers, filter
applications, zeolite production, metal and mineral extraction, mineral fibre production, road
construction, mine backfilling, treatment of acid mine drainage and soil amelioration, and brick and
block making.
The NEMWA has subsequently included ash in the definition of waste. However, Government Notice
November 2013, 7(1), provides that “a person who lawfully conducts a waste management
activity listed in this Schedule on the date of the coming into effect of this Notice may continue with
the waste management activity until such time that the Minister by notice in a Gazette calls upon
such a person to apply for a waste management licence”. Currently, existing lawful waste
management activities do not have to undergo an environmental impact assessment (EIA) process
or be licensed, until directed so by the Minister, in accordance with the transitional provisions in
section 82 of the NEMWA.
Ash disposal facilities are seen as section 21(g) water use activities (“disposing of waste in a manner
which may detrimentally impact on a water resource”); that is, they are regarded as an activity that
has the potential to negatively affect water resources. All water use activities need to be licensed in
terms of section 21(g) of the National Water Act. This will also apply to gypsum if some of it will be
dumped at the power station.
Fly ash material solidifies while suspended in the exhaust gases and is collected by electrostatic
precipitators or filter bags. The material consists mostly of silicon dioxide (SiO2) (which is present in
two forms: amorphous, which is rounded and smooth, and crystalline, which is sharp, pointed, and
hazardous), aluminium oxide (Al2O3), and iron oxide (Fe2O3). Fly ash, like soil, contains trace
concentrations of many heavy metals that are known to be detrimental to health in sufficient
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
Eskom Waste Management Standard Unique Identifier: 32-245
Revision: 5
Page:
quantities. These can leach into the ground or surface water and cause contamination. These
elements are, however, found in extremely low concentrations in fly ash.
Flue gas desulphurisation drastically removes sulphur dioxide from chimney emissions. Sulphur
dioxide is a colourless gas produced when fossil fuels such as coal and oil are burnt. It is extremely
harmful to the environment and one of the main chemicals that can cause acid rain. Sulphur dioxide
is harmful to plants and can damage trees. If sulphur dioxide emissions are cut down through the
use of technologies such as flue gas desulphurisation, we will come one step closer to a clean
environment.
B.5 Management requirements
a) Effective measures must be implemented to prevent groundwater pollution by ensuring that no
leachate pollutes groundwater.
b) Groundwater monitoring is to be done at and around the ash dams and dumps. Reviews of
groundwater monitoring results shall be undertaken. Based on the outcome, the appropriate
mitigation required shall be determined to ensure avoidance and control of groundwater
contamination.
c) Operational procedures and work instructions have been developed and implemented to ensure
correct management and operation of the dams/dumps. These will only need to be updated for
alignment with all relevant legislative requirements.
d) Further research shall be undertaken to ensure that both ash and FGD waste will be analysed
and classified to bring it under environmentally sound management practices.
Error! Unknown document property name.
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled, and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure that it is in line with the authorised version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the express consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg. No. 2002/015527/30.
The aim of the Health & Safety (H&S) specification is to provide principal contractor/s and suppliers
with:
compliance to legal and Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) H&S requirements.
contract.
NTCSA strives to exceed the minimum standards prevailing in the construction industry and requires
full commitment from all parties to be pro-active to achieve best H&S business practice.
This H&S Specification is intended for principal contractor and their contractors to develop a H&S
plan that meets the specified requirements.
2. Supporting Clauses
2.1 Scope
This H&S specification sets out the minimum legal and NTCSA requirements for construction work
that is specific to the scope of work, site, and type of project.
2.2 Purpose
To indicate to principal contractor the H&S requirements on the project, upon which their planning
for the management of H&S will be based on and thus produce their H&S plan.
2.3 Applicability
This specification is only applicable to the project as mentioned on the first page, title all principal
contractors, contractors, service providers, suppliers and all the activities and processes carried out
for and on behalf of PD.
This specification shall be implemented from the date of approval.
3. Normative/Informative References
Parties using this specification shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed below.
3.1 Normative
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
Standards – SANS)
3.2 Informative
[1] ISO 45001:2018, Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems-Requirements
[2] ISO 9001:2015 Quality Management Systems- Requirements
4. Definitions
Authorised person: a competent person who has been given permission in writing to perform
specific duties and responsibilities in terms of the Operating Regulations for High Voltage Systems.
Baseline risk assessment: (32-520) baseline operational risks refer to the H&S risks associated
with all standard processes, as well as routine and non-routine activities in the business.
Critical Lifts: (1) any lift weighing in excess of 20 tons, (2) any lift involving a crane suspended work
platform (man cage), (3) any lift over critical operating and/or process equipment and (4) any lift that
exceeds 85 % of the crane’s load chart (5) any lift that utilises more than one lifting device (Tandem
Lift).(6) Load transfers.(7) night lifting.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) Requirements: Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) requirements, which evolve
from directives, policies, standards, procedures, specifications, work instructions, guidelines, or
manuals.
Hazard identification: the identification and documenting of existing or expected hazards to the
health and safety of persons, which are normally associated with the type of construction work being
executed or to be executed.
Medical surveillance: a planned programme or periodic examination (which may include clinical
examinations, biological monitoring, or medical tests) of employees by an occupational health
practitioner or, in prescribed cases, by an occupational medicine practitioner.
Method Statement: is a written document detailing work procedures and sequences of operations.
On Site/Site: any workplace where the contractor or his employees perform construction related
work as agreed contractually with the client.
Planned Task Observation: an independent observation made during the planned period in which
the task is being executed.
Pre-Task Risk Assessment: a meeting held prior to the commencement of the day’s work with
relevant personnel (client representative included) associated with the task at hand.
Risk Assessment: a programme to determine any risk associated with any hazard at a construction
site in order to identify the steps needed to be taken to remove, reduce, or control such hazard.
H&S File: a file or other record in permanent form, containing the information on the H&S
management system during construction including all information relating to construction phase after
the handover to Client.
Safe Work Procedures: a series of specific steps that guide a worker through a task from start to
finish in a chronological order. Safe work procedures are designed to reduce the risk by minimizing
potential exposure.
5. Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
AIA Approved Inspection Authority
COIDA Compensation for Occupational Injuries and Diseases Act
CR Construction Regulations
CHSA Construction Health & Safety Agent
CWP Construction Work Permit
DMR Driven Machinery Regulations
DSTI Daily Safety Task Instruction
EA Environmental Authorization
ECO Environmental Control Officer
FAS Fall Arrest Systems
GSR General Safety Regulations
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
Abbreviation Explanation
RHCA Regulations for Hazardous Chemical Agents, 2020
H&S Health and Safety
HIRA Hazard identification and risk assessment
HV High Voltage
LDV Light Delivery Vehicles
LMI Lifting Machine Inspector
LME Lifting Machine Entity
LTIR Lost Time Incident Rate
NEC New Engineering Contract
NEMA National Environmental Management Act
NTCSA National Transmission Company South Africa
NQF National Qualifications Framework
OHNP Occupational Health Nursing Practitioner
OHS Act Occupational Health and Safety Act No.
OHS Occupational Health and Safety
ORHVS Operating Regulations for High Voltage Systems
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
PTO Planned Task Observations
RSA Republic of South Africa
SANAS South African National Accreditation System
SANS South African National Standards
SACPCMP South African Council for the Project & Construction Management Professions
SAQA South African Qualifications Authority.
SDS Safety Data sheets
SHEQ Safety, Health, Environment Quality
SETA Skills Education Training Authorities
SWP Safe Work Procedure
PD Project Delivery
VFL Visible Felt Leadership
6. Key Project Team
Manages the contract signed with the principal contractor and ensures that H&S specifications are
developed and issued with tender enquiries, and that the principal contractor’s H&S plan is approved
prior to commencement of work. He must ensure that applicable legal and other requirements are
complied with by the principal contractor and (if applicable) their contractors. The project manager,
thus takes the overall accountability of this project as
Is responsible for the overall management of the project design as well as ensuring the management
of the compliance of the completed works to the design during and after construction on site.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
Where a construction permit is required, the Agent shall act as the representative of the client on
issues of H&S. The duties of the client shall, as far as is reasonably practical, apply to the Agent.
The Agent shall approve the principal contractor H&S plan. He/she will be responsible for auditing
and ensuring compliance to legal requirements as per the condition of the CWP.
Provides assurance, advice, and support to the project in the management of the H&S issues on the
project. They will also assist in the development of project’s H&S Specifications which will be issued
with enquiry documents, and that the principal contractor’s H&S plan is submitted; evaluated and
approved. They will be responsible for auditing and ensuring compliance to legal requirements. The
H&S Senior Advisor shall approve the principal contractor H&S plan in all projects that does not have
a CWP.
7. Roles and Responsibilities
7.1 Visible Commitment
Visible commitment is essential in providing a safe work environment. managers, supervisors, and
employees at all levels must demonstrate their commitment by being proactively involved in the dayto-day operations, in particular H&S aspects of the project / contract.
A minimum of one (1) Visible Felt Leadership engagement (VFL) per month shall be conducted by
the contractor’s senior manager and the project manager shall be submitted to Client Project
Manager.
7.2 Designers
The designer of a structure must comply with Construction Regulations 6 and ensure that cognizance
is taken of ergonomic design principles and foreseeable constructability health and safety risks
during construction and life cycle of the structure.
7.3 Principal Contractor’s Accountabilities
a. The principal contractor shall comply with provisions of Construction Regulations 7.
b. Where a principal contractor procures the services of a contractor, the principal
contractor shall first inform the client. Such contractor shall also comply with relevant
sections of this H&S specification.
c. The principal contractor must demonstrate how activities of various contractors will be
coordinated to mitigate the risks.
d. The principal contractor shall ensure that his/her H&S plan is approved by the client
before gaining access to site. The same principle will apply to its contractor, where he/she
shall approve his/her contractors H&S plan.
e. A comprehensive & updated list of all contractors on site, also indicating the type of work
being done.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
f. The principal contractor shall coordinate, consolidate, and submit H&S performance and
that of contractors on the last day of each month to the client.
g. The principal contractor must ensure that their senior management and that of their
contractors conduct VFL, at least once a month.
h. The principal contractor must incorporate the client's induction into their induction and
induct their contractors before site access. The principal contractor shall keep all
induction material including registers.
8. Management and Supervision of Construction Work
a. The principal contractor shall comply with provisions of Construction Regulations 8.
b. The principal contractor shall appoint one (1) full-time competent construction manager
responsible for a single site. In a case where a construction manager is not available, an
alternate construction manager shall be appointed in writing for a specified duration.
c. Having considered the size of the site one or more assistant construction manager shall
be appointed in writing.
d. The principal contractor shall appoint Full time safety officer(s) in writing in accordance with
the provisions of Construction Regulations 8(5).
e. Construction supervisors and their assistance must be appointed in accordance with
Construction Regulations 8(7) & (8) respectively.
f. The appointed construction manager(s) and safety officer(s) shall be registered with
Sacpcmp.
The appointment of a registered or non-registered construction manager shall be
done in accordance with the provisions of the PD SACPCMP Registration Categories
attached on the Appendix A, annexure B.
9. Process for Monitoring
This document is under revision control and is valid for the duration of the works and will be
amended, as and when necessary, as requirements are being amended and therefore it will be
required for the principal contractor and contractor’s H&S plan to be amended accordingly.
Conformance to this document shall be via regular safety inspections and by Monthly Audits.
9.1 Related/Supporting Documents
Annexure A – Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) SHEQ Policy Statement 32-727
Annexure B – 20241010 SACPCMP Registration Categories
Annexure C – Contractor Manpower Sourcing and Verification
Annexure D – Pre-Task Planning Template
Annexure E – Flash Report template
Annexure F – Portable Toilet Specification
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
Annexure G – Contractor OHS File Handover Record Template
Annexure H – PD Loading and Offloading
Annexure I – Tender Evaluation Criteria
Annexure J – Site Readiness Evaluation Criteria
Annexure K - Health and Safety Requirements Acknowledgement
Annexure L - Appointments and Competencies_559-1762006876
Project Details
9.2 Scope of Work
The scope of the Execution phase is to implement and execute the approved designs for the
Pembroke Substation Non-lethal Fence, Lighting and Guardhouse Upgrade comprising of the
following:
plinth on either side for the prevention of vegetation grown/interference.
alarm detection.
day/night switch and sensors. Lighting to illuminate the prescribed area as set out in
Standard 240-139282493.
the continuity of the electrified fence. Replace Inner gate to convert from swing gate to
sliding gate.
extension.
Program details:
1. Anticipated date for the commencement of work on site: 01 August 2026
2. Project completion date or project duration: 31 July 2027
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
9.3 The Client Project Organogram:
Senior Manager
Projects
N. April
Programme Intergration
Manager Manager Senior Advisor H&S Safety Risk Manager ConstructionAgent H&S
N. Moodley N/A R. Leduma G. Small N/A
Project Manager Project Scheduler H&S Officer
M. Sinyolo Q. Tshatshu P. Maluleke
Project coordinator Site Supervisor Cost Engineer Risk Advisor
I. Rambevha A. Luzipho P. Sityebi N/A
Project Officer Quantity Survey
L. Modern B. Mwelase
9.4 Principal Contractor Organogram
The principal contractor shall provide an organisational organogram related to this project, listing all
the levels of responsibility from the Chief Executive down to the supervisors responsible for the
project. The organogram must list the names of appointees and their roles and responsibilities
including the statutory requirements appointees. All organograms shall be updated timeously when
appointments are changed and filed in the project H&S file.
For the duration of the contract, the principal contractor shall ensure that competent persons are
appointed in writing in terms of the requirements of the OHS Act and its Regulations; and
or other statutory and Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) requirements and that all their appointees are made
aware of their accountabilities and responsibilities and have been suitably trained in terms of their
appointment.
10. Notification of Construction Work
The principal contractor shall notify in writing in a form similar to annexure 2 the relevant Provincial
Director (Labour Centre) of the Department of Employment and Labour of the intention to carry out
construction work as defined in the Construction Regulations 4, at least 7 days before construction
work is to be carried out. No construction work shall commence without a proof of submission of
such notification to the client.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
11. Principal Contractor Appointments and Agreements
11.1 OHS Act Section 37 (2) (Legal) Agreement
a. An OHS section 37(2) agreement shall be signed between the client and the principal
contractor at the time of contract award.
b. The original copy of an OHS section 37(2) agreements shall be retained by the contractor
and a copy retained by the client project manager.
c. A copy of OHS section 37(2) agreement must form part of the respective contractor’s H&S
file.
11.2 CR 5(1)(k) Appointment
a. At contract award the principal contractor shall be appointed in writing by the PD Project
Manager for the construction site. Therefore, site access shall be granted once all the
contractual requirements are met.
b. A copy of CR 5(1)(k) appointment must form part of the respective contractor’s H&S file.
11.3 Designated employer, Sec 16(2) and other competencies appointments
The principal contractor shall ensure that a designated employer is appointed in writing for the for
the duration of the project.
12. Appointments and Competencies
The principal contractor shall ensure that competent persons are appointed in writing for OHS
statutory and non-statutory functions in line with their organisational structure. See Annexure L
The principal contractor shall ensure that the appointees understand their roles, responsibilities and
accountabilities. Copies of relevant appointments shall be kept on an OHS site safety file.
13. Training and Awareness
The scope of training shall include, but not limited to, the type of work being performed and the
relevant procedures. Where training is provided by the external service providers, the principal
contractor shall ensure that the service providers are accredited by SAQA or QCTO (Appropriate
qualifications and training registered in terms of the National Qualifications Framework Act No. ).
The principal contractor must demonstrate how he/she intends managing training/awareness within
their organisation including method of informing visitors and other persons entering the site about
hazards prevalent onsite.
Persons with foreign qualifications and registrations to convert these to equivalent local registrations
in that level or category (this shall be in accordance with SAQA and SETA requirements). The letter
from SAQA shall form part of the tender and site readiness submissions to PD.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
14. OHS Policy
The principal contractor shall develop an OHS Policy authorised by their Chief Executives that states
overall OHS objectives and commitment to improving OHS performance and must be conspicuously
displayed and shared with all stakeholders.
15. Compliance and Non-Compliance
The principal contractor shall comply with relevant legal and other requirements as part of the
contract. Expenses to the principal contractor, which result from such compliance, as well as any
site-specific requirements, will be for the principal contractors’ account.
Where the principal contractor appoints another contractor(s), the same roles, and responsibilities
in relation to the contractor as the client has in relation to the principal contractor shall apply.
The client reserves the right to stop work and issue a non-conformance report and/ Prohibition
notice(s) whenever H&S violations are observed from the principal contractors and their contractors,
after engaging and making both aware of such. Expenses incurred because of such work stoppage
and standing time shall be for the principal contractor’s account. Any nonconformances/findings/observations found during the audits/inspections on the contractor shall be
raised and discussed with the relevant principal contractor (with whom the contractor is contracted
with).
15.1 Legal and Other Requirements
The principal contractors shall comply with the relevant applicable legislation, specifications, and
standards in accordance with the scope of the project.
The principal contractor shall compile a legal register listing all applicable legislation and standards
that may have an impact on the scope of work that they are performing on the construction project.
The register shall be updated as and when there are amendments.
16. Hazardous Work by Children (Child Labour)
The Bill of Rights in the Constitution of the Republic of South Africa is clear on the rights of
children, especially when it comes to child labour. Child labour shall not be permitted in any of
NTCSA, PD sites.
17. Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment
The principal contractor shall develop a Risk Assessment in line with Construction Regulation 9 in
alignment to Eskom/NTCSA, 32-520 procedure.
Detailed Risk Assessment must be conducted to ensure that all the applicable scenarios are covered
and documented per site activities including practical controls. High Risk Activities
When the principal contractor and/or his/her contractors are working in an area where a high health
and safety hazard exists, the principal contractor shall:
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
a) Develop a SWP.
b) Ensure that permanent and adequate supervision is available for the duration of the work
performed.
c) Work within visible earths (Standard Line Construction Method).
d) Ensure the use of safety standbys in areas of high-risk activities, and activities that fall within
the scope of the permit to work system.
e) Provide, erect and maintain the required barricading, lighting, flags, flashing lights, or other
safety control equipment to enable operations to proceed in a safe manner.
f) Maintain defined access ways, which are clear of obstructions, to allow for emergency vehicle
entry.
g) Provide any temporary protective shielding required for protecting nearby operations from
the construction activities, at their own cost.
h) When Crossing roads, railway tracks and other power lines during stringing operations, the
principal contactor shall ensure that:
i). “Rugby poles” are properly erected at all road crossings and that the public is warned,
ii). Flagmen placed at strategic positions to warn traffic/ motorists.
iii). Whenever mobile cranes/ lifting machinery are operated onsite, the booms are retracted
and safe clearances from overhead power lines; communication lines or other overhead
obstructions are observed and maintained as per Electrical Machinery Regulations 19 &
21, Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) Procedure "Operating Regulations for High Voltage
Systems (ORHVS), 240-114967625" clause 5.03.6.3 (working in the close proximity to
live line/conductors).
iv). Supervisors are trained in the Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) ORHVS.
v). Detailed risk assessment shall be conducted prior the activities and a hierarchy of control
measures shall be considered before resorting to PPE. Where PPE are required, risk-
specific PPE shall be identified and issued to the specific team that will be working in the
close-proximity to live line/conductors.
i) Height restriction barriers/crossbars must be erected on both sides of the overhead power
lines, communication lines or other overhead obstructions. Establish the permitted safe
clearances in consultation with the owner of the line.
18. Operational Regulations for High Voltage Systems
a. To ensure the safety of workers, visitors and other persons who may be affected, the
operating regulations for high voltage systems shall apply during construction of high voltage
apparatus (construction of transmission/distribution lines) or working in live yard inside a
substation.
b. The principal contractor shall ensure that workers in prohibited areas inside a sub-station are
under supervision of an authorised person, under a work permit. When an authorised person
resigns from a company and is employed by another company, his authorisation shall expire
immediately.
c. The authorised person shall be present throughout the operations.
Reference: ORHVS, 240-114967625 and Power Delivery Operating Assessment,
Authorisation and Training Standard, 240-70413865.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
19. Costing for H&S
The principal contractor shall ensure that the submitted tender adequately makes provision for the
cost of H&S.
20. Site Access
The principal contractor shall not permit any person to enter the construction site where their health
and safety may be at risk. Notices at every entrance prohibiting the entry of unauthorised persons
shall be posted:
a. No one should enter the construction site without being inducted. The principal contractor
shall demonstrate how site access shall be manage on site.
b. Entering or leaving the site shall only take place at official access control points and may only
be done via the official designated walkways.
c. Where construction line is being constructed the principal contractor shall ensure that:
i). Members of the public are not allowed to be in the proximity where the activities are
being executed.
ii). Domestic animals are managed not to be in the proximity where the activities are being
executed.
21. Signage
Symbolic safety signs shall comply with the requirements of SANS 1186.The display of the following
signage is mandatory:
a. The principal contractor sign shall be posted at their site offices and shall have the name
and contact details of the: Construction Supervisor; Health and Safety Manager/ Officer; First
Aider; Health and Safety Representative and Evacuation warden, Construction Health and
Safety Agent and Construction Permit (where applicable). Emergency numbers, principal
contractor name (including a logo), construction manager and contact number.
b. The Contractors shall provide signage in accordance with the scope and work area.
c. All safety and warning signs shall be always obeyed.
22. Principal Contractor’s Site Facilities
Site facilities shall be established and maintained by the principal contractor. The facilities include
but are not limited to the following (refer to OHS Act, Construction Regulations 30). See also
Annexure F for portable toilet specifications. The design of the toilet should not expose employees
to splashes of other people’s human waste.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
23. Public Safety
Principal contractors shall in their H&S plan, factor how they would safeguard members of the public
against their activities during the project.
24. Project and Site Rules
24.1 Life Saving Rules
The Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) Life Saving rules applies to NTCSA employees a, agents,
consultants, contractors, and visitors. Visitors to NTCSA sites should also respect and adhere to
these rules as applicable and could be instructed to leave the NTCSA premises with immediate effect
should they refuse to do so. Failure to adhere to these rules will be considered a serious
transgression and the expectation is that disciplinary action be taken by the employer. The client
reserves the right to suspend the contractor’s activities pending the outcome of the disciplinary
processes.
These rules are implemented to prevent serious injury or death of any employee, labour broker or
contractor working in any area within Eskom Holdings (NTCSA)
The rules are:
Rule description of rule
Open, isolate, test, earth and create an equipotential zone before
Touch
To ensure a safe electrical work environment, no person may work/operate on, around or near
any electrical network, line or apparatus, electrically connected to the power system and/or
Rule 1
electrically charged and/or not electrically charged unless if trained, authorised, competent and
supervised. The equipotential zone is only applicable for work being done on medium and high
voltage apparatus.
(That is plant, any plant operating above 1000 V)
Hook up at height
Working at height means any work performed above a stable work surface or where a person
Rule 2 puts himself/herself in a position where he/she exposes himself/herself to a fall from or into.
Working at height is a significant part of work in NTCSA and is regarded as a high-risk activity,
as a result, all precautions must be taken to prevent incidents while working at height.
Buckle up
Where required, the proper wearing of seat belts for any driver, operator and passenger is
Rule 3 mandatory in all vehicles/equipment when driving and/or travelling for NTCSA business
purposes.
.
Be sober
No person who is under the influence or who appears to be under the influence of intoxicating
Rule 4
liquor or drugs will be permitted to enter or remain on a NTCSA site conduct NTCSA business
or drive/operate a vehicle/equipment for NTCSA business purposes.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
Ensure that you have a permit to work
Rule 5 No person shall work without the required Permit to Work (PTW). This includes driver’s license
and other statutory permits
Ensure safe live working
To ensure safe live work: Each live worker shall ensure all live work basic principles are adhered
Rule 6 to, as outlined (for the method being used) in the High Voltage Live Working Standard; Observe
and maintain the Minimum Approach Distance; Only perform live work and tasks that are
authorised for and that are documented in the respective Task Manual.
24.2 Smoking
Smoking is only permitted at designated areas in accordance with the requirements of the
smoking policy (32-1126: Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) Smoking Policy). Add to the appendix A.
24.3 Cellular Phones
A contractor shall develop and implement a risk-based cell phone policy for a particular
construction site. Cellular phones shall not be used in areas where their usage is prohibited.
24.4 Fire Extinguishers
A Principal Contractor shall have a layout plan (site offices, laydown area) where fire-fighting
equipment is located. Fire extinguishers should be inspected on a monthly basis and be
maintained annually by a competent service provider. These records should be kept in the project
safety file.
24.5 Vehicles and Traffic Rules
a. The principal contractor shall ensure that the driver of the vehicle has a valid driver’s licence.
b. Principal contractor shall ensure that drivers and passengers wear seatbelts while travelling
in a motor vehicle.
c. No passengers shall be permitted to be transported at the back of trucks or light delivery
vehicles (LDV).
d. Passengers shall only be permitted to be transported at the back of such vehicles if fitted with
a specially designed crew cab with appropriate seating and seat belt per passenger, by the
manufacturer and manufacturer appointed fitment centre. The test certificate shall be
submitted for consideration to the client.
e. Where a vehicle licence condition stipulates the number of persons to be transported on the
vehicle, such number shall not be exceeded.
f. The principal contractor shall ensure that the vehicles are inspected daily and maintained
regularly as per the manufacture’s specification.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
24.6 Substance and Drug Abuse Management
a. The principal contractor must develop a substance abuse management procedure to manage
substance abuse on site. The procedure shall be in line with the client substance abuse
management procedure were applicable. Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) Substance Abuse
Procedure 32-37.
b. All testing equipment shall be calibrated as per the manufacturer’s recommendation and the
calibration be available on the safety file.
c. The alcohol testers must be trained and appointed in writing.
25. Pre-Task Risk Assessment
The principal contractor shall conduct a daily pre-task risk assessment with employees involved with
the task, such as DSTI. This assessment will be the basis of daily pre-job briefings or toolbox talks
before work begins, highlighting critical steps from the SWP to ensure safety. Proof of
communication and confirmation of understanding will be recorded and kept at the job site during
execution. The signed pre-task risk assessment form shall be filed in the safety file.
26. Pre-task Planning
Upon receipt of the task for the day, the principal contractor manager or his/her assignee the site
supervisor, shall perform a pre-task planning in accordance with Line Construction; Substation
Works and Telecommunication Projects, 559-1432317009 Rev 1, Pre-Task Planning Template, see,
Annexure D.
27. Safe Work Procedures / Method Statements and Practices
The principal contractor shall compile a project/ site-specific SWP for all the high-risk activities as
identified in the risk assessment and scope of work, which will be submitted to client. Proof that the
SWP’s are discussed with all employees on site should be available in the site safety file.
28. Planned Task Observations (PTO)
The construction manager / supervisor shall conduct Planned Task Observations (PTO).
PTOs shall be conducted in such a way that the employee is observed against the actual steps of
the safe work procedure (SWP)/ method statements and marked against compliance with each step.
This will assist in determining employee competence and compliance. Record shall be kept. The
findings raised on the PTOs must be addressed/discussed with all employees on site to ensure
conformance and adherence to safe work procedures and method statements.
The minimum items that must be in the PTO but not limited to:
a. Project name.
b. Title of the SWP, reference number and revision number.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
c. Specific activity.
d. Steps.
e. Safety Steps.
f. Critical steps.
g. Follow-up action.
h. Observation conducted by (full name).
i. Designation (e.g., supervisor).
j. Individual/Team observed names.
k. Date of observation.
l. Signature.
29. Work at Elevated Positions and Roof Work
1. The Principal Contractor shall ensure that all work performed at elevated positions conform to
the requirements of the Construction Regulations, the relevant Unit Standard (US) and 32-418
(Working at Height Procedure).
2. A fall protection plan, which must be based on the tower design supported by the required risk
assessments will be compiled, implemented, reviewed, and communicated to all employees
working at heights.
3. The principal contractor shall review their risk assessment and fall protection plan as required,
at intervals to be determined by the principal contractor, and taking into consideration:
a. Incident trend analysis, or new/revised technology.
b. Changes to scope of work, changes to work methods/procedures/equipment, etc.
4. The Contractors shall stop all persons working in elevated positions during periods of inclement
weather.
5. Safety belts are not allowed to be used in Eskom Holdings (NTCSA). An appropriate full body
safety harness shall be worn when working at an elevated position, refer to SANS 50361. As per
20250529_Practice Note - MultiQuip FAS units (Ironman-Unit)_signed no IRONMAN FAS units
allowed on site.
6. Working in elevated positions shall only be carried out under the supervision of a competent
person in accordance with US 229995.
7. Fall arrest/protection plan and equipment shall be implemented where fall prevention is not
possible:
a. Fall protection equipment shall comply with Unit Standards and other recognised
international standards.
b. The Principal Contractor and/or his contractor shall compile a fall protection equipment
inspection, testing and maintenance procedure (Refer to SANS 50365 and manufactures
requirements for safe use and for inspections).
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
8. Provision must be made to prevent objects and/or material from falling from elevated areas and
the protection of persons working below. A drop zone shall be established with barricading and
necessary signs.
9. An Engineer shall do a design and calculations for all scaffolding where applicable.
29.1 Ladders (Portable)
a) Ladders used on the site shall comply with the OHS Act and Regulations, the relevant
SANS standards, or other recognised international standards.
b) Damaged ladders shall be clearly marked and quarantined and removed from the project
site.
c) Prior to work being performed, an adequate risk assessment shall be conducted, and
work shall be conducted in accordance with General Safety Regulation 6 and 13A and
Construction Regulation 10 of the OHS Act
29.2 Training and authorization
a) Every employer shall ensure that no person engages in any activity in relation to work at
heights unless they are competent to do so.
b) Only training providers that use competent training instructors and assessors who are
SETA-Accredited and SAQA-registered in terms of the relevant unit standards shall be
used.
c) All persons who work at heights or who are required to do rescue at heights shall receive
three days of Fall Arrest System (FAS) training and two days of rescue training in
accordance with the Unit standards 22998 and 229995.
d) The Contractor must ensure that all persons who work at heights and those who will be
required to do rescue at heights shall receive training according to the relevant unit
standards. As a minimum, individuals who work at height and are not responsible for
performing a rescue must undergo three days of FAS training (Unit Standard 229998)
and rescuers must further undergo two days rescue training in accordance with the Unit
Standard 229995. Rescuers must be appointed in writing for the site/project.
e) Official FAS training shall not have an expiry date on the certificate.
f) Only the training date shall be indicated on the certificate.
g) Official rescue training shall expire every three years from the date of issue.
h) The principal contractor shall ensure that there is a Level 2 First Aider trained for every
team working at height. See Annexure L
30. Occupational Health and Hygiene
The principal contractors and contractors shall identify the occupational stressors which could
include exposure to chemical and biological hazards, noise, dust, vibration, heat, etc., to which any
person may be exposed because of his work activities.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
30.1 Occupational Hygiene Management Program
Principal Contractors and contractors shall develop, implement, and maintain an occupational
hygiene management programme to ensure that the occupational hygiene stressors are identified
assessed (monitored) and controlled. The occupational hygiene programme shall include, but not
limited to the following elements:
a. Occupational health risk assessment as a foundation.
b. Occupational hygiene monitoring program. Monitoring shall be performed by a SANAS
accredited AIA.
c. Communication of occupational hygiene results and requirements.
d. Conduct awareness trainings and keep registers; and
e. Keep Occupational Hygiene surveys reports for a period of 40 years.
Where there are occupational hygiene stressors, principal contractors and contractors shall ensure
that occupation surveys are conducted to assess stressors. These programs may include but not
be limited to:
a. Hearing Conservation Programme.
b. Heat and cold stress Management Program.
The principal contractors and contractors shall report to the Department of Employment and Labour
on occupational hygiene milestones (e.g., crystalline silica). Evidence of reporting and copies of
such reports shall be made available to the client senior advisor H&S / H&S officer.
Copies of all occupational hygiene surveys conducted by the principal contractor and contractor shall
be submitted to PD Management/Occupational Hygiene Practitioners for information and record
keeping.
The principal contractor shall provide and adhere to effective monitoring procedures. These
procedures shall include the planning, carrying out and recording of the results of the measurement
programme. This is to confirm the effectiveness of the implemented control measures, and the
results shall be made available to the Contracts Manager/Employer’s Representative on request.
30.2 Medical Surveillance Programme
The Principal Contractor and contractor shall ensure that their employees are registered on a
medical surveillance programme and are in possession of a valid medical fitness for duty certificate
specific to the construction work to be performed. The Fitness for duty certificate shall be in form of
Construction Regulation, Annexure 3, and be relevant to the type of work (risk based) that the
employee will be exposed to.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
The principal contractor and contractors shall ensure that employees have undergone pre-entry
medical examination before starting work on site. No employee shall access site without a valid
medical fitness for duty certificate.
The principal contractor and contractors shall ensure that employees undergo a periodic medical
examination as and when a need arise.
The Principal Contractor and contractors shall ensure that employees undergo an exit medical
examination at the end of the project or when the service of the specific employee has been
terminated or has expired.
30.3 Pre-Existing / Current Medical Condition
30.3.1 Disclosure of pre-existing injuries or medical conditions
A pre-existing condition as defined by the OHS Incident Management Definitions and Classification
Parameters Standard (240-131838225), is a medical condition/medical impairment as a result of an
incident arising out of, and in the course of employment, shall be considered:
a) Non-work-related if the incident arises solely because of a pre-existing medical
condition/medical impairment and if a worker without such a condition/medical impairment
would not have suffered such an incident; or
b) Work-related if the incident arises where the pre-existing condition/medical impairment may
have been a contributing factor.
Pre-existing medical conditions can include health issues such as cancer, diabetes, lupus,
depression, acne, hypertension, asthma, arthritis, ulcerative [Allergies] colitis etc or just about any
other health condition such as previous medical operational condition in any part of the body.
An injury are any old injuries that existed prior to the work injury that may or may not have fully
healed. Some workplace environments could aggravate pre-existing conditions even if they would
not necessarily have caused a new condition in an otherwise healthy individual. Examples may
include amongst others, traumatic injury worsening back pain, joint pain (condition), sore neck, knee
injuries etc.
30.3.2 A prospective employer / Supplier expectations/ duties
A prospective employer / supplier shall:
a) request a prospective worker to disclose all pre-existing injuries or medical conditions existing
during the period of the employment process that could reasonably be expected to be
aggravated by performing their employment related duties.
b) request disclosure in writing and this request must be accompanied by details of the nature
of the duties that are subject to the employment.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
c) advise prospective workers that if they knowingly supply false or misleading information, they
will not be entitled to compensation or damages under the Compensation for Occupational
Injuries and Diseases Act, Act for any event that aggravates the non-disclosed
pre-existing injury or condition.
d) ensure that pre-existing or current condition is part of:
i). Individual employment contract. Because the contract defines the terms and
conditions of employment
ii). Included in the employment induction.
iii). Person Job Specification shall be developed to have a portion where the individual
when visiting the occupational medical practitioner, it has been completed by the
employer, employee and the medical practitioner can complete the document.
iv). The employee shall reveal any pre-existing or current medical condition to the
Occupational Medical Practitioner prior the assessment.
v). Part of toolbox talk at least monthly, and awareness conducted more often, and
vi). Records shall be kept.
30.3.3 A prospective contractor employee duty
A prospective employee must, where requested in writing by a prospective employer, disclose all
pre-existing injuries or medical conditions of which they are aware of, that could reasonably be
expected to be aggravated by performing the employment related duties. If the prospective
employee is engaged before making the disclosure (or being requested to make the disclosure),
his or her entitlement to compensation is unaffected.
However, if the prospective employee does not disclose pre-existing medical condition or injury,
this may have an impact on the future management of incidents in particular the work relatedness
or not of an incident which may be attributed or not to pre-existing conditions.
30.3.4 Key considerations for employers
Employers considering implementing changes to their employment conditions and processes in
relation to these amendments shall note:
a) it is the prospective employer's duty to request disclosure of pre-existing injuries or medical
conditions from prospective workers during the pre-employment, periodic and post
screening process, and such information shall be kept confidential.
b) when providing details of the nature of the duties that are subject to the employment, it is
important that this information is accurate and provides specific details of the nature of the
duties. The prospective employee must receive information that will enable them to make
an informed decision about whether their pre-existing injury or condition might be
aggravated by the duties.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
c) if the Workers' Compensation Commissioner has previously provided a copy of the
employee's claims history summary the employer shall not:
i). disclose to anyone else the contents of or information contained in the
summary.
ii). give access to the document to anyone else.
iii). use the contents of or the information contained in the summary for any
purpose other than for the purposes of the employment process (penalties
apply).
d) changes to employment conditions and processes should be made in consultation with the
employer's human resources or advisor and employee representative. Employers who may
have queries concerning equal employment condition and processes should seek
independent advice.
e) employers shall keep accurate records relating to this disclosure as this information will be
requested where applicable during the claim determination process.
f) The employer shall follow their own disciplinary procedure and share the outcome with the
client.
Note:
I. The employer shall ensure that the employees are not exposed or expected to execute
an activity that will exacerbate the pre-existing or current medical condition. Risk
assessment shall be conducted to determine the area where the individual shall be
expected to execute the duties.
II. The pre-existing or current medical condition shall be applicable to new or current
employees within a specific employer.
III. The employer shall manage all the pre-existing or current medical condition (this
include referrals medical conditions) as per legal requirements as all information shall
be kept private and confidential all the time.
30.4 Emergency Care
A list of emergency numbers (local emergency numbers and Eskom Holdings (NTCSA)
ER24(084 124/010 205 3400) numbers) shall be posted where it is visible in the office’s places such
as information H&S board, eating area etc. The principal contractor and contractor(s) shall ensure
that all employees are familiar with the emergency numbers. Where the principal contractor or/and
contractor(s) has established their own contract with a specific service provider, those numbers must
be part of the induction and be used in conjunction with local or Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) numbers.
The principal contractor must make clear to the employees that in any event one of the numbers
must be used or the combination to ensure that the life of the individual is preserved.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
30.5 Employee Assistance Programs (EAP)
The contractor will engage the local clinics on HIV/AIDS Awareness programme. This will include
voluntary counselling and testing (VCT) of individuals, with chronic illnesses such as diabetes;
hypertension; HIV/AIDS awareness training. Ensure access to ongoing support for affected
individuals. The Contractor shall communicate the programme to all personnel.
30.6 Rehabilitation
The principal contractor and contractor(s) shall ensure rehabilitation of employees injured where
rehabilitation is required.
The treating Doctor/Hospital will recommend and refer. The principal contractor must comply with
recommendations, communicate with employee and provide transport according to the planned
appointment.
The process shall continue until the rehabilitation of an employee is declared fit by the
Doctor/Hospital.
30.7 Compensation of Occupational Injuries and Diseases Act (COIDA)
The principal contractor and contractor(s) shall submit a valid letter of good standing with the
compensation fund or a licensed compensation insurer relevant for the construction sector.
31. Emergency Preparedness and Response
a) The principal contractor shall provide a site-specific emergency preparedness and
response plan of which it shall include the specific activities being executed for site and
offices and submit this plan to the client for review.
b) The Emergency Preparedness Plans must be relevant to the scope of works and to the
prevailing surrounding environmental risks.
c) The principal contractor shall ensure that all the employees are fully conversant with this
plan.
d) The Principal Contractor shall plan, conduct emergency drills at specific intervals and
identify areas for improvement. The report shall be written and action plan where
applicable be developed and all the records shall be made available for inspection/audit
by the client and/or authorities.
e) When preparing worksite Emergency Preparedness Plans, cognisance must be made
as to the locality of the site and the response time for the emergency services. Where
sites are remote, contractor management shall ensure that enough employees are
trained in the various disciplines to be able to afford prompt response attention.
32. Fire Safety
Contractors shall develop a fire safety procedure for the office/ campsite, which must meet the
requirements of the local authority fire department and Section 9 of the Environmental Regulations
for Workplaces.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any
manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No
2021/539129/30
NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474
Revision: 1
Page: of 40
33. Site plans
The principal contractor must develop a comprehensive site layout plan with the following as a
Cell A3: Occupational Health and Safety Baseline risk assessment template
Tenderer’s / Supplier’s name: ………………………………………………. Tender Ref number: ………………………………….
Upgrade for pembroke substation
Signature
Indicate with an
105658000 (x) as applicable
Specification or (-) if not
Applicable
Pre-contract award quality requirements x
(*Select Only Applicable Category). NB: Not more than one category must be selected. Also indicate
whether site assessment is applicable.
Category 1 (refer to clause 3.5.-105658000) -
Category 2 (refer to clause 3.5.-105658000) -
Category 3 (refer to clause 3.5.-105658000) x
Category 4 (refer to clause 3.5.-105658000) -
Main Supplier and Sub-supplier Capability and Capacity Assessment (refer to clause 3.-105658000) -
3 post-contract award(eskom)
Title: Supplier Quality Management: Document Identifier: 240-105658000
Alternative Reference QM 58
Number:
Area of Applicability: Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd
Functional Area: Quality Management
Revision: 3
Total Pages: 28
Next Review Date: October 2024
Disclosure Controlled Disclosure
Classification:
Compiled by Supported by Functional Authorized by
Responsibility
SA Sambo P Dondashe L Meyer K Pather
Chief Advisor Middle Manager Acting Senior General Manager
Quality Quality Manager Quality Risk and
Management Management Management Sustainability
Date: 15/10/2021 Date: 15/10/2021 Date: 15/10/2021 Date: 17 October 2021
EDC TN Formatted 15.10.2021
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
Content
. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 3
2. Supporting Clauses .................................................................................................................. 3
2.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................... 3
2.1.1 Purpose ................................................................................................................. 3
2.1.2 Applicability ........................................................................................................... 3
2.1.3 Effective date ......................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Normative/Informative References ................................................................................... 3
2.2.1 Normative .............................................................................................................. 3
2.2.2 Informative............................................................................................................. 3
2.3 Definitions ........................................................................................................................ 4
2.4 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................... 5
2.5 Roles and Responsibilities ............................................................................................... 6
2.6 Process for Monitoring ...................................................................................................... 6
2.7 Related/Supporting Documents ........................................................................................ 6
3. Pre-Contract Award: Quality Requirements .............................................................................. 7
3.1 Supplier and Sub-Supplier Quality Management System Requirements .......................... 7
3.2 Quality Plan ...................................................................................................................... 8
3.3 Contract Quality Plan........................................................................................................ 8
3.4 Quality Control Plan ....................................................................................................... 10
3.5 Pre-Contract Award: Quality Requirement ...................................................................... 13
3.6 Main Supplier and Sub-supplier Capability and Capacity Assessment ........................... 16
3.7 Post-Contract Award ...................................................................................................... 17
3.7.1 Contract Execution .............................................................................................. 17
3.7.2 Supplier Quality Performance Monitoring Phase ................................................. 18
3.7.3 Supplier Quality Audit .......................................................................................... 18
3.8 Standard Conditions ....................................................................................................... 19
3.8.1 Rights of Access .................................................................................................. 19
3.8.2 Eskom Rights to Information ................................................................................ 20
3.8.3 Preservation ........................................................................................................ 21
3.8.4 Quality Audits Related Conditions ....................................................................... 25
3.8.5 Management of Nonconformities and Nonconforming Outputs Identified by
Eskom ................................................................................................................. 25
3.8.6 Special Processes ............................................................................................... 26
4. Acceptance ............................................................................................................................. 27
5. Revisions ................................................................................................................................ 27
6. Development Team ................................................................................................................ 27
7. Acknowledgements ................................................................................................................ 28
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
The intention of this specification is to specify and describe the minimum quality requirements for all
existing and potential Eskom suppliers and define the quality criteria for the selection, evaluation,
vendor registration, management, monitoring, assessment and auditing of suppliers. Eskom’s
position is to partner with suppliers who fully demonstrate commitment to the development,
implementation, and maintenance of a quality management system (QMS) that conforms to the
requirements of ISO 9001 standard. The priority is to encourage suppliers to continually improve
their QMS and enhance service delivery by implementing and conforming to the standard.
2. Supporting Clauses
2.1 Scope
2.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this specification is to outline the requirements according to which suppliers shall
develop,
implement,
maintain, and
continually improve
a quality management system (QMS) based on ISO 9001, which should form the basis for conformity
to Eskom quality requirements and continually adhere to them throughout the duration of a contract
2.1.2 Applicability
This specification shall apply throughout Eskom Holdings Limited divisions, its subsidiaries,
suppliers, and sub-suppliers and shall form part of all Eskom requests for information (RFI)/ requests
for quotation (RFQ)/ requests for proposal (RFP), including contracts for the procurement of products
and services.
2.1.3 Effective date
Date of authorisation of the specification
2.2 Normative/Informative References
Parties using this document shall apply the most recent edition of the documents listed in the
following paragraphs.
2.2.1 Normative
[1] ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems – Requirements
[2] ISO 10005 Quality Management Systems – Guidelines for Quality Plans.
2.2.2 Informative
[3] ISO 9000 Quality Management Systems – Fundamentals and Vocabulary
[4] 32-727: Safety, Health, Environment, and Quality (SHEQ) Policy
[5] ISO 10006 Quality Management Systems – Guidelines for Quality Management in Projects
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
[6] ISO 9004 Quality Management – Quality of an Organisation – Guidance to Achieve Sustained
Success
[7] 32-1033: Eskom’s Procurement and Supply Chain Management Policy
[8] 32-1034: Eskom’s Procurement and Supply Chain Management Procedure
[9] PPPFA: Preferential Procurement Policy Framework Act, 2000 (Act No. )
[10] CIDB 1004: Best Practice Guideline A4: Evaluating Quality in Tender Submissions
[11] 240-12248652 Supplier Quality Management: List of Tender Returnables
[12] IAEA Safety Standard GS-R-3.1 Application of the Management System for Facilities and
Activities
[13] SANS 10845-1 Construction Procurement Part1: Processes, Methods and Procedures
2.3 Definitions
The vocabulary of ISO 9000 and the following definitions apply in the application of this specification.
2.3.1 Component: a constituent part of the product or sub-assembly of the product. The product
may comprise multiple individual components
2.3.2 Contract Quality Plan: a document of the supplier’s process for delivering the level of quality
required by the contract. It is a framework for the contractor’s process for delivering quality.
Purpose of a CQP is to outline how the results defined in the specifications will be achieved.
2.3.3 Hold Point: a predetermined stage in the quality control plan (QCP) beyond which work/
manufacturing shall not proceed without the attendance of, and written authorisation of, an
Eskom representative or Eskom inspection agency, whichever is applicable.
2.3.4 Intervention Points: those control points indicated by the various controlling bodies
concerned with the implementation of a specific QCP/ ITP. These can be in the form of
inspection, hold points, surveillances, witnesses, reviews and verifications.
2.3.5 Inspection Agency: an organisation or person appointed by Eskom for the purpose of
performing quality assurance/ quality control, monitoring, inspection and/ or expediting
services.
2.3.6 Level 1 Plant Items: equipment, whose failure has an effect on personnel safety and/ or
health, causes an environmental incident, cause a huge production loss or major equipment
damage. Equipment that are safety/ redundancy/ protective device or covered by statutory
regulations requirements.
2.3.7 Level 2 Plant Items: equipment, whose failure impacts plant availability and/or reliability,
causes significant costs or secondary damage.
2.3.8 Level 3 Plant Items: equipment that does not impact on personnel safety and/ or health,
environmental, cost, availability and/ or reliability of plant.
2.3.9 Nonconformity: a deficiency in material, composition, characteristic, or performance that
renders the quality of an item, component, or product unacceptable or indeterminate. The
term also covers a deficiency in, or deviation from/non-adherence to, the quality management
system requirements, prescribed production processes, and/or related documentation such
as procedures and instructions.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
2.3.10 Quality Plan: specification of the actions, responsibilities and associated resources to be
applied to a specific object.
2.3.11 Quality Control Plan: a document specifying the activities to be inspected throughout the
execution of the project, inclusive of test methods, procedures, and acceptance criteria (This
term is equivalent to QIP and ITP).
2.3.12 Requirement: the need or expectation that is stated, generally implied, or obligatory.
Requirements are generally specified in the purchase order and/or contract documentation,
but may not be limited to these.
2.3.13 Primary Plant (Power Plant): primary plant include High Voltage equipment situated inside
the control room (breakers, bus-bars, CT’s, VT’s and transformers).
2.3.14 Secondary Plant (Control Plant): secondary plant includes all equipment used to control
and protect the HV equipment on the primary plant side. (Protection, metering, AC/DC and
tele-control).
2.3.15 Special Process: is any production or service process which generates products or services
which cannot be measured, monitored, or verified prior to delivery and use.
2.3.16 Supplier: is a current or potential supplier, vendor, contractor, consultant, or service provider.
A supplier may be a natural or legal person and includes any employee acting within the
course and scope of his/her employment or any agent or manager acting for, or on behalf of,
or in the interests of, the person registered as supplier on the Eskom supplier database.
2.3.17 Sub-supplier: an organisation that provides a product/service to the supplier and/or that
enters into a subcontract and assumes some of the obligations of the supplier or prime
contractor.
2.3.18 Witness Point: a predetermined stage in the quality control plan where and inspection
activity will take place. Work may proceed, provided Eskom or its inspection agency has been
formally notified and confirmed that inspection is waived.
2.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
AIA Approved Inspection Authority
CA Corrective Action
CQP Contract Quality Plan
FIDIC Federation Internationale Des Ingenieurs- Conseils
FMECA Failure Mode, Effects and Criticality Analysis
HAZOP Hazard and Operability Study
ISO International Organisation for Standardisation
ITP Inspection and Test Plan
NC Nonconformity
NDT Non Destructive Testing
PMI Positive Material Identification
QCP Quality Control Plan
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
Abbreviation Explanation
QMS Quality Management System
PQP Project Quality Plan
RFI Request for Information
RFQ Request for Quotation
RFP Request for Proposal
SHEQ Safety, Health, Environment, and Quality
SETA Skills Education Training Authorities
WPS Welding procedure specifications
WQR Welder’s Qualification Record
2.5 Roles and Responsibilities
Eskom Quality representative/ professional will select applicable requirements for existing and
potential Eskom suppliers using Form A (Tender and Contract Quality Requirements for Supplier
Quality Management: Specification 240-105658000/ QM 58 and Quality Requirements for ISO 9001
Standard).
The existing and/ or potential suppliers must complete, sign and return Form A with the other
returnable as listed in the List of Tender Returnable document (240-12248652). Other roles and
responsibilities for this standard are defined within the text of this specification.
2.6 Process for Monitoring
The application of this specification throughout Eskom shall be audited as per the management
system audit schedule.
2.7 Related/Supporting Documents
The documents superseded by this specification: all divisional and business unit supplier quality
requirements standards and/or specifications.
Forms and templates:
[1] 240-68099512 Tender and Contract Quality Requirements for Supplier Quality Management
Specification 240-105658000/ QM 58 and Quality Requirements for ISO 9001 Standard (Form
A)
[2] 240-109253698 Template for a Typical Contract Quality Plan
[3] 240-109253302 Quality Control Plan/Inspection and Test Plan
[4] 240-126469599 Method Statement Template.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3. Pre-Contract Award: Quality Requirements
The quality assessment criteria and Form A of this specification will be selected and completed by
an Eskom Quality representative/ professional who will identify the applicable supplier quality
requirements to be met.
Form A of this specification must also be completed and signed by the supplier responding to an
Eskom invitation to tender, in order to acknowledge and accept Eskom Supplier Quality requirements
as per this specification and ISO 9001 Standard or any additional quality requirements specific to
the scope of work.
3.1 Supplier and Sub-Supplier Quality Management System Requirements
3.1.1 The supplier and sub-supplier shall develop, implement, maintain and improve a formal QMS
that conforms to the latest ISO 9001 standard or any applicable standard of QMS (latest
applicable revision) and in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
3.1.2 Such a formal system shall consist of the appropriate documented information required by
ISO 9001 and may include a quality manual, quality plans, work procedures, work
instructions, method statements, work flow documentation, etc., as the case may be. This
requirement constitutes the most basic QMS requirements.
3.1.3 Unless specifically excluded from the quality list of tender returnable, as per the categories of
quality requirements (Category 1, 2, 3, or 4), such a QMS shall carry a valid ISO 9001
certificate from an accredited certification body, as indicated in the applicable Eskom
invitation (this requirement applies equally to both the supplier and any/ all manufacturing
third-party organisations mentioned above).
3.1.4 Unless specifically excluded in the quality list of tender returnable, as per the categories of
quality requirements (Category 1, 2, 3, or 4), the supplier shall have a fully developed,
documented, implemented, reviewed and maintained QMS that complies with the
requirements of ISO 9001 standard or any applicable standard of QMS. In the event that the
main supplier invariably requires the assistance of a sub-supplier in order to realise its own
supply obligations. The aforementioned requirement applies equally in all cases where any
such sub-supplier’s scope of responsibility includes the provision of any of the following
activities, namely, design and development, manufacturing, maintenance, testing, storage,
delivery, installation, commissioning, and project management, or in the cases the supplier
name changes, mergers, acquisitions and/ or cessions. Eskom Quality department must
ensure that the changed entity can still fulfil the requirements as set out in the contract
documentation.
3.1.5 Eskom reserves the right to request and perform necessary assessments at sub-supplier
facilities.
3.1.6 The main supplier shall be responsible for defining and managing the specific quality
assurance and control elements applicable to the respective sub-supplier’s scope of
work/supply and ensure that its sub-supplier(s) quality programmes support Eskom
requirements.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.1.7 The supplier shall inform Eskom of any proposed changes to the QMS or staff that will affect
the quality system prior to implementation of these changes.
3.1.8 The main supplier shall develop and implement a performance management programme for
their sub-supplier. The programme shall include, but not limited to:
Verification of the QMS
Audits and surveillances
Regular assessment of the CQPs and reviews of QCPs.
NC and Defect Management
Inspection and test plans
Risk management
3.2 Quality Plan
The information in this section constitutes the minimum requirements for a quality plan.
3.2.1 Where specified in the Evaluation Criteria and/ or quality list of tender returnables , as per the
categories of quality requirements (Category 1, 2, 3, or 4); all individual products, services
and processes shall have a documented, implemented, reviewed and maintained contract
quality plan and/or quality control plan (inspection and test plan).
3.2.2 Where specified in the evaluation criteria and/ or quality list of tender returnables. All
production and/ or service provision shall be carried out in accordance with a documented
and agreed contract quality plan (CQP) and/ or quality control plan (QCP)/ inspection and test
plan (ITP).
3.2.3 The supplier shall plan for the required quality-related activities and interfaces within the
supplier’s quality system in order to demonstrate its ability towards both controlling and
meeting specified Eskom requirements.
Note 1: Contract Quality Plan should address the quality assurance elements related to the scope
of work and/ or technical specification.
Note 2: Quality Control Plan (QCP)/ Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) should address the quality
control elements related to the scope of work and/ or technical specification.
3.3 Contract Quality Plan
The main supplier shall require sub-suppliers to submit project quality plans (PQPs)/ contract quality
plans (CQPs) and associated documentation in accordance with the requirements of project QMS
processes applicable to the sub-supplier’s scope of work.
The supplier shall, where applicable, based on scope of work criticality, ensure that procurement
documents clearly and unambiguously require sub-supplier submission of a sub-supplier CQP for
supplier and Eskom review.
The main supplier shall ensure that sub-supplier CQPs are developed and implemented in
accordance with the ISO 10005 Quality Management System Guidelines for Quality Plans. In
addition to the elements specified in ISO 10005, the supplier’s and/ or sub-suppliers’ CQPs shall
include the following (as applicable):
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.3.1 The management of records, including material tests, positive material identification (PMI)
testing, material certification, etc.
3.3.2 The provision for free and uninhibited access by the supplier and/or personnel at the time of
inspection.
3.3.3 The proposals for submission of final documentation, the final manufacturing data book, prior
to shipment.
3.3.4 The special processes related to welding: management of the welder’s qualification record
(WQR), welding procedure specifications (WPS), and procedures qualification records (PQR)
that will be used in the performance of work for supplier review and acceptance prior to
commencing manufacture. Welders shall be qualified to the specified Codes of Construction
for the applicable procedures. The requirements for qualification shall be specified by the
supplier, and welder records shall be maintained by sub-suppliers performing the work.
3.3.5 The special installation procedures and other required fabrication or manufacturing
procedures (that is, those required for post-weld heat treatment, tube rolling, coatings, etc.)
that will be used in the performance of work shall require supplier review and acceptance
prior to commencing manufacture. The personnel carrying out special processes (for
example, NDE, welding, coating, heat treatment, etc.) where the results cannot be fully
verified by subsequent inspection and test shall be suitably qualified and, where applicable,
registered with statutory bodies as legally required, that is, as radiographic workers to conduct
radiography. The requirements for the qualification shall be specified, and personnel records
shall be maintained in accordance with the Project Quality Personnel Qualification
Specification and, where applicable, legal requirements.
3.3.6 The personnel required to perform special processes shall be certified competent through a
certificate of competency in accordance with the company’s internal training management
and competency control procedures or an external certification body (for example, NDT)
through an accredited service provider as per Skills Education Training Authorities (SETA)
requirements.
3.3.7 All personnel who perform activities that affect quality shall have their training needs identified
and documented. The required training shall be implemented in accordance with the
company’s training management and competency control procedures. All the training
certificates shall meet the SETA requirements in terms of having the unit standard completed
and the accreditation number of the service providers.
3.3.8 Instructions and requirements for equipment and materials storage, preservation, and
maintenance, including identification of materials required for preservation and maintenance,
are to be provided sufficiently prior to receipt (prior to shipment or earlier) to ensure that
appropriate resources are available at the time of delivery.
3.3.9 Specific quality monitoring and verification activities are to be undertaken on the supplier’s
sub-suppliers by Eskom or it agent.
3.3.10 The CQP information need to include, but not limited to:
Spells out the aspects of the QMS to be applied within a specific Eskom project, and the
methods to be utilised to ensure quality.
Outline the resources, the communication channels, applicable documents and records to be
generated.
Management Authority and Responsibility from both supplier and client need to outline in the
Cqp.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
List of documents and records that will be used and submitted during the execution of the
project.
Communications channels should include contact person and contact details
Monitoring & measurement procedures for activities need to be indicated.
3.3.11 The main supplier and sub-supplier CQPs shall comply with the Eskom Quality Requirements
Specifications and shall be submitted prior to the initial scope of work kick-off or initial pre-
fabrication meeting and prior to commencement of manufacturing, whichever is earlier.
3.3.12 The Eskom template for CQP provided shall be used as guideline, where the supplier does
not have a CQP template.
3.4 Quality Control Plan
The supplier shall develop and implement processes and procedures that efficiently and effectively
monitor, verify and document the quality of the scope of work for deliverables.
The main supplier shall ensure that sub-supplier QCPs/ ITPs are prepared at a level of detail
sufficient to address all quality-control-related activities in a chronological order, from contract review
through materials verification, manufacturing, fabrication, assembly, final testing, commissioning,
hand-over documentation, and certification. In addition, the supplier shall ensure compliance with
the following requirements:
3.4.1 All stages of manufacturing, fabrication, assembly and installation shall be controlled by a
supplier’s QCP/ ITP that clearly and unambiguously identifies the quality verifications to be
performed and special attention to controls related to critical products and services.
3.4.2 QCP/ ITP shall be reviewed and accepted by Eskom, its inspection authority or agency, and
they shall allow for the insertion of Eskom specific requirements, including hold and witness
points prior to the commencement of work.
3.4.3 Subsequent changes to the Eskom accepted QCP/ ITP shall require Eskom, its inspection
authority or agency’s agreement prior to the commencement of work involving an activity
affected by such changes.
3.4.4 The ITPs should cover materials certification, fabrication works, in-process inspections, final
acceptance tests, packaging and pre- shipment/ transportation, shipping/ transportation
inspections where contracted, preservation, site acceptance tests, construction and erection
works, and pre-commissioning and commissioning tests.
3.4.5 All sub-supplier QCP/ ITP activity shall be performed using an Eskom-accepted supplier
Qcp/ itp.
3.4.6 All applicable codes, standards, and relevant acceptance criteria documents are available at
the work location, and Eskom representatives on site shall have on-going access to this
information. Workplace documentation shall be available in English and in any workforce-
appropriate language.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.4.7 Where activities subject to inspection and test procedures are to be undertaken by a sub-
supplier, the QCP/ ITP shall make reference to this fact and shall include descriptive details
of the sub-supplier’s involvement. A separate QCP/ ITP shall be required for each sub-
supplier scope of work.
3.4.8 The supplier shall be ultimately accountable and responsible for the development and proper
implementation of all sub-supplier QCPs/ ITPs, including those reviewed or developed by
sub-suppliers.
3.4.9 Eskom reserves the right to select intervention points on QCPs/ ITPs for Eskom oversight of
selected functions and to perform surveillance or audits of the work.
3.4.10 Once signed, the ITPs and QCPs become addendums to the main contract. These ITPs can
be reviewed at Eskom’s discretion based on its assessment of the supplier’s performance or
other risks.
3.4.11 A QCP/ ITP shall contain the following information:
Eskom contract number and title
The supplier’s order number
Identification of the area of works/contract
Description of the work, with components, item number, and activity date
QCP/ITP unique number
A list of the sequence of operations, including inspection and tests
The identification of the specification, drawing number, or procedure for each operation,
with reference to the relevant criticality risk rating
The acceptance criteria, with reference to the technical specification, in-house, national, or
international standard, with the relevant clause number for each operation
The inspection and test activities that the supplier has nominated for its intervention points
Provision for the inclusion of intervention points nominated by Eskom and/or its authority/
agency
Provision for intervention point acceptance by date and signature for all parties having
intervention in the plan
Inspection and test records to be generated by the supplier for each operation and an
indication of records to be provided to Eskom (as applicable)
3.4.12 The main supplier shall require sub-suppliers to submit QCPs/ ITPs and associated
documentation applicable to the sub-supplier scope of work. Any changes made to the QCP
after submission must be resubmitted to Eskom for further review. The supplier shall ensure
that all sub-supplier QCPs/ ITPs are in compliance with the Eskom Quality Requirements
Specifications, including, but not limited to, the following requirements:
Clear and unambiguous description of the equipment and location(s) at which each activity
will take place, including facility location(s)
Identification of quality verification activity and stage
The details of reference documents, procedures, or method statements to be utilised in
performance of the activity, including specific reference to actual sections and pages of
procedures, standards, instructions, specifications, etc.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
Definition of acceptance criteria
Listing of certifying or verifying documents generated to provide evidence of compliance
with specified requirements; documents are to be provided using the proper Eskom
document numbering requirements
Identification of main supplier and sub-supplier (where applicable) third-party/approved
inspection authority (AIA) and Eskom inspection activities defined in terms of witness, hold,
document review, and verification monitoring points and provision for sign-off of each of the
above-mentioned parties for each intervention point
Qualification requirements for quality control inspectors, including any third-party/AIA
inspectors
Listing of all proposed test procedures
Acceptance criteria for each inspection or test in alignment with specified tolerances
A section for signed acceptance of the QC/ITP by the supplier, sub-supplier (where
applicable), and Eskom prior to commencement of work
Inspection or testing intervention points, including, but not limited to, factory acceptance test
and package acceptance test, witness, and hold points
3.4.13 A quality kick-off meeting will be held at the start of the contract and, if required, at the start
of each subsequent phase.
The supplier shall arrange coordination meetings with Eskom prior to placement of orders
for items or equipment to ensure that all technical and commercial requirements are clear
and understood. Fourteen days’ advance notice of meetings shall be given to Eskom.
Supplier inspection personnel, including inspection agency personnel, shall be competent
and qualified to perform inspection and testing assignments. Mobilisation of all such
personnel shall be in compliance with the Project Quality Personnel Qualification
Specification.
3.4.14 Where QCP/ ITP is applicable, the supplier shall ensure that sub-suppliers are provided with
comprehensive, clearly written, and unambiguous inspection and testing protocols, including
processes, procedures, and methods that shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
Requirements for inspection checklists and inspection assignments, with lists of items to be
inspected
An inspection and testing report format, report content, schedule for report processing and
distribution, and report retention requirements
Inspection and test report results response tracking (log) and resolution of nonconformity in
inspection and test processes, procedures, or methods and nonconformity identified in
inspection and test results
Associated Failure Mode, Effects and Criticality Analysis (FMECA) reports relating to the
equipment and sub-systems (if applicable)
Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP) report, as applicable
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.4.15 The supplier shall establish processes and procedures for formal assessment of sub-supplier
inspection and testing programmes. These shall include review of sub-supplier inspection
reports and other quality control documentation. Additional formal assessment of
manufacturing, fabrication, and assembly facility operations shall be conducted by the
supplier to ensure continuing suitability, adequacy, and effectiveness of the sub-supplier’s
inspection and testing programmes. Assessment frequency shall be established in
consideration of the sub-supplier scope of work, criticality of scope of work deliverables, and
performance information. The assessment scope and schedule shall be developed in
consultation with Eskom.
3.4.16 Supplier processes and procedures for verification of supplier and sub-supplier purchased
product compliance with specifications shall obtain document return/review status prior to
implementation.
3.4.17 The objective is to finalise any outstanding procedural or other issues before proceeding to
deliver the works.
3.4.18 Eskom, in consultation with the supplier, develops an agenda for the meeting, and Eskom will
keep minutes of these meetings.
3.4.19 Mandatory pre-inspection meetings will be convened by Eskom or its inspection agency or
AIA to be attended by the supplier’s and sub-supplier’s representatives, including their quality
representatives who will be involved in the works, and records are to be kept.
3.4.20 Eskom reserves the right to appoint resident quality inspectors who can be based at the
supplier’s or sub-supplier’s premises and on site where the work is being performed. The
supplier is expected to provide workspace at no cost to Eskom for the inspector, as required.
3.4.21 Eskom may appoint any organisation it prefers to perform quality assurance and quality
control activities, either in the capacity as an AIA or inspection agency, on the works
contracted to the supplier, and the supplier or its sub-suppliers may not object, prevent,
hinder, undermine, circumvent, question, discredit, or in any way make it impossible for such
organisation to carry out its work on behalf of Eskom.
3.4.22 The Eskom template for QCP/ ITP provided shall be used as guideline, where the supplier
does not have a QCP/ ITP template.
3.5 Pre-Contract Award: Quality Requirement
3.5.1 Main Supplier and Sub-supplier Categories
Eskom supplier quality requirements for all existing and potential suppliers and sub-suppliers are
classified into four categories (category 1, 2, 3 and 4). Suppliers must prepare and submit quality
documentation as per the tender selected category (indicated in Form A) using the list of tender
returnables document.
NOTE: Only one (1) category must be applicable per procurement process e.g. [Eskom requests for
information (RFI)/ requests for quotation (RFQ)/ requests for proposal (RFP), including contracts for
the procurement of products and services].
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
The following are the minimum returnable documentation for Categories 1 to 4:
3.5.2 Category 1: Quality Requirements
The supplier shall complete and sign Form A (Enquiry/Contract/Quality Requirements for
Supplier Quality Management Specification 240-105658000/ QM 58 and ISO 9001).
The supplier shall submit a valid copy of ISO 9001 or any applicable certificate of a QMS (the
latest applicable revision). The QMS should drive the supplier’s business management
processes to ensure that all of Eskom’s requirements are fully met on a consistent basis.
The supplier shall submit the latest copy of the management system internal and external
audit reports. The audit reports must include, if applicable, nonconformity identified, and the
resulting remedial actions (correction and/ or corrective action reports).
The supplier shall submit a draft contract quality plan that is specific to the scope of work as
described in the tender documents. The plan must address the minimum requirements as per
Iso 10005.
Where applicable; the supplier shall submit a draft, or an example of an inspection and test
plan (ITP) or quality control plan (QCP) on similar and/ or previous work done.
The supplier shall submit documented information for Control of Externally Provided Processes,
Products and Services.
The supplier shall submit a copy of documented information for roles, responsibilities and
authorities in relation to the QMS. Examples of relevant documented information are;
organization charts, job descriptions, work instructions, duty statements, manuals, procedures.
The supplier shall submit documented information retained (records) of management review
meetings that include agenda, meeting minutes, attendance registers, reports, presentations,
etc.
Note: specific requirements per tender will be selected using the List of Tender Returnable
documents (240-12248652).
3.5.3 Category 2: Quality Requirements
The supplier shall complete and sign Form A (Enquiry/Contract/Quality Requirements for
Supplier Quality Management Specification 240-105658000/ QM 58 and ISO 9001).
The supplier shall submit objective evidence of a developed, implemented and maintained QMS
that complies with ISO 9001 or any applicable standard of quality management system (the latest
applicable revision). The following documents (approved/ signed copies) shall be submitted:
Quality Management System manual or a documented information that have defines and
describes the QMS and its scope
Quality Policy, aligned with the supplier’s strategic direction (documented information)
Quality Objectives (documented information)
Control of documented information (both maintain and retain documented information )
Internal audit procedure (documented information)
Control of nonconforming outputs (documented information)
Nonconformity and Corrective action procedure (documented information)
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
The QMS should drive all the supplier’s business management processes to ensure that all of
Eskom’s requirements are fully met on a consistent basis.
The supplier shall submit the latest copy of the management system internal audit reports. The
audit reports must include, if applicable, nonconformity identified, and the resulting remedial
actions (correction and/ or corrective action reports).
The supplier shall submit a draft contract quality plan that is specific to the scope of work as
described in the tender documents. The plan must address the minimum requirements as per
Iso 10005.
Where applicable; the supplier shall submit an example of inspection and test plan (ITP) or
quality control plan (QCP) on similar or previous work done.
The supplier shall submit documented information for Control of Externally Provided Processes,
Products and Services.
The supplier shall submit a copy of documented information for roles, responsibilities and
authorities in relation to the QMS. Examples of relevant documented information are;
organization charts, job descriptions, work instructions, duty statements, manuals, procedures.
The supplier shall submit documented information retained (records) of management review
meetings that include agenda, meeting minutes, attendance registers, reports, presentations,
etc.
Note: specific requirements per tender will be selected using the List of Tender Returnable
document (240-12248652).
3.5.4 Category 3: Quality Requirements
The supplier shall complete and sign Form A (Enquiry/Contract/Quality Requirements for
Supplier Quality Management Specification 240-105658000/ QM 58 and ISO 9001).
The supplier shall submit objective evidence of a developed QMS that complies with ISO 9001
(or the latest applicable revision). The following documented information (approved/ signed
copies) shall be submitted:
o Quality management system manual or a (documented information) that have
defines and describes the QMS and its scope
o Quality Policy, aligned with the supplier’s strategic direction (documented
information)
o Quality Objectives (documented information)
o Control of documented information (both maintain and retain documented
information )
o Internal audit procedure (documented information)
o Control of nonconforming outputs (documented information)
o Nonconformity and Corrective action procedure (documented information)
The QMS should drive all the supplier’s business management processes to ensure that all of
Eskom’s requirements are fully met on a consistent basis.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
The supplier shall submit a draft contract quality plan that is specific to the scope of work as
described in the tender documents. The plan must address the minimum requirements as per
Iso 10005.
Where applicable; the supplier shall submit an example inspection and test plan (ITP) or
quality control plan (QCP).
The supplier shall submit documented information for Control of Externally Provided Processes,
Products and Services.
The supplier shall submit a copy of documented information for roles, responsibilities and
authorities in relation to the QMS. Examples of relevant documented information are;
organization charts, job descriptions, work instructions, duty statements, manuals, procedures.
NB: specific requirements per tender will be selected using the List of Tender Returnables
document (240-12248652).
3.5.5 Category 4: Quality Requirements
The supplier shall complete and sign Form A (Enquiry/Contract/Quality Requirements for
Supplier Quality Management Specification 240-105658000/ QM 58 and ISO 9001).
The supplier shall submit a quality method statement based on ISO 9001 and specific to the
scope of work.
The quality method statement should address all the supplier’s business management
processes to ensure that all of Eskom’s requirements are fully met on a consistent basis.
The supplier shall submit a signed/ approved quality policy (aligned with the supplier’s strategic
direction). (documented information)
The supplier shall submit a copy of quality objectives. (documented information)
The supplier shall submit documented information for Control of Externally Provided Processes,
Products and Services.
The supplier shall submit a copy of the documented information for roles, responsibilities and
authorities, specific to the project/ scope of work/ technical requirements. Examples of relevant
documented information are; organization charts, job descriptions, work instructions, duty
statements, manuals, procedures.
Note: specific requirements per tender will be selected using the List of Tender Returnables
document (240-12248652).
3.6 Main Supplier and Sub-supplier Capability and Capacity Assessment
Supplier capability and capacity assessments shall be performed prior to contract award on potential
suppliers participating in Eskom Holdings procurement process to:
provide products and services with high risk to operational sustainability
work on critical plant and equipment
supply of critical plant items or components
provide special processes
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
All sub-suppliers used by the main supplier/ contractor, performing work on Eskom critical plant
equipment, supplying commodities and providing specialised services shall be subjected to the
capability and capacity assessment.
Critical plant includes the following:
Generation Level 1 & 2 plant
Transmission and Distribution Power Plant & Control Plant
Mega Projects
All potential quality risks identified will be included in the assessment report provided for the tender
evaluation.
Note: Form A (Enquiry/ Contract/ Quality Requirements for Supplier Quality Management:
Specification 240-105658000/ QM 58 and ISO 9001) will be used to select and indicate whether
capability and capacity assessment will be conducted.
3.7 Post-Contract Award
3.7.1 Contract Execution
The supplier shall submit the following documents within 30 days or as per stated timeline after the
contract date, prior to the commencement of work, for acceptance by Eskom:
The supplier shall complete a QCP before contract award. This shall be reviewed and
signed off by Eskom within 30 days or as per stated timeline after contract award.
The supplier shall complete a quality control plan and ITP(s) for review and acceptance by
Eskom prior to the commencement of any work, inclusive of subcontracted work, within 30
days or as per stated timeline after contract award.
The sub-supplier QCP/ ITP shall be submitted for review and comment by the supplier and
by Eskom within 30 days or as per stated timeline after the award of the tender. All supplier
and Eskom comments shall be resolved prior to commencing work.
The equipment lists and an indication of pressurised components and systems.
Note: These plans are to be compiled in line with Eskom’s requirements and will have to be
discussed with, and approved by, Eskom prior to any work commencing.
Correspondence shall be directed to the project manager, and periodic quality review
meetings shall be convened by Eskom with the supplier.
The mandatory quality review meetings are to be convened by the nominated project quality
manager or his/her representative for the contract.
Monthly quality performance and management reports are to be prepared by the supplier
during contract execution. The content of these reports shall be agreed by Eskom when
submitted to Eskom on a monthly basis.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.7.2 Supplier Quality Performance Monitoring Phase
During the contract execution phase, suppliers shall be monitored by Eskom for performance on
quality-related aspects.
The outcomes of such monitoring will enable Eskom to take any appropriate actions pertaining to
the supplier.
The monitoring shall be carried out periodically by Eskom or at predetermined intervals during the
execution of a contract using agreed key performance indicators. The monitored key performance
areas include the following:
CQP and QCP /ITP
Delivery
Design
Cost
Management system
Subsequent key performance indicators associated with these areas will include the following:
Nonconformity monitoring
Audit and assessment evaluation scoring
Management system compliance and accreditation
Achievement of delivery targets as per contractual agreements
Process improvements
Correction and corrective action response and closure
3.7.3 Supplier Quality Audit
3.7.3.1 Quality audits and related quality performance reviews are intended to provide an objective
evaluation of compliance with performance expectations defined in this specification, in the
supplier contract quality plan (CQP), and in any other project scope of work specification.
3.7.3.2 Quality audits and related quality performance reviews include, but are not limited to, any
quality or other project functional area audits, assessments, verification of compliance
reviews, surveillance, inspections, or other interim or final assessments of scope of work
deliverables provided by the supplier or sub-suppliers
3.7.3.3 Quality audits and related quality performance reviews are intended to provide an objective
evaluation of compliance with performance expectations defined in this specification, in the
supplier contract quality plan (CQP), and in any other project scope of work specification.
3.7.3.4 Quality audits and related quality performance reviews include, but are not limited to, any
quality or other project functional area audits, assessments, verification of compliance
reviews, surveillance, inspections, or other interim or final assessments of scope of work
deliverables provided by the supplier or sub-suppliers.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.7.3.5 Quality audits and related quality performance reviews shall be carried out by trained,
accredited, and experienced personnel in accordance with procedures documented in the
Cqp.
3.7.3.6 The supplier shall submit, for Eskom review, documented processes for conducting project
scope of work quality audits and related quality performance reviews. Supplier quality audits
and related quality performance review processes shall be designed to address evaluation
of progress towards completion of project functional area deliverables as well as final
deliverable quality.
3.7.3.7 The supplier shall provide a schedule of anticipated quality audits covering all functional
areas and related quality performance reviews at the time of first post-contract award CQP
submission.
3.8 Standard Conditions
3.8.1 Rights of Access
Eskom:
3.8.1.1 shall be granted electronic and hard-copy access to all quality plans, procedures,
documentation, and other quality records relating to the work, including, but not limited to,
data extracts;
3.8.1.2 reserves the right to review, inspect, and audit any or all parts of the supplier’s QMS, as well
as any documentation, materials, or equipment associated with the work, at any time or
project work location; and
3.8.1.3 reserves the right to carry out assessments and audits on all new suppliers and sub-
suppliers.
The supplier:
3.8.1.4 shall support Eskom’s effort to monitor, verify, and/or witness any activities associated with
the work at any time;
3.8.1.5 shall cooperate with Eskom requests for documentation, records, and inspection and
witnessing. Eskom participation in audits, appraisals, assessment of plans, and verification
shall be conducted at no extra cost to Eskom;
3.8.1.6 shall ensure that a sub-supplier provides access to Eskom to all work procedures, records,
and supporting documentation through provision of access to view and photocopy, as
required, to support verification of scope of work requirements. Access shall include the
ability to photograph Eskom equipment, systems, system components, materials, etc.;
3.8.1.7 shall provide access to all quality-related information pertaining to activities performed by
itself or sub-suppliers, where Eskom might not have participated in the witnessing of their
quality assurance or control (this refers to inspections, audits, etc. performed by the supplier
on its own sub-suppliers);
3.8.1.8 shall allow Eskom to assess, audit, approve, or reject any sub-suppliers employed by
Eskom’s suppliers to assist with the product and/or service delivery to Eskom; and
3.8.1.9 shall ensure that the above requirements flow down to sub-suppliers.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.8.2 Eskom Rights to Information
3.8.2.1 To expect that the works will be conducted in accordance with the contract between the
parties.
3.8.2.2 To have access to the supplier’s information as determined by applicable legislation.
3.8.2.3 Eskom reserves the right to oversee the supplier’s audit programmes by participating in
selected audits as an observer and by assessing the supplier during key work stages.
Eskom will coordinate with the supplier to develop an oversight schedule aligned with the
supplier’s audit schedule.
3.8.2.4 To obtain access to any audit reports of audits performed by the supplier reflected in the
audit programme.
3.8.2.5 To conduct independent quality audits during all phases of the contract, and the supplier
shall provide all resources to support these activities.
3.8.2.6 Eskom shall have the right to participate in, or request that, a technical investigation be
launched and conducted at the supplier’s and sub-suppliers’ premises or other sites when
risk to Eskom products or service deliverables is identified.
3.8.2.7 To participate in, and/or lead, investigations related to incidents involving its products.
3.8.2.8 To require from suppliers to be responsible for the cost of re-inspections.
3.8.2.9 To withhold payment from suppliers as a result of outstanding nonconformities, irrespective
of the agreed payment schedule and in accordance with the conditions of contract.
3.8.2.10 Shall be granted electronic and hard-copy access to all quality plans, procedures,
documentation, and other quality records relating to the work, including, but not limited to,
data extracts.
3.8.2.11 Reserves the right to review, inspect, and audit any or all parts of the supplier’s QMS, as
well as any documentation, materials, or equipment associated with the work, at any time or
project work location.
3.8.2.12 Shall carry out assessments and audits on all new suppliers and sub-suppliers.
3.8.2.13 Reserves the right to appoint resident quality inspectors who can be based at the supplier’s
or sub-supplier’s premises and on site where the work is being performed.
3.8.2.14 Reserves the right to select intervention points within all developed supplier QCPs/ ITPs
for Eskom oversight of selected functions and to perform surveillance or audits of the work.
3.8.2.15 Shall be given access at all reasonable times before, during, and after manufacture and
before delivery, construction, erection, and commissioning to measure, test, and inspect the
products and workmanship, as necessary, at the supplier’s premises and at Eskom sites.
3.8.2.16 Reserves the right to suspend any pending deliveries by the issuing of a cease delivery
order at any time and for any portion of the work that is not being performed in accordance
with the specified/agreed requirements.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.8.3 Preservation
The supplier shall develop and implement a comprehensive preservation programme consisting of
plans, processes, procedures and actions undertaken for the purpose of planning for and
maintenance of material deliverables quality. The supplier preservation programme scope includes,
but is not limited to, the following:
3.8.3.1 Engagement of personnel suitably qualified for oversight of, and (as required) direct
implementation of, preservation programme requirements.
3.8.3.2 Development and implementation of preservation programme training appropriate to work
need.
3.8.3.3 Eskom may make use of its appointed service provider tasked to provide a full suite of
services encompassing an online monitoring system and asset tracking during, but not
limited to the following stages: inspections, testing, shipping, transportation, storage, and
commissioning. The supplier is to enable full access during all of these stages in order to
allow the installation of the devices on Eskom-identified products and equipment, which
include the sub-supplier’s testing facilities, processing plant, and any other processes
deemed important towards effective and efficient quality control.
3.8.3.4 Eskom seeks cooperation between the supplier’s designers and those of Eskom’s service
provider in ensuring seamless installation of the device and other associated installations.
Moreover, there is also a need to integrate data flows and systems between Eskom and the
supplier. Further details are included in the Eskom specifications and works information.
3.8.3.5 Review and tracking of compliance with Eskom and supplier engineering specification of
preservation requirements.
3.8.3.6 Review and tracking of compliance with sub-supplier provided preservation requirements
and recommendations.
3.8.3.7 Evaluation of prospective temporary and longer-term material storage sites for consistency
with preservation programme expectations.
3.8.3.8 Preservation work plan development and plan execution performance evaluation of all
parties engaged for provision of material transportation, handling, or storage services.
3.8.3.9 Oversight of material quality preservation plan preparation and plan execution performance
at all work locations.
3.8.3.10 Development of a preservation programme records management process, in compliance
with Eskom information management requirements, which comprehensively addresses
generation, maintenance, and ready access by Eskom to all preservation programme
records.
3.8.3.11 The supplier shall deploy a clearly defined documented programme providing for
identification of all physical asset pre-operation preservation of quality requirements. In this
reference, the term “physical assets” should be understood to include bulk materials,
including consumable items, equipment systems, system components, and any other
procured or supplied materials or equipment transferred to project control, but not deployed
for operational purposes.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.8.3.12 Where the project responsibility for equipment and materials management has been
formally delegated, the supplier’s preservation programme shall ensure clear and
unambiguous communication of pre-operation preservation of goods quality requirements
to sub-suppliers.
3.8.3.13 The supplier’s preservation programme shall clearly and unambiguously document
processes and procedures for efficient and effective monitoring of compliance with
programme requirements.
3.8.3.14 Compliance monitoring shall commence with ensuring comprehensive consideration of
preservation requirements in the engineering instruction and subsequent inclusion of said
instruction in procurement documentation and shall be applicable until such time as
equipment or materials have been incorporated in an operating or operational system or
structure.
3.8.3.15 Compliance evaluation frequency shall anticipate transfer of tactical-level responsibility for
management of preservation responsibilities between project functional areas, for example,
procurement to logistics, logistics to fabrication, fabrication to logistics, logistics to
construction, etc., and shall, in similar fashion, anticipate transfer of support for tactical-level
responsibility between various subcontracted service providers.
3.8.3.16 Supplier engineering shall ensure that preservation requirements for scope of work
systems, system components, equipment, materials, and other procured goods are clearly
and unambiguously documented and that preservation requirements are efficiently and
effectively communicated to project procurement, logistics, construction management,
quality, security, and other project functional areas, as required, for efficient and effective
implementation of preservation requirements. This shall take the form of a preservation
programme applicable to all systems, system components, equipment, materials, customer-
supplied materials, and other goods procured or managed under the scope of work.
3.8.3.17 The supplier’s preservation management programme shall clearly and unambiguously
address temporary, long-term, and in-transit preservation requirements, including, but not
limited to:
requirements for protection against, or insulation from, atmospheric conditions,
sunlight, temperature, soil, dust, humidity, salt spray, corrosive atmospheres, or
other physical environment conditions;
detailed procedures for application, use, monitoring, and maintenance of coatings,
coverings, fasteners, lines, and other components for internal and external weather
proofing;
requirements for electrical grounding or isolation;
requirements for internal or external environment creation, for example, inert gas
charging, heating, cooling, etc., inclusive of gas storage, electric power supply, etc.;
detailed procedures for initial set-up, charging, activation, and maintenance of
internal atmosphere generation, regeneration, monitoring, and relieving systems, for
example, inert gas management systems;
requirements for protection against, or insulation from, vibration or long-period
cyclical motion in transit, for example, wave-generated movement during sea
transport;
internal and external structural integrity protection, for example, internal and external
bracing, padding, framing, chocking, etc.;
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
support structure requirements, for example, stools, pads, or other devices,
substrates, or support required to ensure in-storage and in-transit stability of
systems, system components, equipment, and material, or other discrete units or
items;
provision for physical separation and/or barriers to prevent airborne or direct
transmittal of contaminants between work areas or between work areas and storage
areas, for example, prevention of carbon steel grinding or cutting debris impact on
stainless steel elements, airborne drift of blast aggregate into vessels or machinery,
etc.;
provision for, and final disposition of, temporary and longer-term storage or transit
required supports and related binding devices, for example, stools, stands, sea
fasteners, platforms, chocks, spacers, cabling, etc.;
provision of requirements for temporary work platforms or other support structures
required to ensure provision of preservation services, for example, provision of a
self-elevating work platform for periodic access to elevated fittings, gauges, man-
ways, etc.;
requirements for protection against, or insulation from, contact with other objects, for
example, padding or other protection for external tubing, fittings, or other impact-
sensitive structures or components;
clear physical delineation of temporary and longer-term storage areas supplemented
by hard and soft barriers, as required, to maintain a protective perimeter;
documented agreements with storage facility and transportation provider
management regarding security management, including, but not limited to, facility
access and egress control and control of access to project goods and materials
within facility boundaries or aboard vehicles or vessels; and
detailed procedures for inspection and testing to verify performance of preservation
procedures and to provide for timely notice and corrective action to maintain
preservation status.
3.8.3.18 The supplier’s preservation management programme scope shall encompass
management of preservation requirements, from initial transfer of ownership or management
responsibility to project scope of responsibility, through any period of temporary or longer-
term storage and through any period of transit, including transit for final delivery at point of
active use or installation.
3.8.3.19 The supplier’s preservation management programme shall clearly and unambiguously
address processes and procedures to ensure that storage and control of materials are
accomplished in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, specifications, and
project-specific requirements.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.8.3.20 The supplier’s preservation management programme shall incorporate special precautions
to address preservation and control of valves, electrical motors and components,
mechanical and rotating equipment, piping and fittings, instrumentation, flange faces,
gaskets, coatings, insulation, and other materials. Special precautions include, but are not
limited to, supplier-specified maintenance procedures related to engines, electric motors,
pumps, compressors, etc., such as periodic shaft rotation, engine turnover, lubrication, etc.
3.8.3.21 The supplier shall ensure that clear and unambiguous requirements for preservation of the
system, system components, equipment, materials, and other procured goods are clearly
and unambiguously documented in purchase orders, work authorisations, and other
communications between the supplier and sub-suppliers.
3.8.3.22 Where sub-supplier expertise is utilised in determination of the preservation protocol,
supplier procurement processes shall ensure clear and unambiguous documentation of sub-
supplier input into preservation management programme requirements.
3.8.3.23 Supplier procurement shall ensure that preservation requirements for scope of work
systems, system components, equipment, materials, and other procured goods are clearly
and unambiguously documented and that preservation requirements are efficiently and
effectively communicated to project logistics, construction management, quality, security,
and other project functional areas, as required, for efficient and effective implementation of
preservation requirements.
3.8.3.24 The supplier shall ensure comprehensive, clear, and unambiguous designation of sub-
supplier responsibility for execution of all preservation management programme elements,
including, but not limited to, all systems, processes, procedures, methods, ready access to
records, and provision of equipment, tools, or services essential to efficient and effective
execution of the preservation management programme.
3.8.3.25 The supplier shall ensure that preservation management programme responsibilities are
clearly and unambiguously defined within the project team and efficiently and effectively
implemented at all project scope of work locations. Inclusion of supplier and sub-supplier
scope of work in the development and implementation of a preservation management
programme shall be considered essential to efficient and effective preservation
management programme execution.
3.8.3.26 The supplier shall ensure clear and unambiguous designation of project team responsibility
for oversight and management of preservation management programme elements during
every stage of project development.
3.8.3.27 The supplier shall ensure that Eskom has free and unrestricted access to all preservation
records for inspection and audit.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.8.4 Quality Audits Related Conditions
3.8.4.1 The supplier shall maintain an accurate quality audit and related quality performance review
schedule and shall incorporate the current schedule as an attachment to the supplier CQP.
3.8.4.2 The supplier’s quality audit and related quality performance review schedule development
process shall be designed to incorporate consideration of information generated by
previously conducted audits and reviews, by input from project risk management evaluations
(risk register), or from Eskom or sub-supplier subject matter expertise.
3.8.4.3 Eskom reserves the right to oversee supplier audit programmes by participating in selected
audits as an observer and by assessing the supplier during key work stages. Eskom will
coordinate with the supplier to develop an oversight schedule aligned with the supplier’s
audit schedule.
3.8.4.4 Eskom will have the right to obtain access to any audit reports of audits performed by the
supplier reflected in the audit programme.
3.8.4.5 Eskom reserves the right to conduct independent quality audits, scheduled and
unscheduled, during all phases of the contract. The supplier shall provide all resources to
support these activities.
3.8.4.6 Eskom shall be given access at all reasonable times before, during, and after manufacture
and before delivery, construction, erection, and commissioning to measure, test, and inspect
the products and workmanship, as necessary, at the supplier’s premises and at Eskom sites.
3.8.4.7 The supplier shall obtain access for Eskom to measure, test, witness tests, and inspect
products that are being manufactured by any sub-supplier. This includes surveillances.
3.8.4.8 The assessments and audits shall be carried out on all new suppliers and their sub-
suppliers.
3.8.4.9 Eskom shall have the right to participate in, or request that, a technical investigation be
launched and conducted at the supplier’s and sub-suppliers’ premises or other sites when
risk to Eskom products or service deliverables is identified.
3.8.4.10 Qualification requirements for supplier and sub-supplier personnel engaged in conducting
quality audits and related quality performance reviews shall be defined in the supplier CQP
and shall be in compliance with the Project Quality Personnel Qualification Specification.
3.8.5 Management of Nonconformities and Nonconforming Outputs Identified by Eskom
3.8.5.1 Nonconformity reports raised by Eskom and issued against the supplier shall be investigated
by the supplier as a matter of urgency in order to determine the root cause, corrective action
measures, as required, with implementation time frames.
3.8.5.2 A formal response shall be prepared in respect of the defined criteria and submitted to
Eskom for its review, evaluation, and acceptance, within a maximum of 14 calendar days
from the date of issue of the nonconformity and should be aligned with the site
requirements/procedure.
3.8.5.3 Eskom may, at its discretion, request a response sooner and, in any case, before the
supplier proceeding with any pending/further intervention or corrective action, as may be
required by Eskom.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.8.5.4 Should Eskom or its inspection authority/agency identify any nonconforming products during
the conduct of its audits/surveillances/inspections, the supplier shall be deemed to be in
breach of contract and shall be held liable for any repair, rework, and/or associated
replacement costs. The supplier may, in such instances, also be held liable for the full costs
associated with the conducting of follow-up audits/surveillances/inspections.
3.8.5.5 The nature, magnitude, and/or frequency of nonconformity and inspection defect/rejection
reports raised by Eskom or its appointed inspection authority/agency shall form the basis of
any action to rescind/withdraw the supplier’s qualification status.
3.8.5.6 Nonconforming outputs identified by Eskom shall be documented via a NC Report and
issued to the suppliers via the contract communication protocol. The suppliers shall
investigate the matter and respond in writing to Eskom of disposition within the stated
contractual conditions.
Note: The dates for the disposition should align to contractual conditions.
3.8.5.7 Eskom shall identify repeat deficiencies as systematic failures of the supplier’s QMS and
shall notify the supplier of the trends. Eskom can initiate an internal audit to highlight the
system failures. The supplier with raise a Corrective Action Report and undertake Root
Cause Analysis. In such cases, QMS rectification and/ or update measures shall be taken
immediately.
3.8.5.8 Should the Supplier fail to respond and rectify nonconforming products within stipulated
contractual conditions. The Project Manager should apply contractual remedies in
accordance with Fidic/ NEC contract.
3.8.5.9 Repeated Nonconformities; if there are any identified repeat nonconformities from the same
supplier within a period of 6 months or less. This must then be escalated to the management
review committees of the BU/ OU/ Cluster/ or Divisions for adjudication. If not resolved, then
the matter must be escalated to the supplier review committee for recommendation.
3.8.6 Special Processes
The following requirements shall be applicable as well as additional requirements as specified in the
scope of work for the provision of the following special process services:
3.8.6.1 The supplier shall ensure that all processes which require that procedures be pre-qualified
or work methods and operators tested and qualified are controlled and all steps followed
before the work can commence.
3.8.6.2 This typically covers such activities as welding, non-destructive testing, special fabrication
techniques, coating, painting, etc.
3.8.6.3 All special processes (procedures and processes) shall be submitted for review and
acceptance by Eskom, accredited or certified agency. No work shall commence until these
are accepted.
3.8.6.4 Where applicable, a relevant Management System for the special process shall be certified
or approved by an accredited body and proof of certification shall be submitted to Eskom for
review. An example for this will be the Welding Management System based on ISO 3834.
3.8.6.5 Where samples are required for acceptance, these shall be submitted to Eskom for review
and acceptance.
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
3.8.6.6 The supplier shall ensure that all operators are suitably qualified for these processes in
accordance with the procedures, processes and/ or applicable standards/ codes.
3.8.6.7 The records of qualification of procedures, processes and operators shall be maintained by
the supplier in accordance with the applicable procedure or code and these made available
to Eskom at all times.
4. Acceptance
This document has been seen and accepted by:
Name Designation
Kerseri Pather General Manager: Risk and Sustainability
Lenock Meyer Acting Senior Manager: Quality Management
Pamela Dondashe Middle Manager: Quality Assurance
Mandla Mkhwanazi Middle Manager: SHEQ Procurement and Supply Chain Management
Suzette Manthe Senior Advisor: Quality Performance and Planning
Lorna Ndlela Middle Manager: Eskom Document and Records Management
5. Revisions
Date Rev. Compiler Remarks
October 2021 3 SA Sambo Specification was due for revision and in addition, to
align the requirements with the latest Eskom business
processes and systems.
October 2018 2 SA Sambo Specification reviewed to be aligned with the
requirements of ISO 9001:2015
March 2016 1 SA Sambo Specification was due for revision and also to
repackage the requirements and tender returnable
documents into four categories.
December 2011 0 A Hunter New document
6. Development Team
The following people were involved in the development of this document:
Andrew Else
Bongi Tshabalala
Feziwe Mogamisi
Lesego Garegae
Patrick Thwane
Xolani Zuma
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Supplier Quality Management: Specification Unique Identifier: 240-105658000
Revision: 3
Page:
7. Acknowledgements
Eskom Operational Quality Forum Members
Controlled disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the
user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system.
No part of this document may be reproduced without the expressed consent of the copyright holder, Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd,
Reg No 2002/015527/30.
Financial Requirements
Source: Tender Pack - NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation - E3176NTCSAMWP.zip (TENDER)Payment Terms: Payment Terms Tenderers are requested to bear in mind NTCSA's standard payment
terms as stipulated hereunder when submitting tenders and
concluding contracts with NTCSA:
For contracts valued below R50 000 000 (Fifty Million Rand) including VAT,
NTCSA is committed to paying Suppliers within 30 days of receipt of
undisputed invoices.
For contracts valued
Compliance Requirements
Source: Tender Pack - NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation - E3176NTCSAMWP.zip (TENDER)Insufficient searchable text - AI extraction recommended
No specific requirements found
Triggering of PA system recorded voice warnings
Switching on of substation security lighting
Strobe lights
CCTV cameras
The indications shall be supplied as potential free change over contacts.
Remote resetting of alarms shall be possible. Compliance to Eskom’s cyber security standard [8] shall be ensured.
If analogue alarming is used, then an IDF frame shall be provided which will accommodate minimum of eight alarm input / outputs. 3.5.4.3 Security lights relay card
The security lights relay card will receive alarms from the master control unit and GUI and switch the lights on at affected zones or sectors.
The relay card shall cater for at least ten relays. ESKOM COPYRIGHT PROTECTED When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB. Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848 PERIMETER DETECTION SYSTEM (NLEPDS) Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Page
The relay outputs will be routed to contactors which will switch the security lights in the affected zones or sectors.
A security lights override relay/switch will ensure that all the security lights can be switched on through the security lights bypass button on the GUI kiosk. 3.5.5 Kiosk earthing requirements
The earthing of the equipment in the kiosk shall comply with requirements of Eskom standard for earthing of secondary plant equipment in substations [11]. 3.5.6 Miniature circuit breaker (MCB) specification
The rating of the MCBs shall be adequate for the protection of installed equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for selection of the appropriately sized MCB. 3.5.7 Surge arrester specification
Surge arrestors shall be installed to protect the kiosks electrical equipment from surges. The surge arrester shall be the metal oxide, DIN rail mount type with indication suitable for Zone 1 protection. The arrester shall comply with SANS 61643-1 and bear the SANS mark.
The technical specification for the surge arresters shall be as listed in Table 3 below: Table 3: Surge arrester specification Surge arrester parameter Specification Imax (8/20s) 40kA or 65kA (4/20s) Response time < 25ns Max. Operating voltage 280V AC (phase to neutral) 360V DC Frequency 50Hz Internal fuse Yes Open circuit Open circuit on expiration of the device Indication Clear change-of-state (functional or non-functional) e.g. LED on/off 3.5.8 Isolation switches
The energizer unit shall have a visible isolating switch for switching off the HV of the electrified fence. In the off state, the isolating switch shall be connected to earth.
The energizer isolation switch shall have visible ON/OFF positions and the contacts designed to handle high voltages. 3.5.9 Wiring
The kiosk shall be wired in accordance with Standard for Wiring and Cable Marking in Substations [17].
All wiring shall be done in stranded copper PVC insulated conductor, which shall comply with SANS
c) There shall be no joints or splices in the wiring. ESKOM COPYRIGHT PROTECTED When downloaded from the WEB, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the WEB. Document Classification: Controlled Disclosure STANDARD FOR NON-LETHAL ENERGIZED Unique Identifier: 240-78980848 PERIMETER DETECTION SYSTEM (NLEPDS) Revision: 4ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Page
Not more than two conductors shall be connected to a terminal.
All conductors shall be terminated with crimped connectors using a tool recommended by the manufacturer of the lugs. Note: No bare wiring or bare part of lugs shall be exposed at termination points on the energizers, the miniature circuit-breakers, the relays and the terminals. 3.5.10 Trunking
Cable trunking, location and sizing, shall be provided in accordance with the respective drawings to accommodate the necessary cables. The trunking shall be fastened to the kiosk using rivets or screws. Rivets and/or screws shall not protrude through to the front of the plate.
The HV cabling shall be situated in dedicated trunking. 3.5.11 Notices, labeling and packaging 3.5.11.1 Notices
Notices shall be provided as required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act. All notices shall be fastened to the kiosks by self-tapping stainless steel screws or by rivets.
A standard “Danger” notice in accordance with SANS 1186 shall be provided and placed on the front of the kiosk. 3.5.11.2 Labels
A label showing the name of the manufacturer, the date of manufacture and the various quality checks shall be placed on the inside of the kiosk door. The label shall be durable preferably of metal.
The following additional labels shall be placed in the kiosk to indicate the following: Energizer identification including associated sectors/zones energized by each energizer Cables identification though out the system cable routes Isolation switches and their ON and OFF positions Relay identification Lighting identification IDF identification 3.6 Communication infrastructure
All cables including power and communication cables shall ensure that there are no data losses/disruptions due to harsh operating conditions and voltage/current surges, as such cabling shall not be limited to copper cable only.
Communication between all components of the NLEPDS shall be through a communication medium (e.g. fibre optic cables) that will be immune to interruptions due to other devices in the equipment room as well as immune to EMI.
c) CVs for the company and staff must be submitted with the following experience / competencies
Electrical Supervision Training 2% To be accompanied
Live LV Work Methods/ Electrical 4% holder to confirm trade certificate his/her employment.
Cable joining & termination 3%
Environmental awareness training 1%
Working from heights training 1% CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No 2021/539129/30 Tender Technical Evaluation Criteria: NSP 1 Security Unique Identifier: TPDSOU-343 Upgrade for Pembroke Substation Revision: 0 Page
Fall arrest & rescue 1%
First aid level 2 training 1% 1.4 Construction Supervisor: Civil Works
Qualification: Minimum, National 5% Originally certified Diploma in Civil/Building certificates Engineering
Detailed CV (with minimum 5 years 5% To be accompanied of related experience) by an affidavit done by the certificate
Environmental awareness training 1% holder to confirm his/her employment.
First aid level 2 training 1% 1.5 Tools & Equipment Crane Truck: Vehicle registration papers/ authentic
Owned (10 points) 10% access of rental
Rented (5 points) agreement TLB: Vehicle registration papers/ authentic
Rented (5 points) agreement LDV2s x 3: Vehicle registration papers/ authentic
Owned (9 points) 3 points per LDV 9% access of rental
Rented (4.5 points) agreement 1.6 Relevant experience
Task Orders ≥ 3 (5 points) 5% Appointment letter/ Task Order/
Task Order < 3 (2 points) Completion certificate Grand Total 100% CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No 2021/539129/30 Tender Technical Evaluation Criteria: NSP 1 Security Unique Identifier: TPDSOU-343 Upgrade for Pembroke Substation Revision: 0 Page
Acceptance This document has been seen and accepted by: Name Designation Sizwe Nyambe Project Manager Mvuyisi Mnyamana Project Manager Mandlenkosi Joba Project Manager
Revisions Date Rev. Compiler Remarks Month 2026 0 M Sinyolo First issue
Development Team The following people were involved in the development of this document
Mawabo Sinyolo
Acknowledgements None CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No 2021/539129/30
A certified copy of a tax clearance certificate is required from foreign tenderers (with a footprint in South Africa but that are not registered on Controlled Disclosure When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of NTCSA SOC Ltd, © copyright NTCSA SOC Ltd, Reg No 2021/539129/30 of 70 File name: 559-235050781 OT_Invitation to Tender - Security upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 559-235050781 Rev 3 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date July 2024 Review Date July 2027 CSD and have not provided a SARS pin number) and local tenderers (that have not provided their SARS e- filing PIN number for verification by NTCSA and/or their CSD profile / CSD number). Foreign suppliers with no footprint in South Africa must complete the SBD1 document; however, no proof of tax compliance is required. 1.1.11 Tax Evaluation N/A questionnaire to determine whether a company, close corporation (CC) or Trust is a personal service provider for purposes of PAYE 1.1.12 *SBD 6.1 Annexure I Y √ Proof of valid and current CSD Registration (CSD number/CSD Report) [applicable to all tenderers of local origin and foreign tenderers with local footprint] ADDITIONAL CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS SUPPORTING EVIDENCE 1.1.36 Safety √ COIDA - Original certificate of good standing or proof of application issued by the Compensation Fund (COID) or a licensed compensation insurer (South African tenderers only) 1.1.37 Quality √ requirements. Refer to SHEQ folder. 1.1.38 Other √ safety/quality documents as required per scope of works. Refer to SHEQ folder. 1.1.39 Environmental. √ Refer to SHEQ folder. 1.1.40 Due √ Diligence/financia l analysis Audited Financial Controlled Disclosure When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of NTCSA SOC Ltd, © copyright NTCSA SOC Ltd, Reg No 2021/539129/30 of 70 File name: 559-235050781 OT_Invitation to Tender - Security upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 559-235050781 Rev 3 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date July 2024 Review Date July 2027 Statements of the tenderer for the previous 18 months, or to the extent that such statements are not available, for the last year. In the case of a joint venture or special purpose vehicle (SPV) specially formed for this tender, audited financial statements for each participant in the JV / SPV must be submitted. Start-up enterprises formed within the last 12 months are not required to submit audited financial statements, but if successful in this enquiry; will be required to furnish statements for the first year once available. DOCUMENTS REQUIRED UNDER FUNCTIONALITY/TECHINICAL CRITERIA 1.1.41 Functionality/Tec Y √ hnical. Refer to document to document - Document Identifier: TPDSOU-343 Controlled Disclosure When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of NTCSA SOC Ltd, © copyright NTCSA SOC Ltd, Reg No 2021/539129/30 of 70 File name: 559-235050781 OT_Invitation to Tender - Security upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 559-235050781 Rev 3 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date July 2024 Review Date July 2027 Controlled Disclosure When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of NTCSA SOC Ltd, © copyright NTCSA SOC Ltd, Reg No 2021/539129/30 of 70 File name: 559-235050781 OT_Invitation to Tender - Security upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 559-235050781 Rev 3 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date July 2024 Review Date July 2027 1.2. Tender Data The Tender Data makes several references to the Standard Conditions of Tender and in those instances, the clause numbers are referenced hereunder. If the Standard Conditions of Tender are not attached to the enquiry, then tenderers are required to download this from www.ntcsa.co.za. The “Tender Data” as detailed herein shall take precedence over the Standard Conditions of Tender in the event of any ambiguity or inconsistency between the two documents. Clause Number from Standard Tender Data Conditions of Tender 1.1 Parties The Employer is NTCSA SOC Ltd Name: Dineo Maepa Tel: + 27 17 749 5775 E-mail: [email protected] 1st tier Escalations can be directed to: Name: Olga Tshabalala Tel: +27 11 800 5842 E-mail: [email protected] 2nd Tier Escalations can be directed to: Name: Frans Pooe Tel: +27 11 800 5842 E-mail: [email protected] 1.3 Enquiry documents The Invitation to tender number is: E3176NTCSAMWP See the content list above for the enquiry documents. 1.4 Type of enquiry This enquiry is
An open invitation to tender 1.6 NTCSA's rights to accept or The tender shall be for the whole of the contract. reject any tender 2.1 Eligibility Tenderers (whether a single company or an incorporated or unincorporated joint venture or consortium) must meet the eligibility criteria stated in the Tender Data. The tenderer, or any of its principals, must not be under any restriction to do business with NTCSA or State-Owned Companies. Tenderers are ineligible to submit a tender if
Tenderers have the nationality of a country on any international sanctions list. A tenderer shall be found to have the nationality of a country if the tenderer is a national or is constituted, incorporated, or registered and operates in conformity with the provisions of the laws of that country. This criterion shall also apply to the determination of the Controlled Disclosure When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of NTCSA SOC Ltd, © copyright NTCSA SOC Ltd, Reg No 2021/539129/30 of 70 File name: 559-235050781 OT_Invitation to Tender - Security upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 559-235050781 Rev 3 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date July 2024 Review Date July 2027 nationality of proposed subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract including related services.
Tenderers submit more than one tender either individually or as a partner in a joint venture (JV) or consortium, except on an E-Tendering system where there is a limit size (The upload size per document is 500 megabytes and total submission is restricted to 4 gigabytes).
Tenders submitted by a joint venture or consortium where the JV/consortium agreement does not explicitly state that the parties of the JV or consortium shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of the Contract in accordance with the Contract terms.
A Tenderer must not have a conflict of interest. All Tenderers found to have a conflict of interest shall be disqualified. Prima facie evidence that a tenderer has a conflict of interest with one or more parties in this tendering process is: (a) they have a controlling partner or majority shareholder in common; or (b) they have a relationship with each other, directly or through common third parties, that puts them in a position to have access to information about or influence on the tender of another tenderer, or to influence the decisions of the Employer regarding this bidding process;
Tenders signed by non- authorised persons.
Any tenderer that is restricted by National Treasury.
Any tenderer on the Tender Defaulters list.
A tenderer that sub-contracts 100% of the Scope of Work.
Flagged suppliers. Ineligible of the flagged suppliers/tenderers will be due to the following reasons
Those suppliers implicated in serious misconduct by the Zondo Report or the SIU pending the finalisation of supplier disciplinary measures against these suppliers; and
Other suppliers implicated in serious misconduct and a breach of the Eskom Supplier Integrity Pact by a forensic report or other source of credible information, such as the SAPS, the NPA, the SIU or other related source.
List of Restricted Suppliers and Defaulters as per PRECCA as issued by National Treasury The implications of this “flag” are as follows: o No new contracts or extension of existing contracts may be awarded to the supplier pending finalisation of supplier disciplinary processes against the supplier. Where a As such, the supplier’s bid should be removed from any tender evaluation at the “eligibility” or “compliance” assessment stage of the evaluation. Controlled Disclosure When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of NTCSA SOC Ltd, © copyright NTCSA SOC Ltd, Reg No 2021/539129/30 of 70 File name: 559-235050781 OT_Invitation to Tender - Security upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 559-235050781 Rev 3 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date July 2024 Review Date July 2027 NTCSA will disqualify tenderers that are found not to have met the eligibility criteria. 2.2 -2.5 Tender Closing The deadline for tender submission is: Date: 31 July 2026 Time: 10h00 (SAST) Late Tenders will not be accepted. Tenders are uploaded via NTCSA Tender bulletin site on the Eskom E- tendering page. 2.9 Submitting a tender For Electronic Tender Submissions. The tenderer must upload the tender via NTCSA Tender bulletin site on the Eskom E- tendering page. The documents need to be uploaded under the folder Technical, Commercial, Financial, and other. All documents need to be submitted in a PDF format (The upload size per document is 500 megabytes and total submission is restricted to 4 gigabytes). The price list may be submitted in PDF and a copy in excel format. No Zip/condense files can be uploaded No hard copy will be accepted If for some reason you resubmit your tender, then the latest version of the tender submitted will only be accepted and all previous submission/s will be null and void. Please ensure that the submission status is indicated as complete. Supplier Help Manual guide and video can be found on Eskom E-Tendering page. 2.12 Tender Validity Period The tender validity period is twelve (12) weeks: NTCSA may extend the validity period for a specified additional period. Should extension of validity be required by NTCSA, tenderers agreeing to the request will not be required or permitted to modify a tender. If a tenderer modifies a tender, such a tender will be disqualified from the evaluation process. 2.15 clarification meeting 1. Clarification Meeting A non-compulsory clarification meeting with representatives of NTCSA will take place as follows: Date: 09 July 2026 Time: 10h00 (SAST) Venue: MS Teams (Virtual) Controlled Disclosure When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of NTCSA SOC Ltd, © copyright NTCSA SOC Ltd, Reg No 2021/539129/30 of 70 File name: 559-235050781 OT_Invitation to Tender - Security upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 559-235050781 Rev 3 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date July 2024 Review Date July 2027 Meeting Link: https://teams.microsoft.com/meet/390051265562957?p=8Z VSImq9MB4CLAkMc5 Tenderers can participate in the virtual clarification meeting by clicking on the link above.
Site Visit (Compulsory) Date: 14 July 2026 Time: 10h00 (SAST) Venue: Pembroke Substation GPS Coordinates: 32°52'59.5"S 27°31'34.3"E Note: Failure to attend the compulsory site visit, will result in your tender being disqualified Special Requirements: All personnel visiting site must wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE), including safety shoes and hard hats, and adhere to Eskom's Lifesaving Rules. Tenderers to confirm their intention to attend with the NTCSA Representative, stating the name, position and contact details of each proposed attendee. Please note that if the tender stipulates that a clarification meeting is mandatory/compulsory, then tenderers must attend such meeting. Tenderers that do not attend such mandatory/compulsory meeting will be disqualified and will not be evaluated. 2.16 Seeking clarification The tenderer will notify NTCSA of any clarifications required before the closing time for clarification queries, which is 05 working days before the deadline for tender submission. This includes the requests for extension for tender closing date. Any addenda or clarifications to the Invitation to Tender (ITT) will be posted on the e-tender portal and the Tender Bulletin. Tenderers must review these platforms for updates before finalizing their bid submissions. NTCSA will not be responsible for any disadvantages or disqualifications resulting from Tenderers not accessing the latest ITT information. 2.22 Alternative tenders Alternative tenders are not allowed. 2.33 Cataloguing The successful tenderer may be required to provide the cataloguing information per item after contract award, and in that instance, will need to ensure that all materials delivered to NTCSA are labelled in line with NTCSA’s labelling specifications as may be stipulated. Where cataloguing is a requirement, the Pricing Schedule must also include a line item for Controlled Disclosure When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of NTCSA SOC Ltd, © copyright NTCSA SOC Ltd, Reg No 2021/539129/30 of 70 File name: 559-235050781 OT_Invitation to Tender - Security upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 559-235050781 Rev 3 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date July 2024 Review Date July 2027 cataloguing, which tenderers are required to quote for. NTCSA will pay for the cataloguing. 2.34 Provision of Security for Provision of security for performance is not applicable Performance 3.4 Tender Opening For E-tendering. There will be no public opening of tenders. Tenders will be downloaded electronically. 3.5 Prices to be read out or not Prices will not be read out. 3.9 Basic Compliance Basic compliance with this enquiry requires a tenderer to meet all the following requirements: Basic compliance for this invitation to tender are
Meet the eligibility criteria for a tenderer
Submit a complete tender with commercial, financial and technical information
Submission of the mandatory commercial tender returnables as at stipulated deadlines. For E-Tendering, a tenderer’s failure to have submitted/uploaded tender documents will render the tender non-responsive. 3.10 Mandatory tender A tenderer that does not submit mandatory documents or the complete returnables information required in mandatory documents by the deadlines stipulated in the Tender Returnable section will be deemed non-responsive. Mandatory requirements Mandatory Requirement/ Gate Keeper Yes No Construction Manager Professional Registration: Registered as Professional Construction Manager/ Professional Construction Project Manager with SACPCMP or any registration with ECSA. CIDB Requirements It is estimated that tenderers must have a Construction Industry Development Board (CIDB) contractor grading of 6EP or higher. Only those tenderers who are registered with the CIDB, or are capable of being so prior to the evaluation of submissions, in a contractor grading designation equal to or higher than a contractor grading designation determined in accordance with the sum tendered, or a value determined in accordance with Regulation 25 (1B) or 25(7A) of the Construction Industry Development Regulations, for a EP class of construction work, are eligible to have their tenders evaluated. Controlled Disclosure When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of NTCSA SOC Ltd, © copyright NTCSA SOC Ltd, Reg No 2021/539129/30 of 70 File name: 559-235050781 OT_Invitation to Tender - Security upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 559-235050781 Rev 3 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date July 2024 Review Date July 2027 3.13 Functionality requirements Functionality requirements are applicable. Tenderers will be evaluated against a weighted scorecard. Tenderers who do not meet the minimum threshold of 70% will not be evaluated further. The detailed technical evaluation criteria are set out in Table 1 below. Refer to document - Document Identifier: TPDSOU-343 Table 1: Technical Evaluation Criteria: NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation
Human Resource Skills & Training Weight Score Source of evidence 1.1 Company Organogram 2% Organogram certified by owner/ member/ director 1.2 Construction Manager 5% Originally certified
Qualification: Minimum, National Diploma certificates in Built Environment
Professional Registration: Professional Construction Manager/ Professional 10% To be accompanied by Construction Project Manager with an affidavit done by the SACPCMP or any ECSA Registration certificate holder to 5% confirm his/her
Detailed CV (with minimum 5 years of employment. related experience) 1.3 Construction Supervisor: Electrical Works 5%
Qualification: Minimum, National Diploma in Electrical Engineering (HC) 5%
Detailed CV (with minimum 5 years of related experience) 4%
ORHVS – Outcome 3 Originally certified certificates 2%
Electrical Supervision Training 2%
LV Regulations Training To be accompanied by 5% an affidavit done by the
Live LV Work Methods/ Electrical trade certificate holder to Controlled Disclosure When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of NTCSA SOC Ltd, © copyright NTCSA SOC Ltd, Reg No 2021/539129/30 of 70 File name: 559-235050781 OT_Invitation to Tender - Security upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template Document 559-235050781 Rev 3 Identifier Invitation to Tender Effective Date July 2024 Review Date July 2027 3% confirm his/her
Cable joining & termination employment. 1%
CSD number to gain access to
o Document specific checklists and registers o Monitoring/Inspection reports o Findings and close out reports. o Natural resource consumption (water, fuel, electricity usage etc.) 2.7 Related/Supporting Documents [1] 32-1034 Eskom Procurement and Supply Chain Management Procedure [2] 240-106082683 SHEQ Requirements for the Procurement and Supply Chain Processes in Eskom CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134 Suppliers Revision: 1 Page
The Contractor Environmental Management Model Transmission has adopted a six-phase environmental contractor management model to effectively manage contracts and suppliers. Phase 2: Phase Phase 4: Site Phase Tender Phase 5:Contract Phase 6: Post Mobilisation 1:Design Enquiry, 3:Supplier Execution -Contract /Access to Phase Evaluation Registration and Continual Review site and Award Monitoring Figure 1: illustrate the six phases environmental contractor management model 3.1 Phase 1: Design Phase
Environmental Practitioners to provide the designer with an environmental specification that are specific to the contract or services to ensure integration of the environmental requirements into the design.
The designer and the responsible environmental practitioner to conduct a site visit before commencing with the design or contract goods and services environmental specification can be developed. 3.2 Phase 2: Tender Enquiry, Evaluation, and Award
Functional environmental requirements will form part of the tender/enquiry. The tender/ enquiry shall be accompanied by a contract specific environmental specification and risk assessment and applicable SHE policies and procedures. CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134 Suppliers Revision: 1 Page: Transmission Supplier Conduct due diligence on All environmental documentation, records, reports shall be the supplier prior the work made available for review when requested by Transmission or is executed its appointed inspection agency. The supplier shall provide suitable facilities and safe working environmental to Transmission or its appointed environmental agency 3.3 Contractors Environmental Management System Requirements
The Contractor/supplier shall have a documented, implemented and maintained environmental management system, preferably guided by the ISO 14001:2015 Standard. New Suppliers can provide evidence of their compliance by maintaining accurate and up-to- date documentation and records related to their environmental management practices. This can include policies, procedures, training records, audits, and monitoring reports.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all their Supplier Organisation’s environmental programmes comply with the Transmission requirements. The Contractor shall define the specific environmental control elements applicable to the scope of works, goods or services.
The Contractor shall inform Transmission of any changes to the environmental requirements that were evaluated during the tendering stage prior to implementation of these changes. 3.4 Environmental Planning
Any revisions to the plans/programmes shall require the agreement of Transmission or its environmental representatives prior to the commencement of work involving an activity affected by such changes.
The revision of environmental documents shall be subjected to review and approval by all parties previously responsible for evaluation prior to implementation. CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134 Suppliers Revision: 1 Page
The following will form part of the supplier’s documented EMS, and shall be internally reviewed, and formally approved. The environmental management system must cover each distinct stage of work performed/undertaken and it shall include but not be limited to: o Site establishment. o Access control to site. o Site construction and installation work (civil, electrical, power lines etc.). o Manufacturing (site, factory, temporary workshops etc.). o Storage areas (plant, equipment, free issue material etc.). o Waste Management Plan (or method statement); Site and Vegetation Clearing. o Handling of Hazardous Chemical substances. o Site management (water management, dust and noise, landowner liaison, final release and settlement of disputes and claims). o Rehabilitation. o Site demobilization.
Different physical locations where the supplier’s work will be performed, the significant environmental conditions will be included and mitigated.
Work to be performed by the supplier and their pre-determined scoping requirements.
Waste management plan/procedure that includes waste segregation and minimisation, waste disposal register, anticipated waste streams to be generated and related legal requirements applicable to waste management for specific scope of work.
Environmental records to be retained at site for the specific scope of work and, shall include but not be limited to: o Environmental Authorisation (including all other permits and licenses). o Project specific Environmental Management Plan/Programme. o Aspects and Impacts register. o Incident register and Investigation reports. o Non – Conformance register. CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134 Suppliers Revision: 1 Page: o Complaints register. o Waste statistics (reused, recycled, donated and disposal records). o Water use records. o Hazardous Substances registers and Safety Data Sheets. o Records of internal and external audits and inspections (reports, findings, action plans and close outs). o Records of site inspections conducted (checklists and reports). o ECO reports (where applicable). o Energy Efficiency Checklists. o Appointed environmental representative (Appointment Letter). 3.5 Organisational Environmental Aspects and Impacts Registers
Transmission Aspects and Impacts register shall identify/indicate/define/reflect the supplier’s scope as per the requirements of ISO 14001: 2015.
Transmission requires that the service providers ’s environmental requirements documentation meet the additional requirements below as a minimum
Identify and list all environmental aspects per activity.
Determine all the possible environmental impacts for each of the identified aspects.
All environmental aspects shall be assessed before and after controls.
Identify significant Aspects and Impacts and establish programmes/ procedures on how to address the impact to the environment.
The impacts shall be rated and must be included in a compiled Environmental Aspects and Impacts register (See Appendix A).
Aspects and Impacts register by the contractors/suppliers must be a revision-controlled document; An example of the Environmental Criteria for determining the significant impacts are explained in Appendix A. Note: this shall be managed according to the level of environmental risk. CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134 Suppliers Revision: 1 Page: Transmission Supplier Significant aspects shall be considered in the Planned actions and impact control (corrective) setting of Objectives and Targets and the measures for the medium and high significant determination of the environmental risks and impacts shall be undertaken through opportunities at the project level. environmental management programme/plan and/or through operational controls. Note: These records shall be kept in a hard copy and submitted to the environmental practitioners
The supplier’s organisational structure shall indicate the current management hierarchy as per scope of work (include SHEQ representatives). The structure must clearly show lines of responsibility and authority and shall reflect both the names of the appointed persons and their respective designations and positions. The management representative (i.e. appointed responsible authority of site) having overall responsibility for environmental management and planning.
A qualified person (National Diploma or a degree e.g., Environmental Sciences/Management or Nature Conservation or relevant Natural Sciences) having the responsibility for monitoring environmental planning and activities and their relationship within the management structure according to the project EMPr/EMP and/or EA requirement. For low risk projects an environmental representative with two weeks environmental training will be sufficient to be an environmental representative.
Environmental tender returnable must be clear to suppliers. The environmental practitioner to identify and list all applicable environmental requirements in relation to the scope of work
Where applicable, the tenders or potential suppliers must conduct a site visit of the area where the work shall be executed before tendering.
The site visit will be conducted with the supervision of contract custodian together with the commercial practitioner. CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, © copyright Eskom Holdings SOC Ltd, Reg No 2002/015527/30 Environmental Requirements for Contractors and/or Unique Identifier: 240-180100134 Suppliers Revision: 1 Page: Items for informing the Tenderer
For the environmental requirements that were not met during the evaluation phase, the Tenderer will be given seven (7) days to submit the outstanding requirements. failure to submit the outstanding requirements within the seven (7) days period will render the tenderer non-compliant and the evaluated score will not change. As environmental requirements in a tender are contractual requirements, the non-compliance will not lead to a tenderer’s disqualification but will be highlighted in the submission report to the Delegated Approval Authority (DAA) for the Tenderer to address during the negotiations or post contract award.
Outstanding environmental issues at the clarification must be provided for in the contract with the tenderer given a specific period post contract award to address.
A site plan must indicate evacuation routes and emergency assembly point locations.
Zones for particular activities.
Cranes (including radii and capacities).
Site offices.
Welfare facilities.
Off-loading, temporary storage and storage areas (laydown areas).
Sub-contractor facilities were applicable.
Car parking including reverse parking.
Access (must consider people with disability), entrances, security and access controls, temporary roads, and separate pedestrian routes.
Site hoardings and existing boundaries.
Temporary services (including electrical power, lighting, water distribution, drainage, information and communications technology, site security systems, and so on).
Location of fire extinguishers and first aid kits.
Fire hazard The Contractor shall develop emergency protocols for dealing with fires, which may include a Fire Management Plan in accordance with the National Veld and Forest Fire Act (No ) and ensure that all staff is trained / informed in fire prevention. No area shall be denuded of vegetation to create firebreaks. Open fires are not allowed on site. The Contractor Environmental Officer shall ensure that in areas with a high fire danger rating, staff is informed of this. Smoking shall be restricted to designated areas or shall not be allowed, particularly in areas that have a high fire danger rating. Contractor shall ensure that adequate Fire Fighting equipment is available on site, particularly near hot work and/or where it is specifically identified as a requirement by either the landowner or during the risk assessment.
Environmental factors to H&S The principal contractor shall monitor dust and noise caused by mobile equipment, generators and other equipment during construction. Factors such as wind can often affect the intensity to which these impacts are experienced. To ensure that noise does not constitute a disturbance during construction activities. CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No 2021/539129/30 NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1 HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474 Revision: 1 Page: of 40 Dust suppression measures shall be in place to reduce the dust caused by the movement of heavy vehicles and other contractor activities in order not obscure visibility.
Signing off the contract No project shall be signed off before the client has assessed the activities completed in relation to health & safety outstanding issues.
Forums for Governance and Communication Governance and communication structures shall be established on site where project H&S matters shall be discussed. The agenda, minutes and attendance registers of H&S meetings shall be available. Statutory H&S Committees in terms of Section 19 and 20 and General Administrative Regulations 5 of the OHS Act and Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) requirements shall be established.
Construction Vehicles and Mobile Plant Construction vehicles and equipment shall comply with the relevant legal and other requirements like Construction Regulations 23, the National Road Traffic Act, the Mine Health and Safety Act, National Environmental Act and Eskom Holdings (NTCSA) Vehicle Safety Specification Procedure 240-62946386. The following requirements are applicable during operation of construction vehicles: A principal contractor shall ensure that construction vehicles and mobile plant are operated by persons with appropriate training, certified competent and in possession of proof of competency, and authorised in writing to operate those construction vehicles and mobile plant
Designated drivers shall be in possession of an appropriate valid driver’s licence for the class of vehicle operated. The driver’s license shall be kept by the person so authorised who shall produce such card on request.
All construction vehicle operators, flagman/banksman/signalman/pointsman shall wear visible PPE at identified high-risk construction sites and shall be visible to the operators during the day or night.
Heavy construction vehicle parking sites, driveways, or any site shall be designed in such a way that no reversing is required. Where reversing is unavoidable, it shall only be done in the presence of a flagman or a banksman.
The contractor shall develop a vehicle and pedestrian management plan.
Relevant traffic signs shall be displayed.
Reverse beepers shall be fitted on construction vehicles.
Drivers of construction vehicles and mobile plant shall have medical certificates of fitness to operate those construction vehicle and mobile plant, issued by an occupational health practitioner in the form of Annexure 3 of the Construction Regulations. CONTROLLED DISCLOSURE When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of National Transmission Company South Africa SOC Ltd Reg No 2021/539129/30 NSP 1 SECURITY UPGRADE FOR PEMBROKE SUBSTATION_ C. TXF0143_Rev 1 HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) SPECIFICATION Unique Identifier: 559-559476474 Revision: 1 Page: of 40
The speed limit within the bounds of the construction site shall be clearly stipulated and communicated to everyone and be part of the induction.
Drivers / operators shall not text or talk on cell phones or two-way radios while driving.
The Principal Contractor/ contractor shall ensure that employees do not: i). Ride on back of light delivery vehicles, cranes or other mobile plant equipment. ii). Leave vehicles unattended with the engine running. iii). When unattended, vehicles shall be locked, chock blocks fitted, and keys removed.
Vehicle shall be searched on the premises or when entering or leaving the premises.
The Principal Contractor/ contractor shall be responsible for the safety and security of his vehicles (including private vehicles) on the premises.
The Principal Contractor/ contractor shall maintain his vehicles in roadworthy condition with valid licenses. These vehicles shall be subject to inspection by the Client representative. Un- roadworthy vehicles shall not be allowed to site.
B-BBEE Details: Claim Form in
terms of PPPFA
2022 regulations
1.1.13 # Specific Goals √
A tenderer’s
failure to submit
proof that it meets
the specific goals
will not result in
its
disqualification.
The tenderer will,
however, be
Controlled Disclosure
When downloaded from the document management system, this document is uncontrolled and the responsibility rests
with the user to ensure it is in line with the authorized version on the system. No part of this document may be
reproduced in any manner or form by third parties without the written consent of NTCSA SOC Ltd, © copyright NTCSA
SOC Ltd, Reg No 2021/539129/30
of 70
File name: 559-235050781 OT_Invitation to Tender - Security upgrade for Pembroke - E3176NTCSAMWP- NSP 1 Security Upgrade for
Pembroke SS - E3176NTCSAMWP
Template ID: 240-43921804 (Rev 7) Header and Footer portrait template
Document 559-235050781 Rev 3
Identifier
Invitation to Tender
Effective Date July 2024
Review Date July 2027
scored zero for
Specific Goals for
purposes of
PPPFA scoring
and ranking.
1.1.14 Compliance with √
Employment
Equity Act
To the extent that
the tenderer falls
within the
definition of a
“designated
Employer” as
contemplated in
the Employment
Equity Act , the
tenderer is
required to
furnish the
Employer with
proof of
compliance with
the Employment
Equity Act,
including proof of
submission of the
Employment
Equity report to
the Department of
Labour. (South
African tenderers
only)
1.1.15 **SBD 4 – Annexure J Y √
Bidders
Disclosure
1.1.16 Additional Documents required in event of JV:-
1.1.16 Letter of intent to √
.1 form a
JV/consortium or
Valid joint venture
agreement
confirming the
rights and
obligations of
each of the joint
Controlled Disclosure
When downloaded from th
Section
Source: Tender Pack - NSP 1 Security Upgrade for Pembroke Substation - E3176NTCSAMWP.zip# Returnables required at Tender Closing date and time for evaluation
not be disqualified but will score zero.
Documents required under functionality/techinical criteria
1.1.41 Functionality/Tec Y √
3.18 Evaluation of Specific Goals Specific goals will be scored out of 20 points in accordance with the
If a tenderer fails to submit evidence of its points claim for a Specific Goal,
it will not be disqualified. However, it will be awarded 0 points for that
B-BBEE Status Level of Number of points
Contributor (80/20 system)
80/20 system. NTCSA will add the score from Pricing and Specific Goals
Contractual Requirements are not evaluation criteria. They will
1.1.37 Quality √
safety/quality
1.1.11 Tax Evaluation N/A
Preference Points
terms of PPPFA
1.1.13 # Specific Goals √
the specific goals
scored zero for
Specific Goals for
PPPFA scoring
These rules commonly apply to South African public-sector procurement.
Act 53 of 2003
Provides the empowerment-compliance context often used in public-sector supplier evaluation.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 108 of 1996 (s217)
Sets the constitutional standard for fair, equitable, transparent, competitive and cost-effective public procurement.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 5 of 2000
Covers preferential procurement and preference-point systems used in public tenders.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 12 of 2004
Supports anti-corruption controls and supplier integrity in procurement processes.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 28 of 2024
Provides the national framework for public procurement across government.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 2 of 2000
Supports access to tender records, award decisions and public-sector procurement information.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
Act 3 of 2000
Supports lawful, reasonable and procedurally fair administrative tender decisions.
Relevant because this is a South African public-sector procurement opportunity.
This is general procurement context, not legal advice. Always verify requirements in the official tender documents and issuing authority notices.
To download these documents and access AI-powered analysis, visit the main tender page.
Contact Person
Dineo Maepa
Phone
011-871-3165
[email protected]
Website
www.eskom.co.za/Pages/Landing.aspx
Address
Lake Street, Germiston, Johanessburg, 1401, South Africa
Source confidence
High source confidence
Official source
eTenders.gov.za
Documents found
1
Last checked
02 Jul 2026
AI status
Enhanced
This tender has strong source evidence, including source metadata and supporting tender information synced from the government tender portal.
Tenders SA is not the issuing authority. All tenders are automatically synced from the official government tender portal. Always confirm final submission details, closing dates, briefing sessions, eligibility requirements, and documents on the official government portal before applying.
Eskom is South Africa's primary electricity supplier, managing generation, transmission, and distribution.
Key Personnel
Data conflicts
None detected
Lake Street, Germiston, Johanessburg, 1401, South Africa
Get deep intelligence on Other professional, scientific and technical activities. Unlock full pricing strategies, bid frequency, and historical win rates.